Home

Evolution Series Handbook

1. FIFO DDS PLL TCXO VCXO Internal Tx Clock Mode 1 21 1 2 Tx Clock In When Tx Clock In is selected the DTE equipment is responsible for providing the clock The modem provides a signal on ST Send Timing in this mode and requires a clock signal to be provided on TT Terminal Timing The ST signal is provided in order to allow the DTE to be operated with a modem supplied clock in a similar way to when nternal Clock is selected but the TT and SD Send Data phase relationship will be correctly aligned If the external clock is missing for any reason then the modem will substitute an internal clock Note that the G 703 interface should always use external clocking 8 2 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook TxData TxClock TT Internal Tx Clock ST y y 4 Modem Tx Data Interface FIFO DDS Ecran v VCXO External Tx Clock Mode 1 21 1 3 Receive Reference When Receive Reference is selected it allows the modem to provide an ST clock to the DTE that is locked to the receive satellite signal The timing is actually phase locked to the Rx data rate but at the frequency of the Tx data rate This is to allow asymmetric operation The DTE then synchronises the data going into the modem SD to this clock If the external clock is missing for any reason then the modem will subs
2. G I F Rx Data B output G I F Rx Data A output G I F Tx Data B input G I F Tx Data A input 12 Test Mode must be open 25 Ground circuit Ground P3713 D type connector socket Ground ere Ground ia 2 5 C GIFTxDataAint 3 C GIFTxDataBinpu 16 C GI FRxDataAoutput_ 4 C GUF RxDataBoutput V E OX E QU 18 D I F Tx Clock A output modem D IF Tx Clock B 5 modem 8 DliFTxClckBinpu 21 Dl FTxDataAinpt 9 DVFTxDataBinput 22 _D WF Rx Clock B output 11 DiFRxDataBoupu 24 O Bl 2 Where C indicates Eurocom type C interface D indicates Eurocom type D interface G indicates Eurocom type G interface 10 14 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook P3713 D type connector socket 6 DSRA 19 RISB 8 RxReadyA 21 Remotelopbak 9 RxCokB 22 DSRB P3713 D type connector socket This supports the P3702 G 703 card G703 Balanced G703 Balanced 1 Tx Data B 2 TxDaaA 5 s diu cau A NES 6 10 15 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Comparison of P3709 and P3713 Interface connections The D type can be a socket Combined Eurocom EIA530 or plug P300 compatible Eurocom P3713 P3709 Eurocom D 1 EIA530 G703 SCKT PLUG P3709 P3714 P3713 P3713 y
3. STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT SUMMARY Tx R Unit Memory Recall b d Store d Download Upload Upload Saved Configuration Control Shared UNIT STATUS Name for new configuration Browse RX TRAFFIC Upload Saved Configuration TX TRAFFIC TEST MODE TX CARRIER Help To upload a configuration from he local computer enter the path and the name of the file or use the browse facility Note some browsers may add an extra txt extension to the name This will automatically be stripped off on upload Configuration Memory Upload Screen 7 160 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 20 4 Interface Configurations STATUS TEST HELP LOGOUT Local O SUMMARY Unit Memory Interface M amp C h d Clocks Advanced Upgrade Network ID Paradise modem y Serial No 10500355 port2 Y port3 Y porta Mode In control Control Exclusive General Terrestrial interface type IP v One For One Mode UNIT STATUS Bea II IF port impedance 50 Ohms v G 703 TX TRAFFIC G 703 data rate G 703 line format TEST MODE TX CARRIER G 703 line encoding G 703 line length IP HELP EU T IP traffic mode Ethernet traffic mode Bridge mode for point to point IP v Traffic port Ethe emoi et IP o 0 0 0 Satellite port IP address Traffic port IP subnet mask 255 255 255 255 Satellite port IP netmask boi Traffic port Ethernet IP Traffic port e diarad IP 0 0 0 0 Satellite port IP gat
4. 1 24 3 Detected Failures A failure is defined as either a failure detected by a unit or a catastrophic power failure In these circumstances the modems will switch over if one unit remains operational If both units fail simultaneously through external circumstances then no switch over takes place Both unit and traffic faults can cause a switch over Traffic faults that are external to the equipment and that affect both units simultaneously do not result in any switch OVer 1 24 4 Manual Switchover The modem user interfaces support manual switching of control from the operational unit to the standby unit assuming the standby unit is working normally This is achieved by momentarily simulating a failure in the operational unit 1 24 5 1 for 1 Setup Procedure To set 1 for 1 operation between two modems the following steps need to be performed 1 Check that both modems have the same software issue 2 Connect a 4 way screened cable between the 9 pin 1 for1 connectors on the two modems this forces one modem to adopt the 1 1 standby mode 8 20 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 3 Connect the data interfaces in parallel and configure the two units alike Suitable adapter cables are available from Paradise Datacom for all of the standard interfaces 4 lf the Ethernet traffic port is used on the modem then the two traffic ports may be connected to a hub or other multi port LAN device using RJ45 cros
5. Edit Tx Carrier Advanced BUC Control Menu The following BUC screens are available only on L band modems BUC 1 Power offset 2 BUC type 3 PSU 4 Reference 5 Output 6 Attenuation 7 1 for 1 This menu contains the following options Power offset This allows the user to set the system gain or loss after the modem so the modem can display the transmit carrier level in terms of either the transmit power or EIRP measured in dBm or dBW BUC type Allows the type of BUC to be selected from a list of supported BUCs with the option of either open loop control Independent mode or closed loop control Terminal mode In closed loop mode the modem attempts to maintain a constant BUC output power by adjusting the modem output power and BUC attenuation level PSU If the modem is fitted with an internal DC power supply option then this screen allows the user to turn on or off the DC power supply to the BUC Reference This controls whether the modem provides a 10MHz reference signal to the BUC Output Turns the BUC RF output on or off Attenuation This allows the user to vary the BUC attenuator level 7 50 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook e 1 for 1 This controls whether BUC services i e DC supply and 10MHz reference stay with the on line modem or switch to the standby modem when a 1 for 1 switchover occurs in a 1 for 1 redundant pair of modems Note that FSK communications will always be switch
6. TSO bit 0 CRC4 Q323 Switch 2 Off 1 Off 2 On Options Off TSO transparent On TSO Bit O overwritten with CRC4 Factory default Ot Description Controls whether TSO is transparent or whether TSO is overwritten with CRC4 multiframe Note this is the same as SW3 2 within the Q323 definition 7 132 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook TS16 Transparent Q323 Switch 3 Off 1 Off 2 On Options Off If Switch 1 is ON then TS16 inverted On If Switch 1 is ON then TS16 transparent Factory Off default Description Controls whether TS16 is inverted or transparent Note this is the same as SW3 3 within the Q323 definition Invt bit 1 2 5 6 Q323 Switch 4 Off 1 Off 2 On Options Off If Switch 1 is ON then all bits are inverted On If Switch 1 is ON then bits 1 2 5 and 6 are inverted Factory default Off Description Controls whether all bits are inverted or bits 1 2 5 and 6 are inverted Note this is the same as SW3 4 within the Q323 definition 7 133 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook P300 equivalence is shown below Option OFF ON SW3 1 Normal operation TS1 31 modified SW3 2 TSO transparent TSO Bit 1 overwritten with CRC4 SW3 3 TS16 modified TS16 transparent SW3 4 TS1 31data inversion TS1 31 bit mask inversion SW3 3 and SW3 4 have no effect if SW3 1 is OFF The following modes are supported
7. SW3 1234 Mode 0000 Transparent 0100 Transparent CRC4 1000 TS1 31 Invert 1100 TS1 31 Invert CRC4 1001 TS1 31 Bit Invert 1101 TS1 31 Bit Invert CRC4 1010 TS1 15 17 31 Invert 0 TS1 31 Invert CRC4 111 1011 TS1 15 17 31 Bit Invert 1111 751 15 17 31 Invert CRC4 1 switch on 0 switch off Description Card functions as standard Q302 As above with CRC4 multi frame in TSO bit 1 Data through the modem is inverted As above with CRC4 multi frame in TSO bit 1 Data bits 1 2 5 and 6 are inverted As above with CRC4 multi frame in TSO bit 1 Data through the modem is invertedTS16 Channel Associated Signaling support As above with CRC4 multi frame in TSO bit 1 Data bits 1 2 5 and 6 are inverted TS16 Channel Associated Signaling support As above with CRC4 multi frame in TSO bit 1 When transparent TS16 options are selected and the P300 Quantum Evolution are in drop and insert mode the modems must be set to maintain timeslot identities if TS16 is part of the drop and insert group Edit Unit Advanced Special Modes Spoof Screen This option allows full connectivity of a PCM bearer to be spoofed even if the link is connected over satellite via a thin route i e less than the full PCM bearer using Drop amp Insert If enabled the following features of the PCM system appear transparent end to end 1 AIS all ones 2 Backward Alarm 3 CAS Backward alarm G 732 only Note that when enabled AIS is
8. This is the clock from the satellite This is converted back to the rate required at the terrestrial port Tx Clock In The Tx path input clock is used to clock Rx data to the terrestrial port This is plesiochronous mode and requires the receive buffer to be set to a value sufficient to accommodate both the difference in the clocks at each end of the link and any Doppler shift whilst providing the required interval between buffer slips Internal The internal reference clock is used to clock data to the terrestrial port This requires the receive buffer to be set as per the 7x Clock In option Station If the station clock frequency is the same as the Rx data rate then the station clock is used directly If the station clock is a different frequency to the Rx data rate then an internal conversion to the correct frequency is made This requires the receive buffer to be set as per the 7x Clock In option Satellite Sets the source of the clock for the Rx path 7 63 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook If the Rx clock is set to Satellite a G 703 interface card is fitted but not currently selected and the G 703 clock extension SAF feature is enabled then the following menu is displayed at this point Clock extension over sat Off New E1 This allows a high stability G 703 clock reference to be generated from the satellite signal see Section 8 8 for further details Options OFF E1
9. IP TRAFFIC DOWNCHAIN MODEM B RX IF L BAND SPLITTER Handshake Lines Many interfaces provide optional control lines such as RTS CTS etc It is generally better to implement these between equipments if possible Q3001 in LVDS Mode If the LVDS interface is fitted and is selected under Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial then the following interface description applies Signal Description Circuit Electrical Number Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX an ok ee COMMON LINES Y Signal Ground Y Shield Protective ground PG 101 1 Screen 10 2 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Signal Description LVDS Circuit EJ MG Device DTE Ready in Device DTE Ready in Ready In Electrical Levels LVDS DS LVDS The modem can operate at high data rates using the LVDS interface but the maximum useable data rate is limited by connecting cable length The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over a 10m cable over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles e 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc Similarly the maximum data rate increases as the connecting cable length is reduced i e 20Mbps to om 40Mbps to 2 5m E E s LVDS The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warni
10. Off Payload compression of IP packets is switched off On Payload compression of IP packets is switched on Factory default Off Description The IP payload compression feature implements IP payload compression of TCP and UDP packets to RFC 1951 the DEFLATE 7 97 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook algorithm This typically halves the size of the payload for packets that are not already compressed Note that payload compression is not a standalone feature and is available only when TCP acceleration and or header compression is active Since the bandwidth saving is statistical it is important to determine what saving is achieved empirically using representative data in order to avoid potential data loss This can be done by gradually reducing the satellite bandwidth once compression is active until the point is reached when some packet loss occurs or additional delay occurs in the case of TCP packets Edit Unit Interface IP Mode Web Proxy Screen Options Factory default Description Web acceleration Off 1 Off 2 On Off In this mode all HTTP requests to web servers pass through the modem as normal with no special processing On In this mode the modem stores web pages returned from web servers as a result of requests made by users from their web browsers Once the web page has been received by the modem the modem parses through the page checking for in line ob
11. Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 12 Fault Messages The following table lists all of the modem faults along with a description of what the fault means It also describes relevant checks the operator might make to try to eliminate the fault condition Note that the text shown in the table will be displayed in full on the web user interface and in the system log but may appear in an abbreviated format on the front panel LCD display due to space considerations The acronyms used to define the actions taken on each fault occurring are as follows Actions Relays U Prompt unit fault relay T Prompt traffic fault relay D Deferred alarm relay Actions To Terrestrial TA AIS in selected timeslot if the Insert MUX is active or AIS over all data if not in Insert mode If Insert mode is active and the user control thin route spoofing is on then AIS is forced over the whole PCM bearer not just the selected timeslots to spoof full bearer connectivity when passed over a Thin Route satellite circuit TB Frame Backward alarm TC AIS forced in the G 732 CAS abcd signalling nibble TD Force a fixed value in the G 732 CAS abcd signalling nibble TE Multiframe Backward alarm in IBS SMS TS16 TS48 over satellite Actions To Satellite SA AIS framed and scrambled and subject to RS coding if active SB Frame Backward alarm SC AIS in CAS signalling carried in IBS SMS TS16 TS48 over sat
12. TELEDYNE PARADISE DATACOM Ltd A Teledyne Technologies Company ww Installation and Operating Handbook for Quantum and Evolution Series Satellite Modems Issue 2 0 18a 2 December 2011 CE 2011 EN 55022 Class B EN 55024 EN 60950 Teledyne Paradise Datacom Ltd Teledyne Paradise Datacom LLC 2 amp 3 The Matchyns Rivenhall End 328 Innovation Blvd Witham Essex CM8 3HA England State College PA 16803 U S A Tel 44 0 1376 515636 Tel 1 814 238 3450 Fax 44 0 1376 533764 Fax 1 814 238 3829 http www paradisedata com Copyright 2005 2011 Teledyne Paradise Datacom Ltd All rights reserved Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Table of Contents Chapter 1 Welcome ue is supe aaa Dau auo soa acu uaa suae asa Eva a aC ua aua aeu i 1 1 Chapter 2 About This Handbook 1 ee eeeeeee ee ieeeer eene eene nennen nnn nana 2 1 T1 CONVENTION Sorana EREEREER ADER a a 2 1 1 2 rademarks 1 0 ccc cec cece cececeeceeecececeeceeeceeeceecaeeceeesseseeeseeeseesseeseeseeeseeseesueeseeseeeseeeaaes 2 1 1 3 IS Clete aa ease ro uate setae sea ee 2 1 1 4 GNU General Publie LICENSE sacesesaasedacanteantiaaiiacdianteanieanimanineadisadiaaiawniawn teen Rhet Git d 2 1 Chapter 3 Safety Information 11 eeeeeeeeee ee eeeeeee enne eene nnne nnn nnn 3 1 1 5 vci Temm 3 1 1 6 Environmental ccc cece eccc seca eece cece eeeeeceeeceeesee
13. s built in Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP email client This may be used to send a variety of information from the modem either on demand or at preset intervals including Up to a month s worth of logged Rx Eb No values Up to a month s worth of logged AUPC distant Eb No values Up to a month s worth of logged Rx power level values Up to a month s worth of logged user BER values Up to a month s worth of logged AUPC Tx power level values Up to a month s worth of logged modem temperature values The contents of the system log i e all noteable events that have occurred Current system alarms i e all Unit Tx and Rx faults and warnings All configuration memories Instantaneous spectrum data Instantaneous constellation data Instantaneous PRBS BER test results The information is sent in CSV format which allows the data to be instantly copied into any spreadsheet from where it can be viewed in a number of formats e g as a graph or a table and from which a report can be generated in a few seconds The type of information to be sent is selected by checking the relevant check box on the email configurator screen see the next page Each type of data is appended to the email in separate attachment files for convenience In addition to sending just the current system alarms the modem may be requested to send all future unit faults and warnings as and when they occur The modem needs to know where to send all emails in order for th
14. sseseenmmm IRI 8 67 Chapter 9 Remote Control Protocol 1 cesses eeeeeee eene nnne 9 1 Chapter 10 Data Inlerfab6S aio nr coe reteeetucu tieu e ecu caa sues ova coca Eye voca Sou nnmnnn nnna 10 1 Chapter 11 Connector Pinouts 1 Lee e erre eccL cree cerne rr crie eere e naar nnn 11 1 Chapter 12 Fault Messages 1 eeeeiieeeeeee ee eeeee eene nnne nnn nena nnn anna nana 12 1 1 90 hrensmilr aullSus ee ee ee umm eee ee ee ee ee 12 2 199 PREMSIMIEVVARNING S zu 252430943094209920902090939994294904299 9999 29 9059808995223 12 4 CAO RECENO T aulis exi tiui KI I LE eM C e 12 5 1 41 Receive Warnings essssssessssseseeeene nennen nennen nnne nnn nennen nenne nna nnne nns 12 7 142 UNEF diss a nee Aone knee qd ctio S e Ce ARR SRP ROR ao E Soci ona 12 9 UE ME WOVE VIVIAN GS mms 12 10 TAF uigabiodoltejei s MERE EE ST 12 10 Chapter 13 Specification Summary 1 eccceeeee eec eeeeee eee nennen nnn 13 1 1 45 Common Main Specifications eeseessesseesee nennen nnne 13 1 1 46 Tx Modulator Specifications eseesseeseeen rn 13 3 1 47 Rx Demodulator Specifications eeseesseeseeer n 13 4 1 48 Clocking and Buffering Specifications eeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeennene 13 4 1 49 Framing and Deframing Specifications ccccccccccsccceeceeeeceeeeceeese
15. 0 828 0 886 0 938 0 960 TPC option Inner Forward Error BPSK 5 16 21 44 Correction 0 493 Paradise 2 3 3 4 0 789 Paradise 7 8 Paradise Rate 7 8 de facto O QPSK 5 16 21 44 0 493 Paradise 2 3 3 4 0 789 Paradise 7 8 Paradise 7 8 de facto 0 93 Paradise 8PSK 3 4 de facto 7 8 de facto 0 93 Paradise 16QAM 3 4 de facto 7 8 de facto 0 93 Paradise Viterbi BPSK O QPSK 1 2 3 4 7 8 TCM option 8PSK 2 3 Sequential option BPSK O QPSK 1 2 3 4 7 8 Outer Forward Error Concatenated Intelsat Reed Solomon Outer Codec to IESS308 310 with Custom Option offering variable code Correction rate up to 10 Mbps aa zB oynchronised to framing per IESS 309 up to 10 Mbps Scrambling IDR With RS Coding synchronised to RS overhead Without RS Coding and Non TPC FEC V 35 self Option and Closed e NENG synchronising No RS Coding with TPC FEC 21 1 up to 10 Mbps 32kbps or above synchronised to ESC overhead Less than 32kbps as per closed network V 35 Scrambler has CCITT Intelsat Fairchild and Linkabit modes up to 55Mbps with high Data Rate options Scrambling OM 73 Option Up to 55Mbps PD55 only IF Connector Type BNC female L band connector Type N Type female 13 2 Scrambling Closed Network Plus ESC Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Internal Frequency Reference Ageing lt Ippmiyr External Reference Clocking Only 1 10MHz in 1kHz steps Clocki
16. Factory default Off Description Allows a number of loopbacks to be selected to aid fault diagnosis and resolution of system level problems IF local is used to loopback transmit to receive internally within the modem Interface local and remote is used to loopback receive to transmit and is normally set on one of the pair of modems usually the remote modem The other modes are more specialized and cause a loopback at various points within the Tx Rx processing chains In general it is not a good idea to loopback IP data to itself This will cause the modem to retransmit on its terrestrial port packets that it has received and this can confuse intelligent switches which conclude that the original sending device has moved and is now on a different port which can cause traffic storms If it is necessary to test modems that have an IP interface it is recommended to change the terrestrial interface selected to be a serial interface which is fitted on all modems and to perform the loopback test and then change the interface back to IP 7 143 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Test BER Test Menu BER test 1 Tx 2 Rx 3 Results This menu contains the following options e x This allows the setup of the internal Pseudo Random Bit Sequence PRBS Bit Error Rate BER Tester for the Tx path e Rx This allows the setup of the internal PRBS BER Tester BERT for the Rx path e Results
17. Factory default Unbalanced Description Sets the G 703 line format Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial G 703 Line Encoding Screen G 703 line encoding AMI 1 AMI B3ZS B6ZS 4 B8ZS HDB3 Options AMI B3ZS B6ZS B8ZS HDB3 Factory default AMI Description Selects the different line coding available for the required data rate The objective is to limit the number of contiguous zeros transmitted on the G 703 line This is necessary with G 703 as with AMI a mark logic one is sent as a pulse on the line and a space logic zero is set as the absence of a pulse on the line If there are too many contiguous spaces the G 703 receiver fails to recover the clock properly as there are no incoming pulses for a while and it causes data errors HDB3 and B8ZS for example are both methods of ensuring that no more than three or eight zeroes respectively occur on a G 703 line by substituting strings of more than this number of zeroes with another code in turn this code is detected at the end of the G 703 line and replaced with the correct number of zeroes again 7 89 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial G 703 Line Length Screen G 703 line length 133m 1 133m 2 266m 3 399m 4 533m 5 655m Options 133m 266m 399m 533M 655m Factory default 133m Description Allows the signal to be pre compensated to cope with differing lengths of standard ABAM
18. It controls DVB S2 ACM in the Tx path Note that a similar screen is then displayed for ACM in Rx Enabling ACM in Rx causes the modem to automatically insert regular Es No information into the modem s carrier with no material effect on bandwidth This is used to control the carrier modcod selection of the other modem Other than Off On there are no other ACM user controls ACM status information is available on the Status Traffic screen by pressing the Down arrow Options Off Disables ACM in the Tx path On Enables ACM in the Tx path Factory default eH Description Controls DVB S2 ACM in the Tx path ACM in Rx is similarly set on the 7 99 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook screen following this See Section 8 12 14 for a full description of ACM Edit Unit Interface IP Address Screens When this option is selected the following sequence of screens is displayed in turn Edit Unit Interface IP Address Traffic Port IP Address Screen Traffic port IP address 0 0 0 0 New 010 000 070 002 Factory default 0 0 0 0 Description Sets the IP address for the base modem IP traffic port or the IP Traffic card if this is fitted Both of the Ethernet ports on the IP Traffic card use this same address and can be used interchangeably Unlike the base modem Remote M amp C port DHCP is not supported and therefore an address must be manually entered The traffic port IP address is not dire
19. SAF feature Maximum ESC Baud Rate IBS SMS uses a fixed frame format and therefore the amount of overhead is limited This screen displays the maximum ESC baud rate that may be selected The actual selection of the baud rate is done on the next screen ESC Baud Rate ESC Character Length ESC Parity ESC Interface See the descriptions under Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Overhead Closed Network Plus ESC Screens IBS SMS Aux Mode Options Off Intelsat over sampled Synchronous Factory default Off Description Controls the operating mode of the IBS Aux channel controlling the 14 19 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook allocation of overhead between the Aux and ESC interfaces ESC Interface See the description under Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Overhead Closed Network Plus ESC Screens AUX Interface See the description under Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Overhead Closed Network Plus ESC Screens ESC Audio Levels Units dB Minimum value 0 Maximum value 38 Step size 2 Factory default 0 Description Sets the input output levels for the IDR audio ESC channels The two channels can be configured independently ESC Backward Alarm Options Off On Factory default Off Description Controls the ESC Backward alarm setting 14 20 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Overhead IDR Screens The following sequence of screens will app
20. SCPC modems using either the base modem IP or the IP Traffic card 8 37 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Header compression on the IP Traffic card works to 29000 packets per second one way 22000 two way 1 32 4 Jumbo Ethernet Frame Support Leaving aside preamble a standard Ethernet frame has 18 bytes of overhead and varies in size between 64 bytes and 1518 bytes Some protocols extend the Ethernet frame e g VLAN and MPLS both add 4 bytes The base modem supports Ethernet frames up to 1536 bytes in length The IP Traffic card supports Ethernet frames up to 1600 bytes in length 1 32 5 IP Over ESC The Engineering Service Channel ESC is a low rate independent data channel from the main data channel that exists within some framed satellite services such as IBS and Closed Network plus ESC It was originally intended for inter earth station communications and is often used for M amp C control of remote equipment The ESC is implemented as an internal serial interface run at baud rates up to a maximum of 115kbps The ESC interface type needs to be set to IP to put the ESC into IP mode Because the ESC is a serial interface IP will not run directly on top of it the modem encapsulates IP packets within PPP much the same as a dial up modem connecting to the internet When used for IP the ESC channel runs in bridge mode with the M amp C port being bridged to the ESC channel Since the ES
21. The transmitter can switch between any two modcods it does not have to go through them in sequence Since ACM can work all the way down to a negative Es No i e below what the link was designed for it effectively gives 100 link availability albeit at a reduced data rate Note that with DVB S2 ACM pilots are automatically switched on at operating points where their use achieves the maximum throughput for a particular Es No For example for an available Es No of 6 5dB it is better to use short block 8PSK 3 5 with pilots on spectral efficiency 1 69bits s Hz than to use the most suitable short block modcod with pilots off i e QPSK 5 6 spectral efficiency 1 6bits s Hz Pilots are sometimes viewed as causing an undesirable increase in overhead but it should be remembered that they also reduce the Es No at which the modem can lock this trade off means that optimal throughput is sometimes achieved only with the active use of pilots Note that ACM can be used with AUPC at the same time providing automatic uplink power control helps maintain the remote Eb No at the target level Modcod changes are totally transparent at the receiver it does not involve the demodulator having to reacquire the signal Modcod changes can be made instantly whenever required maximising throughput at all times Because the symbol rate is kept constant any change in modcod will change the terrestrial data rate An increase in data rate does not need to be
22. This screen displays the BER test results and allows single errors to be injected or the test to be restarted The internal BER tester is available as a SAF option It provides the ability to monitor the BER of the Rx satellite path even while the main data channel of the link is carrying normal traffic It allows a test pattern to be sent and received in the main channel or in parallel with the main channel using the ESC or Aux overhead channels It can operate independently or in conjunction with external BER equipment The test patterns are Fireberd compatible For example the internal BER tester could be used to inject a PRBS test pattern and measure the Rx BER at one end of the link while at the other end a Fireberd is connected to the corresponding main data or overhead port Note that the following BER test screens apply to Tx and Rx but only the Tx screens are shown 7 144 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Test BER Tx Screen 1 Mode 2 Channel 3 Pattern This menu contains the following options e Mode This is used to switch the BER tester on and off e Channel This option allows the BER test pattern to be injected in either the main traffic channel of the modem or in an overhead channel e Pattern This allows a choice of bit patterns to be selected for injection into the traffic stream Test BER Tx Mode Screen BER mode 1 Off 2 On Options Off Switches the BER te
23. Tx Modulation Screen Modulation BPSK 1 BPSK 2 QPSK 3 OQPSK 4 8PSK 5 16QAM 6 3QAM 7 16APSK 8 32APSK 9 64QAM The table shown under Edit Tx FEC Inner defines normal operation with respect to FEC mode FEC rate and modulation scheme Options BPSK QPSK OQPSK 8PSK Requires 8PSK SAF feature Applicable to TCM TPC and FastLink LDPC 16QAM Requires 16QAM SAF feature Applicable to TPC and FastLink LDPC 8QAM Requires 8QAM SAF feature Applicable to FastLink LDPC 16APSK Requires 16APSK SAF feature Applicable to FastLink LDPC DVB S2 16APSK does not require this SAF 32APSK Requires 32APSK SAF feature Applicable to FastLink LDPC 64QAM Requires 64QAM SAF feature Applicable to FastLink LDPC Factory default QPSK Description Selects the modulation used for the carrier 7 25 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 3 1 5 Edit Tx FEC Menu 1 Inner 2 Outer This menu contains the following options e Inner This submenu controls the Inner FEC settings for the modem e Outer This submenu controls the Outer Reed Solomon FEC settings for the modem Edit Tx FEC Inner Menu Inner This menu contains the following options e FEC This selects the Inner FEC type e Rate This selects the FEC rate The next table defines normal operation with respect to FEC mode FEC rate and modulation scheme 7 26 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation an
24. cable If in doubt select option 1 less than 133 feet by default no compensation Screen only available when T1 or T2 is selected Edit Unit Interface IP Menu 1 Mode 2 Address 3 Misc This menu has the following options e Mode This controls the various IP features such as bridging routing acceleration and compression e Address This is used to set up the IP terrestraial and satellite traffic addresses e Misc This submenu controls miscellaneous IP related options such as VLAN IPV6 and line speed duplex settings Edit Unit Interface IP Mode Screens When this option is selected the following sequence of screens is displayed in turn 7 90 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface IP Mode IP Mode Screen Options Factory default Description IP mode Bridge mode New Routing mode Bridge mode Select this mode for ordinary Ethernet over satellite bridging i e point to point systems In this mode the Layer 2 Ethernet bridge builds up bridging information based on the replies it receives back allowing it to ascertain which network segments devices are located on Routing mode IP packets are forwarded based on the contents of the modem s routing table The routing table can be populated by manually entering routes and or by turning on one or more of the supported dynamic routing protocols The dynamic routing protocols enable the modem to au
25. depth 4 for 1544kbps IDR mode or 219 201 9 depth 4 for 2048kbps IDR mode and TCM lt 1544kbps or 219 201 9 depth 8 for TCM gt 1544kbps Combined encoder and decoder 8 x 2n k 60 Combined Interleaver De Interleaver 8 x n x Depth Calculate delay time using data rate including RS overhead When fitted allows arbitrary selection of n and k to provide fully variable code rate 60 lt n lt 255 n 20 lt k lt n 2 in steps of 2 Custom Option Interleaving depth of 4 or 8 The custom option allows use of shorter code words to reduce interleaver de interleaver delay on low data rate circuits Up to 10Mbps 1 51 Drop and Insert Option Specifications Processing Delay Paameter Modem Bearer Types T1 D4 T1 ESF and E1 G 732 Independent selection of arbitrary timeslots for both Timeslot Selection drop and insert The terrestrial bearer may be looped through the Drop Mux then Insert Mux or terminated after the Drop Mux and a new blank bearer generated by the Bearer Generation insert Mux The bearer generated within the Insert Mux provides full multiframe and CRC support and may be generated from the Tx clock station reference satellite clock or Internal reference In the event that the Insert Mux bearer clock is lost or AIS is supplied then the Insert Mux will switch temporarily to bearer generation mode in order to preserve the receive traffic The backup bearer may be generated from t
26. refer to application note AN 027A 1 1 quick start guide for further details 17 When using Paired Carrier with IP as the terrestrial interface type Paradise recommends setting the master hub transmit timing to nternal the hub and remote receive clocking to Satellite and the remote transmit clocking to Ex reference This ensures only one master clock is providing timing for both modems and can prevent data pattern clashes between the two overlapping carriers caused by similarities in the satellite framing that otherwise can degrade Paired Carrier performance Edit Rx Carrier Advanced PCMA Round Trip Delay Screen Round trip delay Set location New Set delay 7 78 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Options Factory default Description Set location Select this mode if you want the modem to automatically calculate the satellite round trip delay using coordinates that you enter for the modem and satellite positions Set delay Select this mode to enter fixed minimum and maximum satellite round trip delay times Use GPS This mode allows mobile Paired Carrier operation for example on ships allowing travel anywhere in the world without having to change location or satellite delay information for Paired Carrier Paired Carrier operation is seamless regardless of changes in position It assumes that there is a GPS source attached to the modem via RS232 When this mode is selecte
27. 0 0 1dB Delta power 2 1dB This screen is constantly updated with the following information Distant Eb No this is the instantaneous Eb No measured by the remote modem while AUPC is enabled Target this is the target Eb No level set for the remote modem Delta power this is the instantaneous offset that has been applied to the modem Tx power output level to maintain the remote Eb No at a constant level Selecting the Down arrow displays the following screen Limits 1 0dB 1 0dB Slew Unlimited Comms loss action Nominal This screen shows the following information Limits this shows the AUPC positive and negative power offset limits see the Edit Tx Carrier Advanced AUPC section for more details of how these are used Slew this shows the instantaneous slew rate is the target Eb No level set for the remote modem Comms loss action this shows the action to be taken in the event that communications with the remote modem fail see the Edit Tx Carrier Advanced AUPC section for more details of the loss action options 7 12 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Status Misc ABIS Screen When a Sat ABIS interface card is fitted this screen is constantly updated with the achieved ABIS compression ratio the instantaneous bandwidth being used and the dropped TRAU count Status Misc Large Font Screen Eb No 15dB ID London New York This screen shows the receive path Eb No
28. 0 mmmenmet A o oh be open circuit LT mer Ee mem input output ean modem Ground Lt keen E input Ready A BENE HUN iol NNNM input BENE dad a output Ready B output B y n ETCB CTSB gere a input output Ground 9 clock output modem Loopback a G I F low rate RTS B enable ET meer me 000000 input Pe fee ORT ee input loopback LEBEN UE NN output aa eed a output 18 Grund E e fT D I F high rate enable The Eurocom signals marked in falics are not supported on the P3713 combined EIA530 Eurocom D 1 connector Em aha EA IT Relays switch between EIA530 and Eurocom D1 or G 03 signals Undefined pins in Eurocom D1 and G703 modes remain connected to the EIA530 interface 10 16 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook P3713 Adapter Cable Where compatibility with existing P300 wiring is required an adapter cable can be supplied 1 Simple IDC D type plug to plug with connector reversed pin 1 to 13 2 Custom cable with additional ground pins at Eurocom side with select pins not connected Quad E1 Interface The P3706 Quad E1 interface card provides 4 RJ45 connectors supporting balanced E1 G 703 The Quad E1 interface panel supports four full E1s four partial E1s or a mix of both Unbalanced G 703 can be provided by an external adaptor If the Quad E1 interface is selected under Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial then the following interface d
29. 15 Glossary 8PSK 16QAM ADPCM AGC AUPC BER BERT BPSK BSC BTS CAS CRC ESC FEC LCD IBS IESS IDR M amp C MIB MSC Mux OQPSK PCB PUP PLL PRBS PSTN QPSK RBS RS Rx SAF SMS SNMP TCM TPC TRAU Tx Eight Phase Shift Keying Sixteen Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation Automatic Gain Control Automatic Up link Power Control Bit Error Rate Bit Error Rate Tester Binary Phase Shift Keying Bast Station Controller Base Transceiver Station Block Up Converter Channel Associated Signalling Cyclic Redundancy Check Continuous Wave Engineering Services Channel Forward Error Correction Liquid Crystal Display Intelsat Business Service Intelsat Earth Station Standard Intermediate Data Rate Monitor and Control SNMP Management Information Base Mobile Switching Centre Multiplexer Offset Quaternary Phase Shift Keying Printed Circuit Board Paradise Universal Protocol Phase Locked Loop Pseudo Random Bit Sequence Packet Switched Telephone Network Quaternary Phase Shift Keying Robbed Bit Signalling Radio Frequency Reed Solomon Receive or Receiver Software Activated Feature oatellite Multiservice System Eutelsat Simple Network Management System Trellis Coded Modulation Turbo Product Coding Transcoding and Rate Adaption Unit Transmit or Transmitter 15 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 16 Customer
30. 16 Customer Technical Support eese eee 16 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 1 Welcome Quantum and Evolution Series satellite modems incorporates a novel architecture that uses upgradeable programmable logic for all major modem functions creating a flexible modem platform easily adapted to future demands They provide a rich feature set and flexibility of configuration allowing you to purchase only what you need initially and then enable further features in the field at a later date They set new levels of usability by providing an unrivalled set of diagnostic tools including built in spectrum and constellation monitors The latest diagnostic tool is LinkGuard which monitors underneath the received carrier for interference while on traffic The Quantum Series of modems incorporate 100 of the functionality and features of the Evolution Series of Paradise modems and are fully backwards compatible The Quantum extends the functionality of the Evolution by adding an optional DVB S2 capability DVB S2 is a highly efficient and robust coding and modulation standard for satellite transmission that can significantly reduce satellite bandwidth requirements compared with legacy standards DVB S2 can be used in one of two ways Firstly DVB S2 can be used as a service in its own right e g the modem could be used to provide a D
31. 21 3 Guidelines for Clocking Configuration The following need to be ascertained e Incoming Rx carrier o Is your Tx clock looped back to you at the distant end o If not what is the accuracy of the clock transmitted by the distant end e Outgoing Tx carrier o Are you looping the incoming Rx clock Tx Clock Rx or clock looped by the equipment or cables your end o If not what is the accuracy of your Tx clock The various Tx and Rx clocking modes of the modem are described in the following sections 1 21 3 1 Clock Loop At One End The end with the clock loop requires Buffer disable Rx Clock Satellite If there is either a cabled clock loop or the equipment loops the Rx clock back to the modem Tx input then set Tx clock Tx Clk In If there is no physical clock loop set the Tx clock Rx The end without the loop requires the buffer active and set for 2 x Doppler shift only as there is no Plesiochronous effect with a clock loop The Buffer size required depends on the satellite orbit or rather the accuracy with which it s position is maintained currently 2ms end to end buffering is enough for the Doppler shift from 1 satellite hop on current Intelsat satellites For 2 x Doppler shift 4ms is required 8 6 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Set the Tx and Clock modes as follows to use the clock listed Clock from the interface terrestrial network Tx Clock 7x clk in Rx Clock Tx clk in
32. A visual indication of any unwanted interference is provided through a signal under carrier spectrum web graph showing the wanted carrier along with any unwanted interference The graph includes a persistence mode to show even intermittent interference The example screenshots below shows a 32APSK carrier in blue initially with no interference shown in red and then with interference caused by another modulated carrier Note that the interference is sufficient to reduce the Es No of the carrier by around 4dB but is not obvious by looking only at the received carrier spectrum The modem Q constellation graph is also shown Q channel Amplitude dBm oett Al 1 000 000 500 000 0 500 000 1 000 000 1224 0000MHz channel Q channel Amplitude dBm 1 000 000 500 000 0 500 000 1 000 000 1224 0000MHz channel Example LinkGuard Web Screenshots without with Interference LinkGuard provides a menu option for setting a power spectral density threshold above which the modem will automatically alarm to indicate that a significant source of interference has been detected The LinkGuard Rx traffic warning alarm is displayed locally on the modem and can be accessed remotely via the modem s web server SNMP traps and physical contact relays Automated 24x7 interference detection is therefore provided without the need for an operator to be present LinkGuard detects various forms of interference
33. C N N It is possible to describe the Carrier Noise ratio within the Rx system at an arbitrary reference point eg at the input to the demodulator at the input to the Forward Error Correction decoder FEC at the input outer Reed Solomon FEC decoder or even at the terrestrial data interface Many of the terms in common usage represent this Rx Carrier Noise ratio at these different reference points It is common to measure Carrier Noise Noise at the demodulator input on a spectrum analyser A measurement is made that contains atmospheric noise and is then converted back to Carrier Noise In the equation below the term C N N is the Carrier Noise Noise ratio read from the spectrum analyser EE EN I0log 10 295 1 Es Noise N No We can express this same Carrier Noise ratio at the input of the demod in terms of the Energy per Symbol Noise power density which is written as E No Because Carrier Noise is a ratio of two powers measured in the same bandwidth the resolution bandwidth of the analyser this is the same as E No Within the demodulator each Symbol is converted back into the Transmitted Bits For BPSK each Symbol represents only 1 Transmitted Bit for QPSK or OQPSK each Symbol represents 2 Transmitted Bits and for 8PSK each Symbol represents 3 Transmitted Bits The expression E No or Ep No represents the Carrier to Noise ratio referenced to this Transmitted Bit rate For QPSK and 8PSK th
34. Carrier in the first modem Main 2 Edit 3 Rx 7 Carrier 4 Advanced 2 PCMA 1 Enable and set to ON Its demodulator should lock Rx traffic LED should go green Enable Paired Carrier in the second modem Main 2 Edit 3 Rx 7 Carrier 4 Advanced 2 PCMA 1 Enable and set to ON Its demodulator should also lock Rx traffic LED should go green Enable the BER test and check for data transparency in both directions Inject errors via the BER testers in both directions and ensure they are received correctly If the modems do not lock or are not data transparent then e Ensure there is no spectral inversion in the RF chain If there is then this must be corrected by re inverting it for Paired Carrier operation to work e Check the modem satellite location information or round trip time that has been set in each modem The range entered for the round trip time must cover the actual distance to the satellite Try widening out the round trip delay to ensure that it definitely covers the actual time delay to satellite Try switching from location to round trip delay Or Vice versa e Switch Paired Carrier off and on again in each modem to counter the possibility of a false lock e If this does not work then switch the carrier off and on again in each modem e Check the receive signal level and Eb No are correct e Check the spectrum and constellation for signs of signal degradation such as noise or interference e Otherwise check the
35. Communications with the BUC have failed Unable to communicate with the BUC check BUC type amp U TF services are correctly configured Check connections Unit fault BUC PLL failure The PLL in the BUC is reporting out of lock Check U TF reference clock Unit fault PJG oa The BUC is indicating an over temperature fault U TF temperature failure Joi tauke Modulate DRLE Consult technical support if this alarm cannot be cleared U has lost lock aoe Poy an hes Consult technical support if this alarm cannot be cleared m a ae TF CM Pind Rx aytas Consult technical support if this alarm cannot be cleared TA TC OUR Unit fault occurs initially This refers to the internal unit temperature Check the as unit warning Operating modem vent slots are clear and the rear fan has not UD TA TC TF RF temperature Seeded failed This alarm is a warning beyond 60 deg C and i i CM i becomes a fault at 70 deg C 12 9 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 43 Unit Warnings Fault Text Unit warning One or more of the cooling fans have failed Unit PRI RN One or more PRI RN rails are out of range Unit warning Carrier muted due to power outage Acknowledge power up to enable Unit warning AUPC at maximum power offset Unit warning Quad E1 ports have active alarms to 4 Unit warning Rental SAF features s will expire in less than 48 hours Unit fails to boot due to an invalid co
36. ESC port on IDR card not shared ESC Aux port of base unit RS232 or RS422 user selectable Provides clock and data lines EE 7 c of one or both audio ESC channels IBS Intelsat low rate ESC mode as previously but now via Aux port on IDR card not shared ESC Aux port of base unit IDR option also adds sync IBS Aux Port mode configurable to use between 1 32 and 21 32 of the IBS overhead providing a full sync Aux port at between 0 2 and 4 3 of the main data rate Aux port provides satellite timing information for P1500 slave Frequency Standard when not configured for Aux data access 1 55 BERT Option Specifications The BERT may operate through main traffic ESC data or Aux data channels Use of ESC amp Aux data BER Channel channels allows continuous real traffic BER performance monitoring while the modem carries traffic 211 1 27 4 2 1 and others compatible with Test Patterns common standalone BER testers Display of error count and average BER Autolo Automatic logging of average BER and other i parameters at regular intervals 13 9 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 56 AUPC Specifications Parameter Monitor of distant Eb No and BER only full distant Modes of Operation Eb No maintenance Unidirectional or Bi directional operation Utilises asynchronous ESC channel on IBS SMS IDR and Closed Network plus ESC carriers ESC Communication Link from 300 baud i e
37. Enables DVB S2 Rx operation includes SmartLink e IP DVBIP Enables MPE ULE and Paradise proprietary PXE DVB S2 over IP encapsulation requires P3714 IP Traffic card Software Activated Features continued 6 9 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Featre SAF Code IP traffic shaping SHP Provides guaranteed throughput levels for specific IP streams using standard Committed Information Rate and Burst Information Rate settings Stream differentiation is by IP address IEEE 802 1p priority class Diffserv DSCP class or MPLS EXP field Paired Carrier data PCMA Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate 56kbps to range inclusive Incorporates ViaSat s patented 512kbps PCMA technology Subject to a minimum of 30kHz of signal cancellation in terms of occupied bandwidth Paired Carrier data PCMB Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate 512kbps to range inclusive 1 024Mbps Paired Carrier data PCMC Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate 1 024Mbps to range inclusive 2 5Mbps Paired Carrier data PCMD Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate 2 5Mbps to 5Mbps range inclusive Paired Carrier data PCME Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate SMbps to 10Mbps range inclusive Paired Carrier data PCMF Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate 10Mbps to range inclusive 15Mbps Paired Carrier data PCMG En
38. Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook maintained In effect if two timeslots were dropped from T1 D4 and T1 ESF bearers with RBS support enabled although the aggregate data rate would be only 128kbps plus 6 7 overhead the frame and multiframe structure would be as to support N 24 and N 48 respectively N x 12 for D4 and N x 24 for ESF as DA ESF have 12 24 frames per multiframe relative to which RBS is placed As with the support for Odd values of N the CAS Multiframe is again used to provide support for these extended timeslot sets and hence support the Robbed Bit Signalling CAS Multiframe Intelsat have defined a satellite CAS Multiframe to allow Channel Associated Signalling to be transferred across the satellite link between E1 PCM bearers within the IBS satellite overhead The modem equipped with the Extended D I feature uses the CAS Multiframe definition to support CAS and also to provide Timeslot ID Maintenance for Odd values of N N 7 9 11 13 etc which in turn allows the Modem to also support Robbed Bit Signalling RBS The CAS multiframe is entirely independent of the TS32 Multiframe that has already been described The CAS Multiframe consists of data and frame alignment words in TS16 and TS48 of the IBS frame A CAS multiframe starts off as a unique word of 00001y11 in TS16 and comprises a further 15 signalling data timeslots in TS48 amp TS16 stretching over 8 frames When carrying CAS the 15 sig
39. MPLS EXP Stream classification may be based on MPLS QoS specifically the 3 bit EXP field in the MPLS header This is often used to support Diffserv in MPLS networks The MPLS EXP field has eight possible values mapping directly to equivalent internal modem classes 0 to 7 each of which can be shaped using its own CIR BIR etc 8 48 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Each packet passed to the modem must have this field set to the appropriate value in order for the modem to recognize the different data streams 1 32 9 5 Traffic Shaping Graphs A web graphing facility exists that shows a line graph of throughput in terms of bps over time for each QoS class The data for each class is not superimposed instead it is necessary to select the particular class to be monitored graphically from a dropdown box It is easy to switch between graphs for the different classes in order to check that the level of throughput is in line with expectations Graphs are time based and are shown in minute hour day and month formats It is intended to add diagnostic graphs per class in the future for errored packets and dropped packets 1 32 10 HTTP Web Acceleration WE gt xf 33 t t X ABE I 25 3 T 43 Do ay MODEM 1 MODEM INTERNET HTTP web acceleration speeds up the display of web pages Web pages are made up of multiple objects Each in line image is a separate object a
40. Modem internal clock Rx Clock nternal and feeds the clock to the terrestrial equipment If the Rx output clock is externally looped by equipment or internally then set Tx Clock Tx Clk In If the Rx output clock is not returned to the modem Tx input by the equipment or the cable then set Tx Clock Rx Clk Station clock Rx Clock Station Tx Clock as for Modem Internal Clock above Satellite This is not possible with clock loop at the distant end Rx satellite clock is already a copy of our Tx clock we cannot loop it again 1 21 3 2 No Clock Loop If there is no clock loop then both ends need the buffer active to cope with the normal Doppler effect plus the plesiochronous effect i e the difference between the clocks at each end Apply the following rules to both ends 1 21 3 3 Clock from the interface terrestrial network If the modem has a station clock which also drives the network which the Rx output feeds then select Rx Clock Station If there is no station clock then set Rx Clock Tx Clk In which as the Tx clock comes from the network is presumably derived from the same master clock which clocks the network Set the Tx Clock Tx Clk In 1 21 3 4 Other clock modes These require careful consideration based on the exact situation If you have questions relating to this subject and are willing to at least draw a diagram of the system you are implementing then you are welcome to contact us by fax for advice
41. New Asynchronous High rate ESC Mode Screen High rate ESC usage Maximum overhead P230 compatible New Maximum overhead High rate ESC Usage Screen Max ESC rate 9600 Maximum ESC Baud Rate Screen ESC interface baud rate 9600 baud New 9600 baud ESC Baud Rate Screen ESC interface parity polarity None New None ESC Parity Screen 14 17 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook ESC interface character length 8 bits 1 7 bits 2 8 bits ESC Character Length Screen IBS SMS Aux mode Off New Off Aux Mode Screen ESC Interface RS485 RS485 New RS485 ESC Interface Screen Aux interface RS485 1 RS232 2 RS422 3 RS485 4 IP Aux Interface Screen ESC level ch1 0 to 38dB 0 Step 2dB New O ESC Audio Levels Screen Enable backward alarm On 1 Off 2 On Backward Alarm Mode Screen 14 18 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook These screens are explained in the following sections High rate ESC Mode Options Off Asynchronous Requires the ESC SAF feature standard on base modem Factory default Off Description Controls whether the IBS high rate asynchronous ESC channel is enabled High rate ESC Usage Options P230 compatible Maximum overhead Factory default Maximum overhead Description Allows backward compatibility with Paradise P230 unit Requires Custom
42. RS422 EIA530 V35 EIA530 RS232 Yes Quad E1 MultiMux Configurations and Clocking Options After selecting the terrestrial interface a number of different screens from amongst the following will be displayed depending on the terrestrial interface type 1 87 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial IP Screens These allow the IP mode bridging routing Ethernet mode acceleration compression etc to be set along with the option to bridge the two Ethernet ports on the base modem together See the detailed description of these options under Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial IP Mode Screens Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial G 703 Data Rate Screen G 703 data rate T1 1 T1 2 E1 3 T2 4 E2 T3 E3 Options T1 Requires terrestrial data rate to be 1 544Mbps E1 Requires terrestrial data rate to be 2 048Mbps T2 Requires terrestrial data rate to be 6 312Mbps E2 Requires terrestrial data rate to be 8 448Mbps T3 Requires terrestrial data rate to be 44 736Mbps E3 Requires terrestrial data rate to be 34 368Mbps Factory default 71 Description Sets the data rate being used in relation to the G 703 interface 7 88 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial G 703 Line Format Screen G 703 line format Unbalanced 1 Unbalanced 2 Balanced Options Unbalanced Balanced
43. Rx OK Off Rx off or Rx fault Green Tx OK Off Tx off or Tx fault TX CARRIER C OE on Green Carrier on Amber 1 1 standby Off Carrier off Status LEDs Off Red Amber Gren Unit fault Unit OK Uot Status Traffic Rx fault or Rx Not used Not used Rx OK disabled Tx Traffic Tx fault or Tx Not used Not used Tx OK disabled Test Mode 1 for 1 standby Front Panel LED Status 1 15 2 LCD Display The backlit LCD is a graphical display formatted to give three lines of 40 text characters and is highly legible even in strong ambient light The right hand side of the display is reserved for icons that indicate status information pertinent to keypad operation These icons are listed below The contrast is adjustable and the backlight can be switched off or on 6 13 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Local front panel control LOC Remote control Keyboard locked Help screen Numeric entry mode Alphabetic entry mode Abc Modem is on a Tx Edit screen TX Modem is on an Rx Edit screen Rx Front Panel LCD Icons 1 15 2 1 Keypad The keypad see the diagram below is based on a sealed tactile membrane and allows full alphanumeric entry and navigation using arrow keys Front Panel Keypad 6 14 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 16 Rear Panel The rear panel shown below provides a full set of terrestrial and satellite
44. Rx fault RS de interleaver unable to sync to decoded data Check RS settings 12 6 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 41 Receive Warnings Fault Text Rx warning Doppler buffer max limited Rx data rate above 42Mbps Rx warning The minimum period between buffer slips is less than the user threshold set for the deferred alarm Rx bo CN Rx exceeds 4 bo CN limit in TPC 5 16 Buffer slips are occurring too frequently this could indicate that the clock accuracy is less than expected Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded error data rate Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded FEC scheme exceeded uum P Buffer size should not exceed 80ms when data rate exceeds 42Mbps Rx warning Rx exceeds 6 5Mbps limit in TPC 21 44 Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded or 2 3 Rx warning Rx exceeds 7 7Mbps limit in TPC 1 2 Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded Pf fp Rx warning Rx exceeds 12Mbps limit in TPC 7 8 Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded BENE Rx warning Rx exceeds 33Mbps limit in TCM 2 3 Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded wk a Rx warning Rx data rate Configuration error data rate for terrestrial interface Pf p bee outside interface range exceeded Rx warning The distant Eb No has fallen below the user threshold Rx warning The receive Eb No i
45. Series Installation and Operating Handbook aa Test Conditions BSE EEE sev a Rate 128 kbps QPSK DEAL areor N mS TX 140 0000 MHz EN dm Vv 35 Scrambling COCA SCE haere i k C ECSERHUERNCEHERRR LLLEEEELAOGLULNLLLLLEE HHHERHHHHA HC ERE EFA ot YE VENR VERRE CRRRRRRRRR tae te cane Tene titi NY LL rem c MEI DT H OA SSS SSS SS Bibi EHECHEHERHE EREEREER Tq Spec limit R1 2Codng Eb Mo in dB Modem Error Probability versus Eb No Viterbi Decoding 13 15 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1E 1 Test Conditions FEC Rate 2 3 Pragmatic T CM zN me ee i Rate 2048 kbps 8PSK TX 70 0000 MHz RA 70 0000 MHz V 35 Scrambling 1E 3 a pat Level 45 dBm 1E 4 1E 5 1E 6 1E RS Concatenated Reed Solomon Outer Coding 219 201 1E 8 11 E E a Eb No in dB Modem Error Probability versus Eb No 8PSK TCM with without Reed Solomon 13 16 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Ta Aun NS mesi NI PEN a AU HEHHEHE Modem Error Probability versus Eb No 2 Generation Turbo Codec Note rate 7 8 is de facto 13 17 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Turbo Bit Error Rate
46. Series Installation and Operating Handbook exclusive control of the Modem In Takeaway mode the modem accepts commands from any interface at any time relying on clear operational procedures to prevent conflicting requests Edit Unit M amp C Password Screen Remote admin password Factory default paradise Description Modem password for remote admin user login login name is admin The admin user can both view and control the modem Only one admin user can be logged in at a time Edit Unit M amp C View Only Password Screen Remote view only user password Factory default paradise Description Modem password for remote view only user login login name is user Multiple view only users can be logged in at the same time 7 117 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit M amp C Timeout Screen Auto logout period 1 to 720mins 060 Step 1mins New 060 Units mins Minimum value 1 Maximum value 720 Step size 1 Factory default 5 Description Specifies the period of time without any user input activity after which a user is logged out This is true even for the local user interface this has an implicit login when the operator first presses a key In Giveaway mode logging out causes ownership of the modem to be lost Edit Unit M amp C Interface Screen Remote M amp C Interface RS232 New RS232 Options RS232 RS485 IP Local Only available wh
47. Specification for Quantum and Evolution Series Satellite Modems These must be sent to a specific TCP port that the modem listens on for PUP commands Typically this will result in much faster communications than when using Telnet This method is referred to as direct encapsulation elsewhere in this document to differentiate it from the Telnet type of communications Thirdly SNMP V1 or V2c can be used to communicate between an SNMP network manager and the SNMP agent on the modem The remote control protocol for the modem is specified in the document Remote M amp C Specification for Quantum and Evolution Series Satellite Modems M amp C message example The following example shows how to 1 get the transmit power from a modem The response has a value of 25 Note that numeric text denotes the message contents as hexadecimal characters get T I F Tx FPw er 02 15 01 09 67 65 74 20 54 49 46 54 78 49 46 50 77 72 2A OB 03 2 5 02 0A 01 09 2D 32 35 2A C8 03 9 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 2 Login to the modem to be able to make changes The response has a value of log i n paradis e 02 15 01 09 6C 6F 67 69 GE 20 70 61 72 61 64 69 73 65 2A B6 03 02 08 01 09 20 2A 54 03 3 Setthe transmit power to a new value 20 The response has a value of se t T FT x FPw r 20 02 19 01 09 73 65 74 20 54 49 46 54 78 49 46 50 77 72 20 2D 32 30 2A C6 03 02 0
48. Step size 0 1 Factory default 30 0 Description Tx L band output power level Edit Tx Carrier Frequency Screen IF Modem IF carrier freq 50 to 90 100 to 180MHz 070 0000 Step 100Hz New 070 0000 Units MHz Minimum value 50 0000 Maximum value 180 0000 Step size 0 0001 Factory default 70 0000 Description Tx IF frequency used to transmit to satellite Note that values between 90 and 100MHz cannot be selected 7 44 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Carrier Frequency Screen L band Modem IF carrier freq 950 to 2050MHz 950 0000 Step 100Hz New 950 0000 Units MHz Minimum value 950 0000 Maximum value 2050 0000 Step size 0 0001 Factory default 950 0000 Description Tx L band frequency used to transmit to satellite Edit Tx Carrier Inversion Screen Rx spectral inversion On 1 Off 2 On Factory default Off Description Controls whether the and Q channel outputs are swapped Edit Tx Carrier Roll off Screen Filter roll off 35 New 20 Options 35 This selects a filter roll off factor of 35 7 45 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 2596 This selects a filter roll off factor of 25 20 This selects a filter roll off factor of 20 Factory default 35 Description Controls the slope of the carrier at its edges and therefore has an effect on both occupied bandw
49. T1 Factory default OFF Description This provides a high stability clock over satellite derived from a G 703 card that can be used for clocking any interface in place of GPS 1 19 3 2 4 Edit Rx Clocks Buffer Screen Buffer size 0 to 99ms 8 Step 1ms New 8 Units ms Minimum value 0 Maximum value 99 Step size 1 Factory default 8 Description Buffer capacity for received data This is used when the Rx clock is not set to Satellite Should the capacity be exceeded unflow or overflow and the buffer slips then it will slip by exactly half its chosen capacity back to 50 full See The buffer fill state can be viewed on the Status Demodulator screen Section 8 1 for details of how the buffer operates 7 64 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Rx Clocks Advanced Menu Advanced 1 Auto centre 2 Manual centre This menu contains the following options e Auto centre This controls whether the Rx Doppler buffer is centred following an Rx e Manual centre This allows the Rx buffer to be recentred manually Edit Rx Clocks Advanced Auto Centre Screen Centre buffer after failure recovery On 1 Off 2 On Factory default On Description Controls whether the Rx buffer is centred following an Rx path recovery from failure This should be disabled where minor outages occur where the errors or synchronisation losses caused by centring the buffer are potentially larger th
50. Tx path of this modem The fault may be due to any receive downstream equipment but could be due to the relevant modem Tx output failing Check the relevant modem Tx path indicates OK Check the Tx IF output from the modem is connected to the upconverter equipment and onwards and monitor the Tx carrier or distant Rx if possible with a spectrum analyser This will only be displayed if the modem if fitted with an interface that provides four ports for separate input and output of separate Tx Drop and Rx Insert PCM bearers It indicates a backward alarm has been detected at the Rx bearer input This indicates that equipment downstream of the receive path has failed and is returning an alarm This may be due to any receive downstream equipment but could be due to the modem Rx output failing Check the modem Rx path indicates OK and that the Rx data output from the modem is connected to the downstream equipment This indicates that the received signal has degraded resulting in a potentially unacceptable number of errors Te LLL me LLL d warning y ec Indicates that the wanted ae is very low or very high input power out of range Rx Composite Rx power out of range Rx warning Composite to wanted power level ratio gt 37dBc Rx warning LinkGuard interfererence over threshold Rx warning Rx failed LDPC BCH decoding Indicates very Indicates very high level of composite power level of composite power Indicates ver
51. X ratings on the cable and the connector ends marked with BS1636A UK free plug 13 amp BSI VDE NF USE UL CSA OVE CEBEC NEMKO DEMKO SETI IMQ SEV and KEMA KEUR for the IEC 6 amp free socket Schuko and North American free plugs must have similar markings The installation of the equipment and the connection to the mains supply must be made in compliance with local and national wiring regulations for a Category II impulse over voltage installation The positioning of the equipment must be such that the mains supply socket outlet for the equipment should be near the equipment and easily accessible or there should be another suitable means of disconnection from the mains supply The equipment is designed to operate from a TN type power supply system as specified in EN 60950 1 i e a system that has separate earth line and neutral conductors The equipment is not designed to operate with an IT power system that has no direct connection to earth This unit has double pole neutral fusing To ensure operator safety fuses should always be replaced with identical type and rating contact Customer Technical Support for details 3 2 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Compatibility This satellite modem conforms to the provisions of EMC Directive 2004 108 EC and complies with the following standards 1 Emissions EN 55022 2006 Class B Information Technology Equ
52. alarm Overhead rate without backward alarm if different Main data channel rates ESCrates rates 9 9 6kbps 16kbps 64kbps 256kbps 512kbps 512kbps 1024kbps 2048kbps E 33 396 20 5 4 8 1 25 0 62 0 39 0 39 Baud 1 19 0 59 4800 100 50 10 2 5 1 25 0 62 0 39 Baud 2 38 1 19 0 59 9600 100 20 5 2 5 1 25 0 62 Baud 4176 2 38 1 19 0 59 19200 50 10 5 2 5 1 25 Baud 4 76 2 38 1 19 38400 100 20 10 5 2 5 Baud 4 76 2 38 The formula for deriving the overhead rate is moderately complex and relies on many different parameters For other mixes of data rate and async settings the simplest way to determine the overhead is to enter the parameters into a modem and then select View Config Tx Rx This screen shows the exact overhead percentage Information on the framed data rate the data rate including any Reed Solomon encoding and the final symbol rate including the effects of the inner FEC and modulation can be found under View Monitor Tx Rx 8 28 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 31 Tutorial on Carrier Noise and Eb No Measurements This brief tutorial explains what the terms mean and how to measure and interpret the figures you see The diagram on the following page summarises the situation A table is included that converts between values measured on a spectrum analyser and actual Eb No values Derivation of Eb No from
53. alarm setting IBS SMS Aux Mode Options Off Intelsat over sampled Synchronous Factory default Off Description Controls the operating mode of the IBS Aux channel controlling the allocation of overhead between the Aux and ESC interfaces AUX Interface Aux interface RS485 1 RS232 2 RS422 3 RS485 4 IP Options RS232 RS422 RS485 IP Factory default HS232 Description Specifies the Aux electrical interface Note RS485 is not available on the IDR card The relevant physical interface on the shared Async ESC Auc port on the base modem or the separate Aux port on the IDR card is directly connected through to the ESC channel This interface on the modem provides the IBS SMS low rate Intelsat oversampled ESC facility The ESC and Aux functions are mutually 14 16 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook exclusive unless an IDR card is fitted If an IDR card is fitted then the Aux port can provide 32 or 64kbps access to the IDR overhead in place of one or both of the IDR 32kbps ADPCM audio ESC channels or it can provide either the IBS SMS low rate Intelsat oversampled ESC facility or a higher rate synchronous channel within the IBS SMS overhead Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Overhead IBS SMS Screens The following sequence of screens depending on what SAF options are enabled will appear consecutively when the BS SMS overhead option is selected High rate ESC mode Asynchronous
54. as detailed in Section 6 5 This provides a basic level of IP operation typically it can handle up to 5Mbps of UDP data or 10Mbps of TCP data For more demanding applications the IP Traffic option card part number P3714 supports TCP acceleration up to the maximum data rate for the modem compared to the base modem acceleration of up to 10Mbps via two RJ45 Ethernet 10 100 1000 GigE BaseT connectors The card supports up to 5000 concurrent TCP connections and typically achieves bandwidth utilization of around 90 It also supports HTTP acceleration which downloads typical web pages up to 30 faster on average The P3714 IP Traffic card can handle up to 50 000 packets per second compared to the IP processing built into the base modem which has a limit of 10 000 packets per second Please note that the P3714 IP Traffic card is in the process of being replaced by the P3716 IP Traffic card which has two to three times the processing capability 6 3 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook The IP Traffic card automatically selects speed and duplex but these can also be controlled via the menus Bridging static routing and dynamic routing are all supported on both the base modem or the IP traffic card depending on what is fitted On the IP Traffic card UDP and IP header compression compliant to RFC3095 ROHC Robust Header Compression is supported at throughput rates up to 29000 packets per second ROHC is
55. can be used for user data as well and no special set up is required the modem will automatically ensure Es No information is returned to the transmitting modem with no material impact on bandwidth In terms of configuration the link is set up as normal using a nominal data rate modulation and FEC rate that gives the required symbol rate The only other step is switching ACM on The modcod selected by the user on the forward path represents the maximum modcod to be used when ACM is active This allows higher order modcods that cause non linear distortion in the RF chain to be avoided ACM will use all modcods up to and including the modcod set by the user It is easier to set up an ACM link as normal rather than being forced to adapt to an alternative such as setting a fixed symbol rate Uniquely for any ACM implementation other than switching ACM on no other ACM specific controls are necessary Paradise ACM works at true QEF points All DVB S2 modcods from QPSK to 16APSK 9 10 are available and both short block and normal block sizes are supported Each modcod operates over a defined range in relation to carrier to noise level providing true quasi error free operation Rapid fading is countered by using predictive tracking to estimate what the remote Es No will do before it happens which prevents link loss even in sudden deep fades Should the link be lost then the minimum modcod is automatically selected in order to re establish the link
56. can be used to check for correct modem operation The spectrum can be viewed in one of three modes In narrow view the width of the spectrum is limited to less than twice the symbol rate This mode does not interfere with modem operation in any way In wide view the spectrum width is nearer to four times the symbol rate and this can be used for checking for adjacent interfering carriers In wide mode the demodulator is reprogrammed with different values to normal operation and consequently the wide mode of operation is only available as a special test mode since it would otherwise interfere with any traffic In super wide view which can be used without interfering with traffic the spectrum width is set to 50MHz to allow all or a significant portion of the satellite transponder bandwidth to be monitored The user can adjust the reference level for the graph i e the amplitude offset that appears at the top of the graph and the amplitude resolution A High Definition setting is available by checking the tick box within the Spectrum graph This provides four times the resolution giving more detail within the spectral content A persistence mode is also available In this mode successive spectrums are never deleted but left to build up a picture over time of all the received frequency information This is useful for identifying transient signals such as intermittent interference which may be present 7 155 Quantum and Evolution Serie
57. data interfaces Modem Rear Panel Full connector pinouts are given in Chapter 11 From left to right the rear panel consists of IEC Mains Power Connector Voltage Selector Fuse The modem is designed to operate from a mains AC supply of 100 240V 10 6 i e 90V to 254V at the connector 1 0 4A 47 to 63Hz The IEC connector incorporates two fuses independently fusing both live and neutral lines Access to the fuses is provided by a slide out tray Both fuses are standard 20mm type rated T3 15A of the slow blow time delay type ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSE WITH ONE OF THE SAME TYPE AND RATING Chassis Ground Stud This is an M4 stud for connecting a safety earth conductor directly to the chassis of the unit Tx IF Output Option This connector is a BNC female and can be used in either 500 or 75Q impedance mode The output power level can be varied from OdBm to 25dBm G 703 BNCs Two optional BNC connectors may be fitted These provide an unbalanced G 703 interface Tx L band Output Option This connector is an N type female and is of 50 O impedance The output power level can be varied from 5dBm to 30dBm 6 15 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Alarms and AGC Connector This is a 15 pin male D type connector that provides access to the four form C relay contacts that indicate alarm conditions There is also an AGC output The alarm relays have the following default definitions
58. data rate for terrestrial interface exceeded Modem is set to use the G703 terrestrial interface but no G703 signal has been detected check configuration of G703 interface The carrier frequency selected for the Tx carrier has exceeded the permissible range for the configured symbol rate Line code violations have been detected on the G703 interface check configuration of G703 interface The modems current configuration exceeds the permissible symbol rate check the configuration The phase of the input clock and data is checked to ensure the data is stable when it is actually latched into the modem This message means that the data is changing at this critical time and it will cause data errors Check the A amp B clock lines are not reversed When Sat ABIS card is being used this indicates that the number of TRAU frames being dropped is above the set threshold This indicates that the assumed ABIS compression ratio is not being achieved and consequently some ABIS traffic is being dropped due to insuffienct satellite bandwidth being available data rate for FEC scheme data rate for FEC scheme 12 4 Relays To Ter To Sat d d lt lt lt Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 40 Receive Faults FautTet Notes Relays To Ter To Sat Other The demodulator can lock to the carrier and the inner Rx fault RS de interleaver FEC decoder to the dem
59. device on the local terrestrial network Each remote sees the data intended for the other remotes and these unwanted packets must either be filtered out by enabling VLAN tagging or be filtered by a router A similar problem exists in routing mode in which case black hole gateways can be specified at the remotes to forward unwanted packets to a non existent address causing them to be dropped by the remote modem 8 41 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 32 7 3 Ethernet Point to Multipoint Brouting ED Ri E ZN W 5 mmy I E ya ors FP ix aA A Be rw i LAN Sa giat RETURNS S RETURN e This is used where there is a shared outbound carrier from the hub to remotes and the return path is not over satellite i e there is an indirect terrestrial return e It relies on the presence of another route for IP traffic to pass from remotes back to the hub e tis typically used as an overlay IP delivery system to boost bandwidth out from the hub to remote subnets e In this specific mode a Bridge filtering option is available at the remotes to discard all data not destined for the subnet that the remote modem is on this is not required if VLAN tagging or router filtering is being used 1 32 8 TCP Acceleration TCP traffic as opposed to UDP requires acknowledgements to be returned to the sender as part of the protocol flow control process TCP was never in
60. direction of the satellite back 7 141 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook towards the terrestrial interface Remote loopback refers to returning remote signals traveling in the direction of the terrestrial interface back towards the satellite interface BEH test This feature provides the ability to inject a test pattern into the modem through the main traffic channel or via an overhead channel and to monitor the results using the modem s internal Pseudo Random Bit Sequence PRBS Bit Error Rate BER Tester HF This provides two types of signal a CW pure carrier signal and an alternate 1 0 signal that can be used to test modem operation IDH This provides a simple tone generator at 1 KHz Q OdBm level either towards the satellite or from satellite IP Allows a one way satellite delay in milliseconds to be entered This can be used in modem back to back testing to simulate the normal satellite delay It applies to IP traffic only It should always be set to 0 when using IP over satellite Note that the use of this feature is currently incompatible with the use of IP traffic shaping as the two features compete for the same internal resources Test Loopback Screen Loopback Off New Off 7 142 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Options Off Interface Interface local and remote Framer deframer local RS local FEC local IF local
61. displayed or edited include the frequency shift of the LNB or downconverter chain Note that the entry of the SHF frequency shift expects a high side Local Oscillator LO and therefore displays the SHF frequency LO IF Changing the sign allows the modem to display a low side LO High side LO is and Low side LO is Move the cursor over the sign and use the up down arrows to change Edit Rx Carrier Advanced LNB PSU Menu DC voltage Off New 15v The L band modem can supply either 15V or 24V at 500mA to the LNB up the coaxial site cable or line powered The options available are Off 15V 24V and Multiswitch Note that the Multiswitch option selects the Global Communications LNB Multiswitch allowing selection of a high band low band LO and horizontal vertical polarization Severe damage may occur if a DC supply or the wrong voltage DC N supply is fed to a LNB not configured to be Line powered 1 73 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Rx Carrier Advanced LNB 10MHz Reference Screen 10MHz reference Off 1 Off 2 On When switched on the modem s internal 10MHz reference signal is sourced from the modem up the coaxial site cable to the LNB Edit Rx Carrier Advanced LNB 1 1 Screen Mute Services in Standby Off 1 Off 2 On This controls whether LNB services i e DC supply and 10MHz reference stay with the on line modem or switch to the standby
62. e Input screen floating The action to be taken if the power is removed can be specified as e Normal the G 703 input is looped to the output by a relay if power is removed This is so any other traffic on the G 703 PCM bearer is not lost by a break in the bearer e 1 1 Operation the G 703 output goes high impedance if power is removed allowing the units 1 1 partner to carry the traffic The normal input impedance switches to whichever one is on line with the standby input at high impedance If installing the G 703 card the BNC labelled IN connects to J3 on the card and the BNC labelled OUT to J2 on the card IP Mode The IP is a standard interface supplied with the modem If P is selected under Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial then the following interface description applies The modem supports two RJ45 Ethernet ports for IP and remote control ports The Ethernet automatically supports 10 100 data rates and uses CAT 5 Ethernet cable either straight or crossover depending upon whether the modem is connected directly to a host or hub switch The Edit Uni M amp C menu allows modem IP configuration The P3714 IP Traffic card provides 2 RJ45 10 100 1000 BaseT Ethernet ports The IP Traffic port on the base modem is redundant when the IP Traffic card is fitted and should not be used The IP Traffic card does not replace the base modem M amp C Ethernet interface which should continue to be used for remotely configuring the modem ove
63. edens 7 163 T207 SSW STOMA ANS rei a T E E 7 164 1 20 8 On line Installation and Operation Handbook 7 164 R209 TOPE ROCKS SM rewire cet 7 165 1 20 10 SNMP COoHIIQUESHOE csc co octal la eGededaedoaiodadedace 7 166 1 20 11 Remote Software Upgrade ccccccccsscccssceceneeceuceceuseseusesseeeeeaeessees 7 167 1 20 12 EZ BERT 8 1 sd eae en re Ne ET Pe ter ee rte ee ee ed 7 170 1 20 13 Modem Emal UNCON Aarin eo io hehe eee eh eh eh rcs 1 172 1 20 14 FI eA ISOLE S coa etapa TIMER MM 7 175 1 20 15 Preadel COMPIeSSION se cssextcracsiecechccaateacn ca acecatenadedadeiateddecatecadscatetetates 1 176 1 20 16 Fetching Web Pages from a Remote Modem 1 178 1 20 17 Adaptive Signal Pre distorter ccccccccccsecceseeeeeeeesseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesees 7 178 Chapter 8 Modem Concepts ccccccccessseeescsssseeessceesseeeeseoesseeeeseoeesseeessooesneessseoes 8 1 1 21 Doppler Plesiochronous Buffering and Clocking eeeeeseeeesssees 8 1 t2 Trapnsmit CIOCKIAG eicat scat ste cncntesteaecacentcouarcesincntacstuanioenbreniaseasdenenboeneeceions 8 2 t22 IRECCIVG CIO CHING siete eet eee be eee ee ee 8 4 1 21 3 Guidelines for Clocking Configuration cccccccccseccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaaees 8 6 1 22 Framing and Drop Insert Overview cccccccccssecceeeeeseeeeee
64. for your exact application 1 21 3 5 Determining Buffer Size Use the following calculation to determine the buffer size required for any application 8 7 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Where e Lcis the local clock accuracy e g 1 x 10 e Rcis the remote clock accuracy e g 1 x 1011 e Ms is the Minimum slip period in days e g 40 days then the required Plesiochronous Buffer size middle to end in seconds is Buffer size Bs Ms x 24 x 60 x 60 x Lc Rc Simplifying allowing a factor of two end to end buffer not middle to end and allowing 2mS for the Doppler shift gives Bs 002 172800 x Ms x Lc Rc seconds Using the example figures above gives 0 00898 seconds requiring 9ms to absorb the plesiochronous effects To this must be added any Doppler requirement i e 2ms for each satellite hop 1 21 3 6 G 703 Clock Extension The modem can extend a G 703 T1 or E1 timing reference to the distant end of a satellite link regardless of actual data rate of that link This is achieved via a G 703 clock extension feature that propagates a high stability reference from the hub to the remote It is necessary for a high stability E1 T1 reference signal from a GPS receiver to bes fed to only the hub modem via the G 703 balanced or unbalanced connectors thereby saving the cost of multiple GPS receivers at the remote sites The remote modem can then generate a T1 E1 signal synch
65. forced over the whole PCM bearer and so this option should not be used with cascaded Drop amp Insert where AIS from the second modem in a cascade would cause the inserted data from the first in the cascade to be lost 7 134 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Spoof 2M AIS amp BA transparency Yes New No Options No Normal non spoof operation Yes Spoof 2M AIS and BA Factory default me Description Controls whether thin route spoofing is enabled or not Edit Unit Advanced Special Modes Rx Mute Screen Mute on sync loss Off 1 Off 2 On Options Off Do not mute the terrestrial output on loss of demodulator lock On Mute the terrestrial output on loss of demodulator lock Factory default Off Description This adds support for sun outages Typical the demodulator will go in and out of lock several times during a sun outage This option allows the terrestrial output to be muted below an associated user defined Eb No threshold see next screen to prevent multiple disturbances on the terrestrial input which can potentially be a point of contention in relation to service level agreements where a single sun outage event appears as multiple disruptions to the service The muting of the output is recorded as an alarm in the log 7 135 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Advanced Special Modes Rx Mute Threshold Scre
66. from Oms to 80ms at data rates from 42Mbps up to 55Mbps Automatically adjusted to slip an integer number of terrestrial multi frame lengths for framed rates Buffer storage Maximum buffer size 256kbytes Buffer Size 1 49 Framing and Deframing Specifications Parametr Modem Closed Network Format Unframed no overhead Intelsat IBS to IESS 309 and IESS 310 up to 10 IBS SMS Option Format Mbps and Eutelsat SMS to EESS501 IDR Option Format io IDR to IESS 308 and IESS 310 up to 10 Provides variable rate asynchronous ESC optional synchronous scrambler above 32kbps to replace Closed Network plus error multiplying V 35 scrambler optional backward ESC Format alarm facility and optional timeslot ID maintenance when used with Drop Insert all in minimum possible overhead down to 0 596 Deframer includes extended threshold operation that improves performance when used with Reed Solomon in very poor BER conditions where a Poor BER Performance single uncorrectable RS codeword can contain enough corrupt frame alignment words to knock an Intelsat specified deframer out of frame sync Up to 10 Mbps 13 5 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 50 Intelsat Reed Solomon Codec and Custom Option Specifications Parameter Modem Eomma Concatenated Reed Solomon outer codec to IESS 308 310 Default n k t 126 112 7 depth 4 Automatically switches to Code Rate 225 205 10
67. general modem settings for correct configuration and overlap of the two carriers note that there are 7 77 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook restrictions on the supported level of power asymmetry and symbol rate asymmetry 15 If the modems take a long time to lock then e Narrow the difference between the minimum and maximum round trip delay times if these are being used to minimise the uncertainty in the range to the satellite Main 2 Edit 3 Rx 7 Carrier 4 Advanced 2 PCMA 2 Round Trip Delay This has a significant effect on acquisition time If using a round trip delay then try switching to using location information e Check for signs of signal degradation such as poor Eb No values or poor spectrum and constellation 16 If 1 1 or 1 N redundancy is being used Paradise recommends setting the modems to switch on Unit Faults only i e setting the Tx and Rx fail switchovers off via the Main Edi Unit Advanced 1 for 1 menu option This is because when a modem is in standby no transmit carrier is generated therefore there is nothing for Paired Carrier to cancel and the standby demodulator will not lock because it cannot separate the two interfering carriers from the online modem and the remote modem In this case a switchover from the online modem can never occur since the standby modem is from a logical point of view faulty and a switchover will not occur to a standby modem deemed faulty Please
68. including tonal interferers such as CW radars Wi MAX jammers and other modulated carriers including adjacent 8 67 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook interfering carriers If there is more than one source of interference then it will detect and display all of them If Paradise s Paired Carrier is being used where two carriers are deliberately superimposed on top of each other then LinkGuard is capable of detecting and displaying any interference under both of the carriers For existing links even ones that do not use Paradise modems a LinkGuard capable modem can be set up to receive the same Rx signal in order to simply monitor the link for interference so long as it can lock to the carrier This is a useful and convenient way of quickly confirming suspected cases of interference while keeping the service running Note that even when the level of interference is severe enough to prevent the demodulator from locking the spectrum graph will continue to show the interference along with the wanted signal although it will not be able to differentiate between them at this point and will show a single composite spectrum LinkGuard does not necessarily replace other interference detection equipment but it does provide a useful new first line of defense It works with all carriers other than DVB S2 which will be supported in the future and is available as standard in all new Paradise Quantum and
69. menus AUPC attempts to maintain the remote Eb No at a specified target level by varying the local modem transmit power level Note that when AUPC is active then the ESC overhead channel is not available for user data Edit Tx Carrier Enable Screen Carrier mode On Off New Off Options Off The carrier is off On 7 42 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook The carrier is on and will remain on even after the equipment is switched off and on again On mute if outage mute if power break Mute on power break requires confirmation of transmission i e selecting Edit Unit Advanced Operation and select Ack Pwr Bre following a power outage Hx enabled When enabled then the carrier will be switched off whenever an Rx traffic fault is present in the modem RTS enabled When RTS is enabled then the carrier is controlled by the interface RTS line Factory default Eu Description Tx carrier control Edit Tx Carrier Power Screen IF Modem IF output power 25 to 0dBm 10 0 Step 0 1dBm New 10 0 Units dBm Minimum value 25 0 Maximum value 0 Step size 0 1 Factory default 20 0 Description Tx IF output power level 7 43 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Carrier Power Screen L band Modem RF output power 30 to 0dBm 10 0 Step 0 1dBm New 10 0 Units dBm Minimum value 30 0 Maximum value 0
70. ndependent e Status this shows the temperature in degrees Centigrade reported by the BUC e Type this field shows the BUC power class in Watts and the BUC current level in Amperes Status Misc Screen 1 AUPC 1 for N 4 LARGE The Status Misc menu contains the status of miscellaneous modem features split over several screens as described below Note that the 1 for N screen is not available unless the modem is the standby modem in a 1 for N redundancy switch The 1 for N redundancy switch user interface is documented separately in the document nstallation and Operating Handbook for Quantum and Evolution Series Redundancy Switches Status Misc AUPC Screen Remote Eb No 8dB Power offset 2 1dB Link OK This screen is constantly updated with the following information 7 11 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Remote Eb No this is the instantaneous Eb No measured by the remote modem while AUPC is enabled Power offset this is the instantaneous offset that has been applied to the modem Tx power output level to maintain the remote Eb No at a constant level Link this is the status of the ESC link which is used to pass AUPC control messages to the remote modem and to read back the remote Eb No level The status is set to Failed if the link is not working correctly otherwise the status is shown as OK Selecting the Down arrow displays the following screen Distant Eb No 8dB Target 10
71. need to be a multiple of 64kbps and master timing is derived from the lowest active port number that is configured and connected Note that Quad E1 ports 3 and 4 do not need to be SAF enabled in order to use the MUX feature as long as the MUX SAF itself is present 10 18 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 11 Connector Pinouts Remote M amp C RS485 RS232 Connector The selection of RS232 or RS485 must be made via the front panel The communications protocol is defined in the document Hemote M amp C Specification for Quantum and Evolution Series Satellite Modems Connector type 9 pin D female Signal name Name RS485 Gm Paradise Shield Gnd Shield Gnd i Shield Gnd Shield Gnd Pins 1 and 5 are both grounded on the modem ie Shield and Ground are interchangeable 1 for n also used for 1 for 1 Interface Connector type 9 pin D male Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 n CONNECTOR B Serial In Out This is an uncommitted and currently unused RS232 or RS485 serial port Line In Out amp Fail In Out A suitable four way lead 4 Screen 1 1 redundancy lead is as follows Unit 1 Unit 2 Pin 1 Screen Pin 1 circuit ground FII aie Pin 3 On Line signal 2 1 mito TUE Pin 2 On Line signal 1 2 PIN Oosa Pin 7 Fail signal 2 1 mig m Pin 6 Fail signal 1 2 Keep this lead as short as practical and ensure i
72. of additional functions are made available through Software Activated Feature SAF support As the name implies these are modem features that can be enabled by entering a feature code via any of the modem s user interfaces Feature codes are encrypted codes issued by Paradise Datacom uniquely associated with individual modems To allow evaluation of modem features all of the SAF features of the modem that it is capable of supporting can be activated for a 10 day period by entering a feature code of 0 This is referred to as Demonstration Mode Demonstration Mode can be activated up to three times after which any further attempts to use it will be rejected Note that it is not necessary to wait for Demonstration Mode to time out before reactivating it it can be activated twice to give a 20 day demonstration period and three times to give 30 days The user will be alerted shortly before the demonstration period times out As well as allowing feature evaluation Demonstration Mode can be used to test compatibility with other equipment and allows rapid substitution of equipment in a crisis To enable one or more features permanently referred to as Permanent Mode a modem specific feature code needs to be obtained from Paradise Datacom The code is tied to the modem serial number available via the user interfaces and on the back panel The features that have been temporarily enabled on a modem can be viewed along with the time remaining before
73. of the link where there is a return path and VLAN tags are not already present in the data coming into the modems In this mode each remote modem is assigned a unique VLAN tag by the user 4094 tags are available The Hub Tx modem automatically learns which tags are being used by each remote It also learns which devices are connected to each remote It then adds a VLAN tag to each incoming packet labelling it with the correct VLAN id for the particular remote it is destined for At each remote all packets are inspected and rejected unless they contain the relevant VLAN tag for that particular remote thus filtering out unwanted data The remotes remove the VLAN tags for onward transmission of packets onto the local network at the remote VLAN tagging by the modem is supported only in point to multipoint mode selected by setting the Ethernet traffic mode to Hub or Remote as appropriate e The modem can apply TCP acceleration to a specific VLAN stream Select TCP acceleration as normal at the hub and remote modems Set a VLAN id at the remote modem that represents the data stream to be pulled off At the hub set the VLAN id of the VLAN that you want to accelerate note this is the full 16 bit VLAN field value from the IEEE 802 1q header not just the 12 bit VLAN id portion The IP traffic addresses of the modems must be on the same subnet as the selected VLAN Only packets coming in that have a matching 16 bit VLAN field will be accelerat
74. of the modem 8 43 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 32 9 2 Maximum Bandwidth If excess bandwidth becomes available at any point i e one or more streams do not require their allocated bandwidth or some of the overall bandwidth has not been allocated to any particular stream then it is not wasted and it can be allocated in a controlled manner between potentially competing streams This setting is called the Burst Information Rate BIR specified in bits per second bps It defines the maximum amount of bandwidth beyond the guaranteed bandwidth that a stream should be allocated should spare bandwidth become available Each BIR should not be greater than the transmission data rate of the modem 1 32 9 3 Priority What happens when excess bandwidth does become available i e all guaranteed bandwidths are being met and there is spare capacity in the situation where several streams have BIRs set meaning that they are all potentially competing for the same excess bandwidth This is determined by the stream Priority setting In this case the allocation of the spare bandwidth between competing schemes will be done based on the priority level allocated to each stream This is done on an absolute basis if 256kbps of bandwidth is spare and two streams both want an additional 256kbps then all 256kbps will be allocated to the stream with the higher priority The priority setting also controls latency
75. overheads down to less than 1 User Parameters Target Eb No positive power offset negative power offset 1 57 Data Rate Specifications Maximum symbol rates are as follows PD10 IF 5 Msps PD10 L band 5 Msps PD20 IF 10 Msps PD20 L band 10 Msps PD25 IF 12 5Msps PD25 L band 12 5Msps PD55 IF 40Msps PD55 L band 40Msps PD60 IF 40Msps 37 5Msps for DVB S2 PD60 L band 40Msps 37 5Msps for DVB S2 Maximum bit rates are shown over the page for PD55 IF and L band modems 13 10 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook i FEC Rate Min Data Max Data 15 2 O QPSK VIT SEQ 30 2 96 O QPSK VIT SEQ 4512 O QPSK VIT SEQ O QPSK VIT RS O QPSK VIT RS O QPSK VIT RS 46 67 _ _ Tp eT 8 2 4 8 1 2 4 8 0 93 62 5 2 26 67 O QPSK TPC O QPSK TPC O QPSK TPC O QPSK TPC 093 52 74 55 07 16QAMTPC 34 288 260 16QAMTPC 78 336 60 16QaAMTPC 093 358 60 22 70 38 44 42 38 DVB S2 QPSK 4 15 45 00 DVB S2 QPSK 5 6 47 62 DVB S2 QPSK DVB S2 QPSK DVB S2 8PSK DVB S2 8PSK DVB S2 8PSK DVB S28PSK 56 2479 90 DVB S28PSK 8 0 2647 90 DVB S216APSK 2 3 26238 90 DVB S2 16APSK DVB S2 16APSK DVB S2 16APSK DVB S2 16APSK DVB S2 16APSK 9 10 FASTLINK LOW LATENCY LDPC SEE SEPARATE DATASHEET NOTE Max
76. panel supports E1 T1 E2 T2 E3 and T3 data rates at the following line coding impedance traffic bit rates and physical interfaces 10 8 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook EON ee You can select either balanced 750 G 703 on the BNC connectors or unbalanced 100 110 1200 G 703 on the EIA 530 connector depending upon interface connectors available If the impedance is set for 100 110 120Q then the following pinout applies Signal Description i Electrical Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX COMMON LINES Signal Ground Y Shield Protective ground Line Code Line Length For both T1 and E1 G 703 cards the line code is set from the front panel after the electrical interface is selected For T1 either AMI or B8ZS is available for E1 cards AMI or HDB3 In coded ie non AMI modes the modem will display a Data Marginal warning whenever a line code violation is detected For T1 cards a choice of line lengths is also given to allow the card to pre compensate the T1 signal for line losses If you are in doubt select the 133 feet option no pre compensation 10 9 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Interface Settings When the 75Q BNC interface is selected the screen of the output connector is always connected to ground The screen of the input connector may be selected as follows e Input screen grounded recommended
77. reference clock 7 124 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Clocks Station Clock Use Screen Options Station clock use Replace internal 10MHz clock New Replace internal 10MHz clock Replace internal 10MHz clock Do not replace 10MHz clock Factory default Replace internal 10MHz clock Description Controls the function of the station clock i e whether it replaces the internal 10MHz reference clock or not which is used as the main clock for the modem s internal processing Note that the decision on whether to use the station clock for Tx and or Rx clocking purposes is controlled by the Tx and Rx clock source menu options under Edit Tx Clocks and Edit Rx Clocks these options become available when a station clock source is selected and are independent of whether station clock replaces the internal 10MHz clock Edit Unit Clocks Station Clock Frequency Screen Units Minimum value Station clock freq 1000 to 10000kHz 1000 Step 1kHz New 10000 kHz 1 Maximum value 10000 Step size Factory default Description 1 10000 Indicates to the modem the frequency of the station clock input reference used for Tx and Rx clocking purposes If the station clock is being used to replace the internal 10MHz reference then this screen is not shown as the station clock must provide exactly 10MHz in this case 7 125 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation an
78. sites Partial mesh networks are also supported where one or more of the sites communicate with only a subset of the other sites These are described in the following sections Note that for multicast it does not matter whether you use point to point bridging or point to multipoint bridging or routing in all cases the modem just passes the multicast traffic 1 32 7 1 Ethernet Point to Point Bridging e An Ethernet bridge in the modem passes IP packets transparently as if the modem is not actually there e The bridge learns which interface terrestrial or satellite devices are attached to and consequently only forwards packets over satellite when required e IP packet contents are unchanged going over the bridge the source Ethernet MAC address will be changed to the modem s MAC address which is normal e Because the modem does not change the contents any protocol that can be used over Ethernet can be used VPN MPLS VLAN HTTP SMTP etc e Point to point bidirectional bridged links over satellite work in exactly the same way as a terrestrial bridge e A protocol called Spanning Tree is used to ensure that network loops do not occur and that a single path is used between any two points e f you do not need to access the modem for M amp C purposes then it is not actually necessary to set any IP address to use bridge mode the modem will pass traffic out of the box 8 40 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation a
79. switchover to the standby modem Setting both transmit and receive fail switchovers to Off effectively configures the unit to switch on unit faults only and ignore all traffic faults Edit Redundancy 1 For N Menu Virtually all of the options on this menu are only available if the modem is acting as the backup modem in a 1 N redundancy switch Please see separate redundancy switch operating manual for further details The one menu option that is relevant to traffic modems in a 1 N redundant system is described below Edit Redundancy 1 for N Traffic Modem 1 N Address Screen 1 N address 1 to 16 01 Step 1 New 01 Options Address range 1 to 16 Minimum value 1 Maximum value 16 Step size 1 Factory default None Description Sets the 1 N RS485 address for the modem to communicate with a 7 139 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook redundancy switch Note the modems position within the redundancy switch system dictates the 1 N address Please see separate redundancy switch operating manual 7 140 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 4 View Menu In general the View menu provides access to a summary of the information entered via the Edit menus Consequently these menus are not described in detail here View 1 Unit 2 SAF 3 Monitor 4 Alarms 5 Log 6 Config The menu contains the following options Unit This submenu contains manufacturing i
80. the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to 7x Clock In the Data In signal is 10 6 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to nternal or Rx the Data In signal is checked against the Int Tx Clk Out signal If you require the older 34 pin Winchester connector then an adaptor lead is required please contact the factory for details By selecting Advanced it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line RTS or Device DTE Ready In line DTR switch to the inactive state It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line RTS by selecting Edit Tx Carrier RTS enabled EIA530 in RS232 Mode If the EIA 530 connector is fitted and RS232 signals are selected under Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial then the following interface description applies T
81. then SNMP commands are always obeyed regardless of any user arbitration that is active within the modem this point should be taken into account when adding new control facilities to those already built into the modem 1 17 2 Giveaway Mode When the modem is switched to Giveaway mode a remote web user may assume control of the modem For remote web browsing there are two fixed user names namely admin and user The admin user can view and change the modem configuration while user can only view the modem settings Only admin can change the two passwords associated with these two user names Only one remote admin user can be logged in to the modem at any time but multiple users can be logged in as user at the same time With remote control users there is always an explicit login process requiring both a valid user name and password to be entered Note that remote admin users cannot log in while the modem is in Local mode 1 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook A user settable timeout controls for how long the admin user is logged in without any user entry activity when user entry is detected then the user session is extended by the length of the timeout period An admin user can also choose to log out of the modem which has the effect of closing the browser session and allowing another user to control the modem View only user login sessions do not use any timeout and are maintained until the bro
82. they become disabled as can the features that have been permanently enabled and those that can potentially be enabled 8 21 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Each feature is given an acronym by which it is referred to on the user interfaces etc A full list of modem SAF features available at the time of publication of this handbook is shown in Section 6 3 please contact your supplier or Paradise Datacom Sales for the most up to date list Please check with your supplier or Paradise Datacom whether a particular feature requires a hardware option card to be fitted The SAF function keeps the initial cost of a modem to the minimum and allows simple field upgrading at a later date as required 1 26 Software Upgrading It is possible to update the software and firmware within the modem via the Remote M amp C Ethernet connection web user interface upgrades via the serial M amp C port are not supported See the section on Remote Software Upgrade within the Web User Interface description 1 27 Partial Insert and Multi destinational Working Partial Insert is only available if the Extended D I feature is available In a typical scenario there may be a 2048kbps incoming carrier containing say 8 timeslots 512kbps for this destination When set to Normal the full 2048kbps has to be received and passed to the terrestrial When set to Partial only the 8 timeslots for this destination are selected and inser
83. to approximately 25 33 of the synchronous clock rate In IDR modes the Aux port provides either 32 or 64kbps data access in place of either one or both of the 32kbps ADPCM audio channels Typically this would be used synchronously but if required it could be used asynchronously amp oversampled giving maximum baud rates of approx 9600 Baud in place of one audio channel or 19200 Baud in place of both Audio channels 11 7 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Number Audio Ports All ports are 6000 with levels 7dBm to 16dBm set independently from the front panel Audio is encoded as 32kbps ADPCM or 16kbps ADPCM in some custom modes The Audio ports may be used in two applications In IBS modes if set to emulate a P1348 P1448 Audio Data mux card the ESC ports provide the equivalent of the two audio ports on the P1348 P1448 ie can transmit 64kbps 2 audio channels or 128kbps 2 audio channels plus 64 kbps data from main data port In IDR modes these are used to access the IDR Audio ESC channels One or both Audio ESC s may be dropped in favour of 32 or 64kbps access to the channel by the Aux port 11 8 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Backward Alarms Number BA1 Input Rx Summary fault output link to BA in N O indicates normal open in the normal non alarm state amp N C normally closed in the non alarm state Unlike the modem fault relays the
84. whether Channel Associated Signalling CAS information is present in Timeslot 16 TS order This controls whether timeslot reordering is allowed Drop mode This specifies the framing format for Drop MUX operation Bearer This controls the origination of a terrestrial bearer from the Insert MUX G732 sig This option controls whether CAS information is processed and routed through the satellite T1 sig This specifies whether Robbed Bit Signalling RBS information is present in the traffic source ABCD This determines the action to be taken with respect to the Rx CAS ABCD signalling block in relation to satellite backward alarms Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Framing 2048k Mode Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Framing CAS Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent 7 59 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Framing TS Order Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Framing Insert Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Framing CAS in TS16 Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Framing T1 RBS Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Framing CAS Action on Backward Alarm Screen CAS action on satellite backward
85. which case another form of encapsulation is used such as MPE or ULE If Cisco HDLC is selected on the modem then the received IP stream can be forwarded out of a serial interface to a serial router that supports Cisco HDLC which can convert it back to IP In general different modem manufacturer s IP even when using HDLC is not interoperable as there is no standard defined in this area If instead DVB S2 is used then generally IP is interoperable between different manufacturers modems so long as incompatible IP features are not being used such as compression or acceleration 1 32 7 IP Connectivity Modes The modem software supports several types of Ethernet network topology Firstly there is a point to point mode for when one modem is transmitting to and receiving from one other modem i e there is a direct satellite return path Secondly there is a point to multipoint mode for when one hub modem is transmitting to several remote modems The remote modems may be Rx only or may transmit back to Rx only modems at the hub that are daisy chained together to the hub Tx modem to allow all of the hub modems to share the hub Tx carrier 8 39 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Thirdly there is a mesh network mode where a number of remote sites each have one Tx carrier that is used to communicate with the other sites Each site also has one Rx modem for every site to allow it to receive from each of the other
86. 0 70 1 login as normal then upload the new software using the upgrade button 12 10 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 13 Specification Summary 1 45 Common Main Specifications Parameter Modem X BPSK QPSK OQPSK 8PSK Option QAM Option Modulation Scheme 16APSK Option 15QAM Option 32APSK Option 64QAM Option IF Frequency Range 50 90MHz and 100 180MHz L band Frequency 950 2050 MHz Range Built in Ethernet 10 100 BaseT IP Traffic on RJ45 with link and traffic indicators Electronically Selectable with other interfaces fitted RS422 including X 21 DCE and DTE emulation V 35 and RS232 on EIA530 connector 25 pin female D type Option EIA530 maximum 10Mbps RS232 max 100kbps Traffic Interface LVDS 25 pin female D type Option Options HSSI 50 pin SCSI 2 type connector G 703 balanced on EIA530 G 703 unbalanced on BNC female 750 Ethernet 10 100 1000 BaseT IP Traffic card with dual RJ45 more capable than standard base modem IP Note all data rates are modem specific see datasheets for specific modem data rates 4 8kbps 2Mbps Extends base operation to 5Mbps Extends 5Mbps to 10Mbps Extends 10Mbps to 20 or 25Mbps Extends 25Mbps to 55Mbps PD55 Extends 25Mbps to 60Mbps PD60 Extends 60Mbps to 100Mbps PD60 Extensions are cumulative User Traffic Data Rate 1bps Resolution Note The combination of FEC Rate Modulation schem
87. 0 bytes of payload e Original size 40 byte header IP UDP RTP 14 bytes Ethernet 20 bytes payload 5 bytes HDLC 79 bytes e Following compression 1 byte header IP UDP RTP 1 byte Ethernet 20 bytes payload 5 bytes HDLC 27 bytes best case This represents more than a 60 bandwidth reduction There is support for per route configuration control where you can specify up to 32 source or destination IP addresses only packets with one of these addresses get directed through the compressor Header compression runs up to 29000 packets per second one way 22000 packets per second two way on the IP Traffic card 1 32 13 VLAN Operation A VLAN allows virtual networks to be created as opposed to being limited to purely physical segments Benefits include creating a restricted broadcast domain so not everyone sees all traffic plus added security Three VLAN modes are supported e Transparent VLAN operation in bridging mode The modem supports IEEE 802 1q VLAN tags If data is received with these tags then the data complete with tags is transported transparently over satellite 8 51 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook e n point to multipoint operation the modem adds VLAN tags intelligently at the Hub and then filters specific streams at each Remote based on those tags discarding the VLAN tags prior to outputting the packets The VLAN tags are used over just the satellite portion
88. 00012 Mode View only Y E WEUGOME i CLICK FTO ENTER O Geode Web Server Welcome Screen The view only access message may be displayed depending upon login conditions 7 152 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook On entering the web site the user will then be presented with the following status screen P PARADISE DATACOM 9 QUANTUM SERIES m STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT SUMMARY Setup I Nx Rx ID Paradise modem a HESS Serial No 999 IF carrier frequency 70 0000 MHz IF carrier frequency 70 0000 MHz Moda In control Tx data rate 2048000 bps Rx data rate 2048000 bps Control Shared Tx symbol rate 2060720 Symbols s Rx symbol rate 2060720 Symbols s UNIT STATUS Traffic Transmit path OK since 6 39 0 on 24 8 1928 Rx fault FEC Decoder synchronisation lost sect hia Tx carrier status TX TRAFFIC Demodulator TEST MODE Rx Eb No dB TX CARRIER Final BER gt 1 0E 2 Rx power level dBm Rx buffer fill status Rx frequency offset 0 000 Hz Buffer slips Dver 0 Under 0 AUPC F Current AUPC Tx power level Remote Eb No o dB offset 0 48 For contact details and on line handbook see http www paradisedata com Modem Status Screen The line of buttons across the top of the display give access to the major modem functions while the tabs give access to individual features Tabs are nested and several levels of tab may be displa
89. 00bps 02048000 Step 1bps New 02048000 Units Bps Minimum value 4800 Maximum value Modem specific see datasheet for particular modem model Step size 1 Factory default 2048000 Description Terrestrial bit rate This is used in Continuous mode but is automatically set in other baseband modes The upper data rate limit is set according to which SAF data rates have been enabled and is model specific Note that the full data range is not available in every mode of operation and may be restricted by other settings such as the terrestrial interface type Framing service FEC type and FEC rate If the maximum valid data rate is exceeded then a configuration warning will be generated 1 21 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Menu Advanced 1 Framing 2 Timeslots 3 Overhead When the user level is set to Advanced see the Edit Unit Advanced User Level screen this menu allows configuration of framing timeslots and overhead framing timeslots and overhead is described separately in Chapter 14 f Note that the Advanced Baseband menu including support for 1 22 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 3 1 3 Edit Tx Clocks Screen Options Factory default Description Tx path clock source Tx Clock In New Receive reference Tx Clock In The external clock supplied on the interface Clock In line wil
90. 1 for N This menu contains the following options e 1 for 1 This controls various aspects of operation and switchover logic for modems that are being operated in 1 1 redundant pairs e 1 for N This is used to control the set up and operation of traffic modems and the redundancy switch backup modem in 1 N redundancy systems Edit Redundancy 1 For 1 Switchover Screen Switchover 1 Switch to standby 2 Switch to maintenance 3 Switch to service Options Switch to standby This option forces a modem that is on traffic to standby This is done by momentarily creating a fault condition that forces a switchover to occur Switch to maintenance Allows the modem to be removed from the redundancy group therefore preventing the unit being switched on line Switch to service Allows the modem to enter a redundancy group and be available to come on line Factory default None Description Forces a switch to the standby unit and allows a modem to be removed or added to a redundancy group 7 138 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Redundancy 1 For 1 Operation Screens Receive fail switchover Off 1 Off 2 On This causes the modem to ignore loss of demod lock which would otherwise cause a switchover to the standby modem Transmit fail switchover Off 1 Off 2 On This causes the modem to ignore loss of incoming data to the modulator that would otherwise cause a
91. 10 This can only be due to a very poor error rate on the PCM input signal Tx fault T816 MF sync The modem only seeks TS16 Multiframe sync when the lost on Tx input Tx baseband is set to use the Drop mux in a G 732 mode and CAS signalling has been selected or 2048k IBS G 732 096 overhead mode with CAS is enabled Check that a CAS multiframe is present on the PCM signal applied to the modem Tx fault Frame sync lost Frame sync has been lost on the terrestrial input Only on Tx input Check bearer displayed when using the drop mux Check the bearer type and AIS type has been correctly configured If the AIS detectors are disabled check equipment generating bearer is not generating AIS Tx fault Frame sync lost Frame sync has been lost on one or more of the Quad E1 T on ports 1 to 4 card terrestrial inputs 12 2 Other Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook FautTexXt Notes J Relays To Ter To Sat Other mm o wmm me wew9 Dopo d imis permissible upper amp lower limits DPLL emn HR E A unlocked Tx fault Data input all Quad E1 fault indicating AIS all 1s i e no data is c i ones on ports 1 to 4 received on the specified in E1 card terrestrial ports Tx fault Drop mux fault Quad E1 card data input fault when trying to drop on ports 1 to 4 specified timeslots from specified E1 ports onto transmitted carrier mue ense Eee C7
92. 30 data timeslots with 2 overhead timeslots a ratio of 32 30 or an increase of 1 15th G 732 uses an awkward definition of having even and odd numbered frames with TSO having different functions in even and odd frames Thankfully the IBS specification parted from the G 732 definition at this point and instead of having even and odd frames of 32 timeslots it defined one longer frame equivalent to an even then an odd G 732 frame An IBS frame therefore has 64 timeslots with special functions for TSO TS16 TS32 same as G 732 TSO odd and TS48 same as G 732 TS16 odd which leaves 60 timeslots available for normal data An IBS Frame is constructed as follows TSO consists of a spare bit X followed by a 7 bit frame alignment word ie X001 101 1 TS16 amp TS48 are defined to convey Channel Associated Signalling CAS when required and are normally forced to all ones 11111111 when CAS is not being transmitted CAS is covered separately later TS32 conveys the low rate ESC E the Backward Alarm B and the TS32 Multiframe sequence M If IBS satellite link encryption is in use very very rare then it also conveys the encryption control vectors otherwise these bits are spare X as shown One bit is also forced to a logic 1 for frame alignment resulting in a content of ETBMXXXX A standard IBS frame then is 64 x 8 ie 512 bits long TS32 Multiframe A 64 bit multiframe pattern is placed one bit at a time into the M bit of T8932
93. 4 wire 6000 7 to 16dBm In addition to normal IDR ESC operation these ports may also be used in IBS modes to generate a 64kbps IBS carrier comprised of two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels or a 128kbps IBS carrier comprised of 64kbps data from the main data interface of the modem plus two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels This is an emulation of the most popular modes of the P1348 P1448 voice data MUX card often used in SNG applications e An RS232 RS422 RS485 port for synchronous asynchronous ESC traffic This port replaces the shared ESC Aux access via the Async ESC connector on the main unit It is used to provide access to the 8kbps synchronous IDR ESC channel If the Async ESC feature is available then this port provides both asynchronous access to the 8kbps channel and a high rate asynchronous ESC in IBS SMS and Closed network plus ESC services e An RS232 RS422 port for synchronous asynchronous Aux traffic This port replaces the shared ESC Aux access via the Async ESC connector on the main unit The Aux port provides 32 or 64kbps access to the IDR overhead in place of one or both of the IDR 32kbps ADPCM audio ESC channels In IBS SMS this port may be configured to provide either the IBS low rate INTELSAT oversampled ESC facility or a higher rate synchronous channel within the IBS SMS overhead Rx IF Input Option This is a BNC female connector and can be used in either 500 or 750 impedance mode The carrier signal level presented at the inpu
94. 7 frame FIFO overflow to be transmitted due to an internal buffer overflow Uncoded FIFO overflow to be transmitted due to an internal buffer overflow Tx fault Encoder fault Unspecified DVB S2 encoder fault Consult factory Tx fault Framer sync lost Unspecified DVB S2 encoder fault Consult factory sd Tx fault Data failure to Unspecified DVB S2 modulator fault Consult factory modulator 12 3 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 39 Transmit Warnings Fault Text Tx warning Maximum multiframe period too small Tx warning Frame backward alarm detected at Tx input indicating Rx output or downstream Rx equipment fault Tx warning TS16 MF backward alarm detected at Tx input indicating equipment downstream of Rx has failed to find MF sync Tx warning Cannot hold reach power set at BUC Tx warning Tx exceeds 4 5Mbps limit in TPC 5 16 TX warning Tx exceeds 6 5Mbps limit in TPC 21 44 or 2 3 7 7Mbps limit in TPC 1 2 12Mbps limit in TPC 7 8 33Mbps limit in TCM 2 3 outside interface range Tx warning G703 carrier Tx warning Carrier out of range Tx warning Line Code Violation detected rate outside range Tx warning Data clock inverted data changing state on wrong edge Tx warning TRAU above threshold Dropped Notes Framer failed to find a frame length to support TS ID mainte
95. 8 01 09 20 2A 54 03 4 getthe transmit power to prove that the change has been accepted The response indicates a value of 20 e t T FTx FP wr 02 15 01 09 67 65 74 20 54 49 46 54 78 49 46 50 77 72 2A 0B 03 20 02 0A 01 09 2D 32 30 2A C3 03 9 2 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 10 Data Interfaces The modem provides Ethernet IP interfaces as standard plus options for LVDS EIA530 RS422 V 35 and RS232 IDR HSSI G 703 balanced and unbalanced Quad E1 IP traffic and Eurocom D1 interfaces The three data interface positions on the modem are designated Position 1 upper and Position 2 lower and Position 3 Postion 1 can accommodate an EIA 530 panel or the IDR card Position 2 can accommodate any of the interface cards other than IDR or G 703 unbalanced Position 3 accomodates balanced G 703 only The P3702 G703 option card supports E1 T1 E2 T2 E3 T3 data rates The card is fitted directly on to the main board The balanced G 703 interface is available on the EIA530 connector if fitted The unbalanced interface uses co axial cables to the dedicated G703 BNC connectors in interface Position 3 The P3701 IDR option is fitted directly to the main PCB but the connector occupies the upper interface position 1 It is possible to fit alternative interfaces from the Paradise P37xx range in the modem A P3051 Link PCB may be required to connect to other interface cards 1 1 Oper
96. 85 comms to RFT5000 LO frequency 4900 MHz C 5 8 6 425 GHz VSAT Only available if FSK option fitted LO frequency 4900MHz PALAPA 6 425 6 725 GHz VSAT 7 52 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Only available if FSK option fitted LO frequency 5475MHz INSATC 6 725 7 025 GHz VSAT Only available if FSK option fitted LO frequency 5775MHz Ku 14 0 14 5 GHz VSAT Only available if FSK option fitted LO frequency 13050MHz Offset Ku 13 75 14 25 GHz VSAT Only available if FSK option fitted LO frequency 12800MHz Factory default mene Allows the user to select from a number of Paradise BUCs or Other if another manufacturers BUC is being used If an option other than None Description is selected then the user is taken to the following Terminal Mode screen Edit Tx Carrier Advanced BUC Terminal Mode Screen BUC terminal mode Off 1 Off 2 On This allows the user to select either open loop control Independent mode or closed loop control Terminal mode In closed loop mode the modem attempts to maintain a constant BUC output power by adjusting the modem output power and BUC attenuation level In open loop mode no feedback from the BUC is used Once a selection has been made and if the BUC type has been set to Other then the following SHF Frequency Offset screen is displayed Edit Tx Carrier Advanced BUC Frequency Offset Screen SHF freq offset 99 99
97. 8dB 2 3 Rate 1 76 dB Summary Measure C NIN 7 A 10 L wl 10 C Es B 1 Et Et Epec Evec k Eb C N N og 10 N No 10 Log Bits Symbol No No 10 Log FEC Code Rate No No 10Log p No Example 6 5dB 5 40dB 3dB 2 40dB 2 40dB 1 25dB 3 55dB 3 65dB 0 51dB gt 416dB QPSK 3 4 Rate 126 112 7 8 32 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Tables to Convert C N N to Eb No C N m 0 Ene p N No 4 6 2 75 Adjust for Adjust for Adjust for 4 8 3 05 modulation FEC Rate RS Codec BPSK 0dB 1 2 Rate 3 0dB n k t QPSK 3 0dB 3 4 Rate 126 112 7 0 51dB 1 25dB OQPSK 3 0dB 219 201 9 0 37dB 7 8 Rate 8PSK 4 77dB 0 58dB 225 205 10 0 40dB 2 3 Rate 1 76dB 15 0 14 86 8 33 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook E D c 0 No C N N error lt 0 04dB Example 8SPK with 2 3 Rate TCM FEC amp RS 219 201 9 C N N C N 8PSK so 2 3 Rate FEC so RS Code 219 201 9 s m 7 2d0B subtract 4 77dB add 1 6dB add 0 37dB Lookup Lookup Calculate Eb No z C N 2 64dB 8 34 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 32 IP Functionality 1 32 1 Base Modem IP As shown below the base modem has one RJ45 auto sensing 10 100Mbps Ethernet port for M amp C and one for sending and receiving satellite IP traffic Tu amu PARADISE DATACOM Bas
98. 9 to 99 999GHz 12 80000000 Step 100Hz New 12 80000000 7 53 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Units GHz Minimum value 99 999 Maximum value 99 999 Step size 0 0000001GHz Factory default 0 000 Description This screen allows the modem to be set to display and edit the final SHF frequencies instead of the IF frequencies When the BUC type has been set to a known Paradise BUC and the modem has the FSK communications option then this setting is done automatically and the menu option to manually set the frequency shift is not presented Edit Tx Carrier Advanced BUC Power Screen Power if over 170W 0 to 999W 000 Step 1W New 000 Units W Minimum value 0 Maximum value 999 Step size 1W Factory default 0 000 Description This screen tells the modem what the BUC power class is However this can be ignored unless a CO has been selected with a power output greater than 170W Edit Tx Carrier Advanced BUC DC Supply Screen DC supply voltage Off 1 Off 2 On This screen allows the user to control the DC to the BUC Either 48V DC 3A 200W or 24v DC 5 5A 200W may be sourced via the coax line powered if the BUC power supply option is fitted 7 54 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook configured to be Line powered N Severe damage may occur if a DC supply is fed to a BUC not Edit Tx Carrier Advanced BUC 10MHz Refer
99. AS SRE DS sestcactcnaatadtet tas tek hoctasctaae ERE Eb dette 6 13 Ioe EGDWUVDISDISV aa ea RR EE CRE Ute qi edd 6 13 E 6 gt a gt 1 Re TRUE 6 15 Chapter UserlrnterfdceS ansnasmiisinnienna a Eeee EEE NECE 7 1 1 17 User Names Passwords and Modem Control ccccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeaees 7 1 1 17 1 LOcarMOdE cee 1 1 TIZ SIVA Way NOOC hapa TT 7 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook To 59e Takeaway MIOGOQ idis sostanza loe ades tolo i dados uod tosta elt desea uod totam 1 2 118 FEront Panel Interface ce es 7 3 146 1 Keypad ODG allOl xscecauieneeditodieodr enis did dias Uode Cop D DR PVP Fide quai qua quis 7 3 T4062 ICO Screen Lay Out uo csi eee ee eee 7 5 TIS ErontFatiel Ment 3l Uli C sce dacedacevenedncevieneciedeatenteuceee scene aaen teeta eneaammaneemmmeuanas 7 6 WIT MAMEN nee tne 7 6 PME UNS eee eee ee 7 7 Uu C PR lV 2 91 8 ener meee et nr ec ne cn 7 15 LAIA VEW MONU cack eee Renee ee ee eee eS 7 141 iS Es ummm S01 een E ee nee na ar era ee 7 141 M20 WeDNISer IMIS ACC dmm 7 151 T201 ME ooielnelite anone Ve aati 7 151 1 20 2 Graphing Features erre hace en aes 7 154 1 20 30 Configuration MEMONGS ienereeeccecctencscncstcaceantdeaceenetensteadantensanaecetewstesdae s 7 159 1 20 4 Interface COMNGUIATION S enam eontra eee tct dcc nce 7 161 RANS Gl cS 0 CC sere ure a ae eCard tr E 7 162 120 6 35Vstem EOC qoot od ode nok batched Sad o ta
100. C channel acts as a bridge some bandwidth may be consumed by broadcast traffic finding its way onto it and it is best to minimize this if possible The modem allocates private IP addresses to the two ends of the ESC link no user address set up is required The ESC channel in IP mode has some sophisticated M amp C modes as described in the following list in all cases IP packets destined for the remote network continue to be bridged over the ESC e Paradise Univeral Protocol PUP commands can be sent to the modem with an esc prefix to force them to be sent over the ESC to the far modem e g esc get RxRemoteEbNo e If you don t want packets to be indiscriminately forwarded over the ESC then you can take the M amp C port out of the bridge meaning that packets on the M amp C port will not normally then go any further than the local modem You can then force chosen packets to be forwarded over the ESC if you want Forwarding is controlled by the Remote M amp C interface setting Setting this to P Forward to remote causes the modem to process TCP packets sent to ports 6703 and 6704 in a special way o Packets sent to port 6703 are forwarded over the ESC to port 6703 on the remote modem At the remote modem with the remote M amp C interface mode set to IP Remote Rem M amp C the payloads of packets received 8 38 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook over the ESC on port 6703 a
101. CM Note that ACM works to the full symbol rate of the modem ACM menu on off options are accessible once DVB S2 is selected as the Tx or Rx service see the Edit Tx Service and the Edit Hx Service screens ACM status can be viewed by selecting the Down arrow when the Status Traffic screen is displayed see the Status Traffic screen for more details ACM is built into the modem and does not require the use of a separate controller box ACM is compatible with the use of Paradise s Paired Carrier allowing both carriers to use the same space segment further reducing bandwidth requirements 8 54 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 33 DVB S2 and SmartLink The Quantum modem supports SCPC DVB S2 and combined SCPC DVB S2 operation The DVB S2 standard was approved by ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute in November of 2006 The new standard incorporates the latest technology in order to provide greater spectral efficiency and improved stability using high order modulation schemes and more powerful FEC coding It is a common misconception that DVB S2 is a standard for the broadcast of video but this is incorrect as the standard is essentially data agnostic DVB S2 allows for both continuous data streams such as those provided by G 703 HSSI and EIA530 interfaces and packetised data such as IP and MPEG video The space segment savings of DVB 92 can therefore be obtained equally on a
102. CPC features are required then as well as selecting SmartLink the Tx or Rx service should be set to Closed network as this does not add any extra framing to that provided by DVB S2 DVB S2 is provided as a Tx Rx service option whereas SmartLink is provided as an SCPC FEC option once an SCPC service has been selected Currently the only terrestrial interface that is interoperable with other vendors equipment when running a pure DVB 92 service is the IP interface IP is supported on the base modem when in SCPC and SmartLink modes but requires the P3714 IP Traffic card option when using a DVB S2 service 8 56 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook If a DVB S2 only service is required for an interface other than IP then the Closed Network service should be selected along with the SmartLink FEC option This will provide a DVB S2 service with no additional SCPC framing overhead DVB S2 with IP is supported directly from the Tx and Rx service menu options Once DVB S2 or SmartLink has been enabled various other configuration menu options become available including choice of modulation and FEC rate as well as DVB S2 FEC frame size choice and DVB S2 pilots DVB S2 pilots introduce a regular burst of unmodulated carrier that helps the demodulator lock onto the signal in poor signal to noise conditions at a cost of increased overheads of around 2 4 8 57 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operati
103. Dropped TRAU alarm threshold 3999 UNIT STATUS Port 1 RX TRAFFIC Port 1 voice mode Channel Port 1 voice slots 1 4 TX TRAFFIC TEST MODE Port 1 signal mode Port 1 signal slots 1 5 TX CARRIER Port 2 Port 2 voice mode Off v Port 2 Voice slots 1 4 E Port 2 signal mode Off v Port 2 signal slots 1 5 Port 3 Port 3 voice mode off Port 3 voice slots Port 3 signal mode Off v Port 3 signal slots ove the cursor over an item s ume abel for help Port 4 Port 4 voice mode off iv Port 4 voice slots Port 4 signal mode off s Port 4 signal slots Sat ABIS Web Configuration Screen Diagnostics in the form of the achieved compression ratio percentage of the available satellite bandwidth being used and the dropped TRAU count are available for Sat ABIS as shown overleaf 8 63 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook ym Paradise Evolution modem mj 2 Q fi Y hittp 10 0 70 64 statusdual php TB 1 b D E Free Hotmail Suggested Sites webslice Gallery E Telegraph co uk new Modem configurator door entry YW The Independent 7j Other bookmarks MN PARADISE DATACOM ff EVOLUTION SERIES STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Local SUMMARY Unit SA Monitor Graphs IP Traffic Alarms SAT Abis i ID Paradise Evolution modem Serial No 10601267 Mode In control Hour Day Month Control Shared E Compression UNIT STATUS o
104. E ON REGS nso ee 25Mbps to 45Mbps Terrestrial data rate Enables data rates in the given range inclusive 45Mbps to 55Mbps Evolution PD55 or 60Mbps Quantum PD60 6 6 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Featre SAF Code IBS SMS IBS Enables Tx and Rx IBS SMS service Drop Insert Enables basic transmit and receive T1 E1 Drop Insert options including Rx terrestrial bearer origination and the ability to replace dropped timeslots with idle code Extended Drop Insert Enables selection of extended Tx and Rx Drop Insert options processing of E1 Channel Associated Signalling in timeslots 16 and 48 timeslot identity maintenance allowing all possible number of timeslots partial timeslot insertion T1 Robbed Bit Signalling and timeslot reordering Enables the Viterbi FEC scheme Solomon outer FEC Da ee and 176MHz 8PSK 8PSK Enables selection of 8PSK modulation 16QAM 16QAM Enables selection of the 16QAM FEC scheme terrestrial data rates up to and including 10Mbps terrestrial data rates Advanced a Enables selection of the high rate asynchronous ESC channel in IBS SMS mode and asynchronous ESC access to the IDR 8kbps synchronous ESC channel as well as enabling selection of Closed network plus ESC mode 32kbps ADPCM audio channels with Aux data ae features Enables custom RS N K and interleaver depth selection selection of IBS SMS high rate asynchronous ESC maxim
105. E 40 RX TRAFFIC 6 Oo 20 TX TRAFFIC 0 100 TEST MODE Bandwidth TX CARRIER Bandwidth a graph is not displayed on z his page then it is because you E ra ppe d TRA ieed to install a suitable E ersion of the Java Runtime c nvironment Please click on he following link for further F ed r r f 2b t i nformation 17 39 35 17 39 40 17 39 45 17 39 50 17 39 55 17 40 00 17 40 05 17 40 10 17 40 15 17 40 20 17 40 25 17 40 30 ow to install Java Modem Time Sat ABIS Web Diagnostics The compressed data is passed over satellite formatted as HDLC packets that run run asynchronously to the T1 E1 interfaces However the hub clock input to Sat Abis is extended over satellite and used to synchronise the remote to the hub The hub clock is used as a clock generator for HDLC framed data and the remote modem derives its clock from the satellite signal and generates a 2 048 MHz bearer to the BTS The bearer is looped by the BTS back into the remote for synchronised communications back to the hub As well as saving up to 50 bandwidth Sat ABIS as an embedded solution reduces box count Sat ABIS is compatible with FastLink low latency LDPC to minimise delay and it is also compatible with Paired Carrier for even greater bandwidth savings 8 64 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 36 FastLink Low latency LDPC FEC design is a trade off between good BER performance and low latency TPC has lo
106. Evolution modems 8 68 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 9 Remote Control Protocol The modem supports the following remote control interfaces e A built in remote web user interface that provides web pages from the modem using a web server to a web browser This is accessed by entering the IP address of the modem into a web browser address bar the web server being on port 80 e A serial interface selectable between RS232 and RS485 that can be used to send and receive Paradise Universal Protocol PUP messages This interface can be driven either through a generic user entry application such as HyperTerminal in the case of RS232 or through an application that uses a driver developed specifically to implement the PUP protocol In the case of RS485 a message wrapper defined in the document Remote M amp C Specification for Quantum and Evolution Series Satellite Modems is used to encapsulate PUP commands and responses which are incorporated into the message payload e An Ethernet interface that can be used to send and receive PUP messages or Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP messages This interface can be used in several ways Firstly a generic user entry application such as Telnet can be used to automatically send or manually enter PUP commands Secondly PUP messages can be encapsulated directly into TCP packets using the message format defined in the document Hemote M amp C
107. F frequency offset Power class OC voltage control 1 0MHz reference control BUC carrier control BUC attentuation control 1 1 BUC services control FRAMING 2045k data format G fs2 CAS signaling Remap timeslot order Drop bearer format Process CAS in TS15 Ti signal contains RES CRE Process bearer CRO Frame re acquisition an CRE loss TIMESLOTS Humber of timeslots used Timeslot selection Timeslot 10 maintenance over satellite Idle code insertion OVERHESO Closed E SC ESC interface baud rate ESC interface character length ESC interface parity ESC interface electrical type Backward alarm control IBS overhead allocation to Aux channel Bux interface electrical type IB5 5MS High rate ESC mode High rate ESC usage Max ESC rate ESC interface baud rate ESC interface character length ESC interface parity IBS overhead allocation to Sux channel ESC interface electrical type Bux interface electrical type ESC level cht ESC level ch2 Backward alarm control IDR IDR 8k ESC mode ESC interface baud rate ESC interface character length ESC interface parity ESC interface electrical type IDR ESC audio encoding IDR overhead assignment ta Aux channel Bux interface electrical type ESC level ch ESC level che Backward alarm control Front Panel Edit Tx Menus 7 16 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 Service 2 Baseband 3 Clocks 4 Modulation 5 FEC 6 Scrambler 7 Carrier The Edit Tx menu contains the
108. Gnd da Tis 7 121 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit M amp C Baud Rate Screen Baud rate 9600 baud New 9600 baud Options 110 baud 150 baud 300 baud 600 baud 1200 baud 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud 38400 baud 57600 baud 76800 baud 115200 baud Factory default 9600 baud Description Specifies the remote control serial interface baud rate Edit Unit M amp C RS485 Address Screen RS485 address 0 to 255 1 Step 1 New 1 7 122 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Units Minimum value 1 Maximum value 255 Step size 1 Factory default 1 Description Specifies the unit s RS485 address Edit Unit M amp C Gateway Screen Remote control port IP gateway 010 000 070 002 010 000 070 002 Factory default 0 0 0 0 Description Sets the IP address of a default gateway The gateway represents the next hop destination which is normally the address of a router for packets destined for somewhere other than the local network This is used with TCP acceleration brouting and header compression An address of 0 0 0 0 means that the gateway is not set Edit Unit M amp C IP Address Screen Remote control port Ethernet IP address 010 000 070 001 010 000 070 001 Factory default 10 0 70 1 Description Sets the IP address for the remote control interface The same IP address
109. HEHEHEHE BE HE HEHEHE BE AE HEHEHEH HE HEHEHE MMC HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH PE EEE EE HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHRHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH PE TEE EE THE THTHHHHEHEHE HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHPHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH TETEHETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETE TETETETETETERETME HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH PE EEE EE HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH PE TEE EEE HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHPHHHHHHHHHHHHPHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHPHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH PE TEE EE HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH PE TEE EE HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH PE TEE HEE TETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETETE TETETETETETEREIE HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH PE EEE EEE Resetting modem once rebooted perform upgrade using web interface De Temp DElvin ftpscript gt Typical screen response seen during fbupgrade 2 Download the latest modem software t
110. ID Paradise modem Serial No 999 Mode In control Serial interface Control Shared Baud rate 9600 baud RS485 address F UNIT STATUS Serial interface mode R5232 RX TRAFFIC Advanced TX TRAFFIC Ethernet interface TEST MODE Remote control port Ethernet fi0 0 70 147 Remote control port IP subnet TX CARRIER IP address 10 0 70 147 mask 255 255 0 0 pee Remote control port Ethernet IP gateway 0 0 0 0 Giveaway Takeaway mode Modem control Takeaway User auto logout period s mins Paradise Remote control port Ethernet IP gateway Sets the IP gateway for the remote control interface Admin User New password Minimum length 6 characters New password confirmation un l iz Typical Screen Showing Edit Boxes and Drop Down Boxes A user can logout at any time by clicking on the ogout button This brings up the following message box note that responding Yes will automatically close the Internet Explorer session Microsoft Internet Explorer Zz X 2 The Web page vou are viewing is trying Ea close the window Do vou want bo close this window L9 e Logout Confirmation Screen 1 20 2 Graphing Features One of the novel aspects of the modem is the ability to use it as a spectrum analyser to view the Rx signal spectrum and as an oscilloscope to view the and Q channel Rx signal constellation Other graphs provide time based logging for up to one month of key modem paramete
111. IDR Framing IDR Service Features The Intelsat definition of IDR framing is in IESS 308 Eutelsat have a similar system defined in EESS 203 Intermediate Rate Digital Carriers IDC Earth Station Standard which simply cross refers back to the Intelsat IESS 308 standard for the Channel Unit Characteristics and so the Modem equipment required for these services is identical From here on we will refer to IDR framing but the text applies equally to Eutelsats IDC framing Standard Features specified in IDR definitions The addition of standard IDR framing increases the data rate by exactly 96kbps IDR framing is added to provide the following extra features compared to closed network links 3 Two Audio ESC channels encoded as 32kbps ADPCM As IDR is intended to replace all FDM links these Audio ESCs replace the analog audio engineering service circuits of the FDM service An 8kbps digital ESC circuit Four independent backward alarms to signal to up to four sites receiving a multidestinational carrier that there is trouble with the link in the other direction Additional Features Paradise products 3 Where many IDR carriers exist between sites the Audio ESC on the second and subsequent carriers are not required as the mandatory station to station ESC is met with the first carrier The modem equipped with the IDR option allows 32 or 64kbps access to the bandwidth occupied by these audio channels on the Aux port Allowing ei
112. Interface screen Section 7 3 3 1 8 and the Edit Rx Interface screen Section 7 3 3 2 9 respectively MultiMux A derivative of the Quad E1 interface if the mux SAF is available This allows combinations of terrestrial data to be multiplexed to one aggregate satellite carrier using the Fait Tx Interface screen Section 7 3 3 1 8 and the Edit Hx Interface screen Section 7 3 3 2 9 respectively Available Mux modes are Quad E1 RS422 Quad E1 RS232 Quad E1 V 35 Quad E1 IP Quad E1 RS422 IP 7 86 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Factory default Description Quad E1 RS232 IP Quad E1 V 35 IP see following table for a full list of combinations and clocking options Eurocom D1 Sat ABIS RS422 Selects the terrestrial interface to be used for Tx Rx traffic Note that the Quad E1 MultiMux feature supports a number of different combinations of terrestrial inputs and clocking modes as shown below QUAD E1 MultiMux Mode 1 E1 port E1 port E14IP E1 i i E1 V35 IP E1 RS232 I P RS422 IP V35 IP RS232 IP portE1 2 portE1 2 portE1 2 portE1 2 portE1 2 portE1 2 2 porte port 3 porte port 3 porte port 3 porte port 3 port EIA530 RS422 port EIA530 V35 port EIA530 RS232 EIA530 RS422 EIA530 V35 EIA530 RS232 Supported Interfaces Tx Clocking Modes 2 3 4 E1 Rx Internal Station EIA530 EIA530
113. LL Tx Data I F Tx FIFO Tx Clock In Rx Clock Mode 1 21 2 3 Station Clock When Station is selected the modem s Rx timing is phase locked to the station clock input but is run at the Rx data rate frequency The Rx Doppler buffer is enabled The clock and data appear on RT Receive Timing and RD Receive Data respectively The station clock input can be configured to provide a clock just for Rx path processing or it can be used to replace the modem s internal 10MHz clock used for all internal processing The station clock frequency need not equal the modem s internal 10MHz clock frequency when it is being used to provide just Rx path clocking it can be set anywhere between 1kHz and 10MHz RxData RxClock RT ioi A Rx Buffer DDS A Station clock Modem Rx Data Interface Data from decoder deframer Station Clock Rx Clock Mode 8 5 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 21 2 4 Internal Clock When nternal is selected the modem s Rx timing is phase locked to the modem s internal clock but is run at the Rx data rate frequency The Rx Doppler buffer is enabled The clock and data appear on RT Receive Timing and RD Receive Data respectively RxData RxClock RT ba Modem Rx Data Interface Rx Buffer DDS Data from decoder deframer Ref TCXO Internal Rx Clock Mode 1
114. LNB signals it is best suited to single channel lt per HPA or single channel per transponder applications Long Loop Closed Around the Satellite The steps involved in using the predistorter are as follows 1 Configure the modem in a closed loop setup as described above 2 Ensure the modem is in 16 QAM mode for both Tx and Rx 3 Configure the modem Tx output power to the required level in the Edit Tx Rx Common tab It is recommended this level should not exceed 10dBm as some power headroom is needed for the predistorter to apply its expanding nonlinear characteristic 4 Inthe Edit Tx Rx Common Predistorter tab select the predistorter algorithm adaption method There are two choices the algorithm can adapt and automatically stop when convergence is detected or alternatively the user can program the algorithm to iterate a specific number of times Both methods work well However best performance is achieved if the algorithm is allowed to run for several hundred iterations 5 Pressing the Start button will initiate the adaption process This starts with a special undistorted 16QAM constellation being transmitted into the channel The signal is used to sound the link for the presence of spectral inversions and receive constellation phase ambiguities Note that while this constellation is 7 179 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook being transmitted Tx traffic may be disrupted Once the channel has b
115. New None ESC Parity Screen ESC interface RS485 New RS485 ESC Interface Screen Enable backward alarm On 1 Off 2 On ESC Backward Alarm Screen 14 11 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook IBS SMS Aux mode Off New Off Aux Mode Screen Aux interface RS485 1 RS232 2 RS422 3 RS485 4 IP Aux Interface Screen These screens are explained in the following sections ESC Baud Rate Options Factory default Description 110 baud 150 baud 300 baud 600 baud 1200 baud 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud 38400 baud 57600 baud 76800 baud 115200 baud 9600 baud Sets the baud rate of the ESC UART 14 12 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook ESC Character Length Options bits 8 bits Factory default 8 bits Description Sets the number of bits in an ESC UART character ESC Parity Options None Even Oad Factory default None Description Controls the ESC UART parity setting ESC Interface ESC interface RS485 New RS485 Options RS232 RS422 RS485 P RS485 Local RS485 Remote IP to Serial Factory default H5485 Description Specifies which of the modem s physical interfaces is to be connected through to the satellite ESC channel Note RS485 is not available on the IDR card Note that the modem back panel Async ESC connector provides either a 14 13 Quan
116. No 10701969 Mode In control Help elp Unpredistorted Tx Unpredistorted Rx Control Shared Her l Adapt and Stop on Convergence UNIT STATUS Adapt over N Iterations RX TRAFFIC TX TRAFFIC N 100 400 TEST MODE TX CARRIER BEEN Start Adaptation Stop Adaptation Stop Predistortion Help Select a stored modem d z E configuration to reload NI Iterations 27 O P Level 12 dBm Predistorter Screen set to adapt and stop on convergence 7 180 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook JA PARADISE DATACOM y QUANTUM SERIES STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Local SUMMARY Tx Rx Common d Framing Y Buc LNB Predistorter ID Paradise modem i Serial No 10701969 Mode In control Hel Control Shared Adapt and Stop on Convergence UNIT STATUS Adapt over N Iterations O RX TRAFFIC TX TRAFFIC N 100 400 TEST MODE TX CARRIER me Start Adaptation Stop Adaptation Stop Predistortion Help Select a stored modem onfiguration to reload Adaptation Stopped Iterations 90 Predistorter is in use Predistorter Screen showing convergence after 90 iterations 7 181 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 8 Modem Concepts 1 21 Doppler Plesiochronous Buffering and Clocking There are two terms commonly used when referring to the receive buffering namely Doppler and Ples
117. Operating Handbook Note that when TCP acceleration is used in both directions then the TCP acknowledgements going in each direction compete with the data in each direction Since TCP will attempt to completely fill the data pipeline there is a possibility that there will not be sufficient bandwidth available for the acknowledgements which could drastically reduce the throughput level typically in one direction The Paradise software attempts to prioritise TCP acknowledgements in this situation to prevent this from happening However a better solution is to use the IP traffic shaping feature to guarantee sufficient bandwidth for the acknowledgements 1 32 9 Traffic Shaping Traffic shaping provides greater control over the management of data within the modem Specifically it provides a guaranteed quality of service for defined IP data streams It is aligned with all of the major quality of service schemes and can be used to extend terrestrial services over satellite to create fully provisioned end to end services thereby providing direct support for the implementation of customer service level agreements Key time based performance metrics are gathered continuously by the modem and can be extracted in order to be assimilated into customer quality of service reports A satellite modem in general normally acts as a transparent pipe for data so the data that is finally received at the destination on the terrestrial network at the far end of the lin
118. P packets in point to multipoint systems where there is a direct return path and VLAN tags are not already being used in relation to the data entering the modems from the terrestrial network VLAN ids of remote modems are automatically learnt by the Hub and all traffic destined for a particular remote modem is tagged at the Hub allowing it to filter wanted traffic The VLAN tags are removed by 7 103 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook the modems prior to onward transmission Edit Unit Interface IP Misc Encapsulation Type Screen Options Factory default Description IP encapsulation type MPE New ULE MPE Selects Multi Protocol Encapsulation as the protocol for encapsulating IP packets and Ethernet frames into MPEG2 transport stream packets for transmission over satellite This protocol is widely supported and is therefore useful for interoperability ULE Selects Ultra Lightweight Encapsulation as the protocol for encapsulating IP packets and Ethernet frames into MPEG2 transport stream packets for transmission over satellite This protocol uses less overhead than MPE and should be used in preference if possible PXE Selects proprietary Paradise eXtreme Encapsulation as the protocol for encapsulating IP packets and Ethernet frames into MPEG2 transport stream packets for transmission over satellite This protocol uses considerably less overhead than either MPE or ULE but requires Par
119. Performance Test Conditions FEC Turbo 2048kbps QPSK Tx 140 0000 MHz Rx 140 0000 MHz Scrambling Normal Turbo Input Level 60dBm Rate 7 8 L L L L L L L L LVCL L eoe LLL i it Eb No dB Modem Error Probability versus Eb No for low latency Paradise TPC rate 7 8 13 18 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook BER 1 00E 02 Test Conditions FEC Turbo Rate 2048kHz 8PSK Tx 70 000 MHz Rx 70 000 MHz ieee Scrambling bo 1 00E 04 1 00E 05 1 00E 06 1 00E 07 Rate 3 4 Rate 7 8 Spec Limit Spec Limit 1 00E 08 1 00E 09 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 Modem Error Probability versus Eb No 8PSK Turbo 13 19 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook ee Test Conditions B 1 M931 1 M4 9 9 AA f FEC Turba ED ee ee eee E E O S TT T T OOO Pate mexwz c E E SEPT 160A Ts 70 000 MHz Rx 70000 MHz Scrambling ayaa aft LEE pp Fate 24 I a es ae es a a S E iE nil oa nie L 1L gmt Fg mt fF Modem Error Probability versus Eb No 16QAM Turbo 13 20 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Paradise Turbo Product C
120. SCP Class 0 maps to internal modem QoS Class 0 etc down to DSCP Class 7 which maps to QoS Class 7 Class 7 has the highest priority An example traffic shaping scheme based on DSCP classification is shown below 8 46 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook gt Cliff s Shaping Test Modem 1 10 1 70 1 Windows Internet Explorer ml x ie MY B http 10 1 70 1 sbabusdual php 4 X Live Search Pp V File Edit View Favorites Tools Help vr d Sois Shaping Test Modem 1 10 1 70 1 f E d b Page Tools Ain STATUS EDIT 2 VIEW TEST HELP J LOGOUT SUMMART Interface M amp C b ud Clocks Advanced Upgrade Network Alarms b d Special modes b d Operation QoS ID Cliff s Shaping Test Modem 1 Serial Ma 10802119 Made In control Control Shared Enable shaping v Quality of service scheme Diffserv DSCP ass ClR bps BIR bps Priority UNIT STATUS Class RX TRAFFIC 200000 800000 o E 1 200000 s00000 1 gt TEST MODE 2 100000 1000000 2 3 100000 1000000 3 a 100000 1000000 a 5 100000 1000000 5 6 100000 1000000 6 Help Move the cursor over an item s 7 100000 1000000 Pz label for help Total 1000000 Tx data erum EM 1000000 TX CARRIER n NEN N M 1 32 9 4 3IEEE 802 1p Priority Tag Classification may be done on the 3 bit Priority Code Point field of an IEEE 802 1q VLAN ta
121. Satellite Modems The electrical interface can be selected between RS232 for direct to PC applications and RS485 for multidrop applications The Remote M amp C port may be linked under software control to the Async ESC port for distant end remote M amp C control over satellite Ethernet IP and M amp C Connectors There are two RJ45 auto sensing 10 100Mbps Ethernet connections These support both half duplex and full duplex operation One of these can be switched to the main modem traffic channel for sending and receiving TCP IP data over satellite while the other is for remote M amp C M amp C control can be via the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP an embedded web server that sends web pages to a web browser a Telnet style terminal emulation application or via TCP packets that encapsulate Paradise Universal Protocol PUP commands Although the two connectors are labelled for IP traffic and remote M amp C respectively they are in fact interchangeable since the modem acts as an Ethernet bridge satellite IP traffic and modem M amp C messages can use the same single connector if preferred It is also possible to change the configuration so that the M amp C port is removed from the bridge which may benefit security in some circumstances where it is important to separate the M amp C and IP traffic streams An M amp C IP address subnet mask and default gateway may be set in the modem When using TCP acceleration and the M amp C interfac
122. TE THAT USING IP LOOPED BACK THROUGH THE MODEM 1 20 1 Logging In and Out The philosophy behind user levels login and control of the modem is explained in Section T 1 To connect to the web server from a web browser ensure a suitable Ethernet cable is connected into the Remote M amp C RJ45 socket on the rear of the modem and from the modem front panel enter under Edit Unit M amp C IP Address an IP address and subnet mask that are compatible with your network Then enter the modem s IP address into the web browser address bar The browser will then request as shown below a user name and password with the default modem configuration these are admin or user for view only mode and paradise respectively These details are sent in an encrypted form back to the modem It is recommended that passwords are changed from their default values 7 151 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook The server 10 0 225 57 at Paradise Datacom Lid Restricted Area Login Required requires a username and password W arning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name admin Password sseasene Remember my password Web User Interface Login Screen On successfully logging in the user will be presented with the following screen 7 4 PARADISE DATACOM y QUANTUM SERIES ID Paradise modem Serial No 105
123. Technical Support Customer Technical Support can help with Queries regarding equipment operation The return of equipment for upgrade or repair Customer training Application notes and white papers Contact details in Europe and North America are as follows Teledyne Paradise Datacom Ltd Teledyne Paradise Datacom LLC 2 amp 3 The Matchyns Rivenhall End 328 Innovation Blvd Witham Essex CM8 3HA England State College PA 16803 U S A Tel 44 0 1376 515636 Tel 1 814 238 3450 Fax 44 0 1376 533764 Fax 1 814 238 3829 Worldwide support via email is available by filling in the Technical Support Contact Form on the Support web page at hittp www paradisedata com which will forward your support issues to your local Teledyne Paradise Datacom Technical Support team for your geographic area Repair Return Procedure Please refer to the equipment warranty statement for full details of returning equipment for repair or upgrade In summary 1 Ensure the equipment really does have a fault 2 Write an explicit fault report including what appears to be wrong the circumstances under which it occurs and what other equipment is involved 3 Provide an official Purchase Order to cover the cost of any repairs or sign disclaimer on the Fault Report page 4 Outside of the UK contact either the UK or US Paradise Datacom offices for a Return Material Authorisation RMA number and information on import export procedures The RMA nu
124. The addition of standard IBS framing increases the data rate by exactly 1 15th approx 6 7 IBS framing is added to provide the following extra features compared to closed network links Asynchronous scrambler that replaces the self synchronising V 35 scrambler used in most closed network links The closed network V 35 scrambler outputs 3 errors for every error received and thereby increases the error rate by a factor of 3 The IBS SMS synchronous scrambler does not multiply errors and therefore gives a factor of three BER performance increase over the V 35 scrambler A backward alarm facility that raises a local deferred alarm if the distant end modem cannot receive data transmitted from this station i e there may be a Tx problem at this end of the link gt A low rate oversampled asynchronous ESC channel 1 2000th the data rate that is available on the Aux port of the modem This results in asynchronous rates of less than 110 Baud at greater than 256kbps A TS32 multiframe sequence to allow the transmission of satellite encryption control vectors and three 8 bit carrier IDs referred to as Station Channel and Spare ID gt Overhead channels to convey Channel Associated Signalling CAS corresponding to an extra 2kbps per 64kbps transmitted by use of a separate CAS multiframe sequence in TS16 48 gt Timeslot ID maintenance which maintains the identity of individual data streams when multiplexed together into one aggre
125. Tx This selects the transmit path edit submenu which allows all of the modem Tx properties to be changed Rx This option selects the receive path edit submenu which allows all of the modem Rx properties to be changed Unit This selects the unit edit submenu This allows all of the modem properties that are independent of the Tx and Rx paths to be changed Memories This option selects the configuration memory submenu which allows the modem configuration to be saved or a previous configuration to be recalled Redundancy This contains submenus that control the operation of 1 1 and 1 N redundancy systems 7 15 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 3 1 Edit Tx Menu Ta Service Baseband Clocks Modul ation FEC Scrambler Carrier Interface SERVICE Tx Service BASEBAND Made Data rate Sodio made Advanced Framing Timest ots Overhead CLOCKS Tx path clock source Clock extension MODULATION Modulation FEC Inner FEC type Code rate LI B 57 frame size I B 52 pilots Fastlink optimisation mode Outer RS made Advanced RS n value RS k value AS interleaver depth SCRAMBLER Scrambler mode Scrambler type Wa scrambler type CARRIER Enable Power Frequency Inversion Rall aff dvanced ALIP C Made Method Carrier loss action Target remote Eb Ma Max positive power offset Max negative power offset BUC SHF power offset SHF power units BUC type Control made SH
126. US EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LoGOUT Local SUMMARY ID Paradise modem Serial No 10500355 Mode In control Control Shared UNIT STATUS RX TRAFFIC TX TRAFFIC TEST MODE Click Open to select an upgrade image TX CARRIER Help If the upgrade screen is not displayed on this page then itis because you need to install a Suitable version of the Java Runtime Environment Please lick on the following link for rther information How to install Java Remote Software Upgrade Screen 1 20 12 EZ BERT Option The internal PRBS BER Tester allows pseudo random bit patterns to be injected into the main traffic or overhead channel and the BER results to be monitored Use of the ESC and AUX channels allows continuous real traffic BER performance monitoring whilst the modem carries traffic The front panel PRBS BER tester described in Section 7 3 5 offers a limited set of functionality There is an enhanced PRBS BER Tester available via the web user interface The enhanced BER Tester additionally e Allows PRBS BER data to be generated towards the terrestrial interface allowing the modem to be used as a stand alone PRBS BER tester in place of a Fireberd or similar e Supports an enhanced range of test patterns namely e PRBS 24N 1 where N 6 7 9 11 15 19 20 and 23 e All O s All 1 s e Numerous sparse patterns QRSS and user defined patterns e e Adds an elapsed time indicator error count and an average BER figure as
127. Unit Fault A unit fault exists i e an equipment failure Tx Traffic Prompt Tx traffic fault exists Rx Traffic Prompt Rx traffic fault exists Deferred Alarm One of the following conditions exists e The receive BER is greater than the user defined threshold e The receive Eb No is lower than the user defined threshold e Buffer slips are more frequent than the user set threshold e A backward alarm is being received from either the satellite or terrestrial ports Async ESC Connector This is a 15 pin D female connector When the IDR option is not fitted it provides an RS232 RS422 RS485 asynchronous port for either the high rate Async ESC facility for IBS SMS or Closed Net Plus ESC services or the IBS SMS low rate Intelsat oversampled ESC facility which is configured as the Aux data channel on the modem When the IDR option is fitted separate ports for the ESC and Aux channels on the IDR card are activated and ESC Aux access on this async connector is disabled This connector also provides the input port for an RS422 compatible Station Clock On line LED This LED mirrors the front panel Tx Carrier LED so that from the rear of the equipment the operator can tell if the carrier is off and which unit of a 1 1 pair is the offline unit Terrestrial Interface Connectors There are two terrestrial interface connector positions Supported interface cards include EIA530 LVDS balanced G 703 unbalanced G 703 is provided via a thir
128. VB S2 outbound service combined with an SCPC inbound service Any combination of SCPC and DVB S2 Tx and Rx services are possible including both being SCPC or both being DVB S2 Secondly SCPC features can be overlaid onto DVB S2 space segment to provide all the functionality of traditional SCPC satellite links such as IBS IDR Drop and Insert ESC channel AUPC remote M amp C remote software upgrade etc but with instantly reduced bandwidth requirements This overlay capability is provided by advanced Paradise software technology called SmartLink The Quantum therefore provides a painless migration path to new more efficient satellite communications technology while fully supporting all legacy SCPC requirements Paired Carrier allows space segment reuse It overlays transmit and receive carriers in the same space segment reducing satellite bandwidth requirements by up to 50 It is used in addition to not instead of other bandwidth saving techniques It incorporates ViaSats patented PCMA technology which is protected under U S patent numbers 5 596 439 6 011 952 and 6 725 017 This handbook will guide you through the process of installing and using your Quantum or Evolution Series Satellite Modem It covers all models including IF and L band variants 1 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook The models covered by this handbook are Paradise Datacom Evolution Series PD10 IF Satellite Modems Parad
129. When the 64 bits have been sent one bit at a time over 64 frames the sequence restarts indicating the end of one multiframe and the beginning of the next The 64 bit T9832 multiframe sequence also contains 3 eight bit user fields nominated names of Station ID Channel ID and Spare ID The TS32 multiframe then is 64 x 512 ie 32768 bits long Synchronous IBS Scrambler The synchronous IBS scrambler is restarted at the beginning of every multiframe Note this is not every frame as it requires a reasonable length of the scrambling pattern to be used to ensure the final data appears random The scrambling pattern itself is 2 1 32767 bits long and runs throughout the frame Scrambling is however disabled for TSO amp TS32 otherwise the distant end could never find the frame sync then TS32 multiframe sync in order to find out where the scrambler starts Backward Alarm The backward alarm is a single bit of T9832 which is connected to a summary Rx Fail signal from the demodulator deframer If at either end of the link the Rx path fails for any reason then this backward alarm bit of TS32 is raised on the outgoing Tx signal indicating to the distant end that there is a Rx failure this end This could be caused by any manner of Rx fault LNA downconverter demod at this end but it is a warning that the fault might 8 11 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook equally exist at the Tx end modulator upconverte
130. a BUC This allows remote monitoring and control of any compatible BUC via a modulated FSK signal on the IFL cable to the BUC The card also provides a DC supply switching capability to the BUC If FSK communications are not required then a cheaper option card namely the DC Switch card part number P3509 is available 1 14 Software Options There are a number of software options available as shown in the table below These can be ordered at the time of the original purchase or can be activated in the field The mechanism that provides access to these features is called Software Activated Features SAF the SAF concept including time limited free access to all features is explained in Section 8 5 In the table the SAF Code column lists the acronyms by which each feature is referred to in relation to the modem user interfaces technical datasheets etc Note that the following are provided as standard in the modem Tx Rx DRO DR1 IRS VIT WIF AUPC HCP and ESC Feature SAFCode Description Controls access to the Tx service required for any transmission to occur Controls access to the Rx service required for any receive processing to occur ugue we RRA ma to 2048kbps ECC Deprecated Enables data rates in the given 2048kbps to 10Mbps range inclusive Terrestrial data rate Enables data rates in the given range inclusive 2048kbps to 5Mbps oMbps to 10Mbps 10Mbps to 16896kbps 16896kbps to 25Mbps
131. ables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate 15Mbps to range inclusive 20Mbps Paired Carrier ss PCMH Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate 20Mbps range inclusive 25Mbps Paired Carrier s PCMI Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate 25Mbps range inclusive 30Mbps Paired Carrier is PCMJ Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate 30Mbps range inclusive 40Mbps Paired Carrier es PCMK Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate 40Mbps range inclusive 50Mbps Paired Carrier ies PCML Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate o0Mbps range inclusive 60Mbps Paired Carrier aps PCMM Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate 60Mbps range inclusive 80Mbps Software Activated Features continued 6 10 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Featre SAF Code Paired Carrier data Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given rate 80Mbps to range inclusive Subject to a maximum of 100Mbps 36MHz of signal cancellation in terms of occupied bandwidth Paired Carrier data PCMO Reserved for future use rate 100Mbps to 195Mbps bee V Enables FastLink low latency LDPC data rates in rate 4 8kbps to 1Mbps the given range inclusive pe o Enables FastLink low latency LDPC data rates in rate 1Mbps to 2 5Mbps the given range inclusive Enables FastLink low latency LDPC data rates in rate 2 SMbps to 5Mbps the
132. ables accelerated browsing using HTTP lll kell requires the modem to be fitted with a P3714 IP traffic card EN BINE abii 2Mbps Wideband L band Deprecated since now provided as standard Enables selection of additional L band frequencies between 1950MHz and 2050MHz IP terrestrial Enables IP Terrestrial base modem interface for Md PD10 PD10L modem enabled by default in all other modems Clock extension When enabled provides a high stability timing reference to the distant end of a satellite link potential replacement for GPS LDPC FEC LDP5 Deprecated replaced by FastLink LDPC Enables conventional LDPC FEC scheme to a maximum data rate of 5Mbps LDPC FEC LDP10 Deprecated replaced by FastLink LDPC Enables conventional LDPC FEC scheme to a maximum data rate of 10Mbps band FEC LDP25 Deprecated replaced by FastLink LDPC Enables conventional LDPC FEC scheme to a maximum data rate of 25Mbps EM FEC LDP55 Deprecated replaced by FastLink LDPC Enables conventional LDPC FEC scheme to a maximum data rate of 55Mbps Evolution PD55 or 60Mbps Quantum PD60 Adaptive signal pre Allows 16QAM constellations to be adaptively distorter predistorted to counter the effects of nonlinear distortion in the communications path Dynamic routing RTG Enables choice of RIP OSPF and BGP dynamic routing Static routing provided as standard DVB S2 Tx DVB2T Enables DVB S2 Tx operation includes SmartLink DVB p Rx DVB2R
133. ace Toggle Switch 1 20 17 Adaptive Signal Pre distorter This feature which is controled from the web user interface enables 16QAM constellations to be adaptively predistorted to counter the effects of AM AM and AM PM nonlinear distortion in the communications path i e transponder and or HPA Predistortion has two major advantages e It allows 16QAM to be used in some links where only QPSK or 8PSK was feasible before thereby saving bandwidth e It allows the back off level of the uplink HPA to be reduced thereby liberating more power into the uplink or alternatively allowing a lower power HPA to be used 7 178 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook The predistorter is adaptive i e no prior knowledge of the nonlinearity is required The transmit constellation is adaptively tuned to optimize the Rx constellation The predistorter operates in a closed loop that contains the nonlinear amplifier s to be compensated For example the loop could be closed around the up link HPA by feeding the down converted HPA signal back into the modem s demodulator UPCONVERT HPA COUPLER IN Short Loop Closed Around the HPA Alternatively for some applications it may be feasible to simply demodulate the received satellite signal thereby allowing ground and space segment nonlinearities to be out tuned Since the predistorter only has visibility of its own transmit and receive UPCONVERT e S
134. ackets acceleration of TCP packets and header compression Remote TCP Acceleration This mode supports point to multipoint TCP acceleration The remote modems should be set to this mode and VLAN filtering should also be enabled Hub TCP Acceleration This mode supports point to multipoint TCP acceleration The hub Tx modem should be set to this mode and VLAN filtering should also be enabled on this modem Note that hub Rx only modems in a point to multipoint TCP acceleration system should be set to Hub mode not Hub TCP Acceleration and that the Rx only modems should have VLAN filtering disabled Hub Header Compression This implements point to multipoint header compression The hub Tx modem should be set to this mode and VLAN filtering should also be enabled on this modem Note that hub Rx only modems in a point to multipoint header compression system should be set to Hub Ethernet Header Compression mode not Hub Header Compression and that the Rx only modems should have VLAN filtering disabled Remote Header Compression This mode supports point to multipoint header compression The remote modems should be set to this mode and VLAN filtering should also be enabled 7 93 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Factory default Description Hub TCP acceleration Header Compression This implements point to multipoint TCP acceleration and header compression The hub Tx modem sho
135. adise modems to be used at both ends of the link It is always used automatically when SmartLink which is also proprietary is operational MPE Sets the protocol to be used when encapsulating IP packets and Ethernet frames into MPEG2 transport packets for transmission over satellite when using DVB S2 DVB S2 satellite frames do not directly support the transmission of IP but they do support the transmission of MPEG2 packets IP packets are of potentially varying sizes and therefore when placing these into fixed 188 byte MPEG2 packets a protocol is required to deal with the issues of packet fragmentation and padding as well as of protocol identification IPV4 IPV6 Ethernet frames etc 7 104 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface IP Misc MPE MAC Address Screen Factory default Description MPE MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 New 00 11 29 00 F0 23 0 0 0 0 This is used for receive filtering of MPE packets Note that this can be a virtual MAC address and does not need to be the actual address of the receiver s IP port the receiver will simply match whatever MAC it is set to filter on There is currently no modulator equivalent support to allow a MAC address to be added to MPE packets as it is assumed the packets are being generated by a non Paradise modulator a Paradise modulator will always set the MPE MAC address to all zeros or the modulators MAC address de
136. ae eae EE 8 27 1 31 Tutorial on Carrier Noise and Eb No Measurements enn 8 29 Toz IR Funciona NEN T IE 8 35 1 32 1 bass Modem ae ee ane een ee nn oc MIU PUER AL II LUUD LEM 8 35 je 207 am IPAddress e eee eee 8 36 1 32 35 TAPOUGADUL PEMONnMANGe t Ere e Deren eee 8 37 1 32 4 Jumbo Ethernet Frame Support ccc cccccecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeteneeseees 8 38 Too22r IPO 3 Gal cls una amen ch eee Ae Meee ee D hd ee oe ee Ne ee ee ee 8 38 pao 740 6 aM JEInterobDerdpillti ei iode qadetadeel aqoa ores E et ae ee ae ee eee eee 8 39 327 IPGoonnec vib MIOdGS uico ici niece RU ANE 8 39 t320 OP ACCCIGTATION s222999929 0200 0 292290 59399 9295200920992 28 499595999052 009 822 8 42 1 32 9 Traffic Shaping esiisa a aaa a nennen nennen nnne nnns 8 43 1 32 10 HTTP Web AceeleratlOD ssiiinits icccccccacencateancnenencteneeesedeemidetameunsvaneeedeadecwewe 8 49 1 32 11 Static and Dynamic Routing cece a 8 50 1 32 12 Header COMPNES SION sass cecaccsadaGataceiacedacnss aaa aaa aaa aaa aai 8 50 1 32 13 VEAN Operaio soo tici EC Ute Nd bebes 8 51 1 32 14 Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 52 1 99 IDVB 52 and Shiai link oodd e vov Dre wwe cua Ce e De WERE Deve edet Ped edet 8 55 uod IRIEN IItlelb Bere Remeron ended cM OCDE SIM MEC PU DEMANDES 8 58 ToS dizi 8 62 1236 FesibiDk Eowslatency LDPC neredir 8 65 1 37 LinkGuard Interference Detection
137. ained in Section 7 4 3 Getting started is covered in more detail in the separate Evolution Quantum modem Quick Start Guide application note EVO AN 009 5 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter6 Introduction 1 12 Overview The Quantum and Evolution Series Single Channel Per Carrier SCPC satellite modems are designed for both open and closed network operation in a variety of environments such as ground stations and mobile and fly away terminals providing a data link between geographically distant sites via satellite Features include e Open network Intelsat IBS to IESS 309 and IESS 310 and Intelsat IDR to IESS 308 and IESS 310 plus Eutelsat SMS to EESS 501 Closed network modes e DVB S2 EN 302 307 operation Quantum only including Variable Coding and Modulation VCM and Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM modes e Drop and Insert D amp I via T1 D4 T1 ESF and G 732 bearer types e IF frequency range of 50 to 90MHz and 100 to 180MHz L band frequency range of 950MHz to 2050MHz e Variable data rate between 4 8kbps and 100Mbps model specific e Support for BPSK QPSK Offset QPSK 8PSK 8QAM 16QAM 16APSK 32APSK and 64QAM modulation schemes e Forward Error Correction FEC options of Viterbi Sequential Trellis Coded Modulation TCM Turbo Product Code TPC and FastLink low latency Low Density Parity Code LDPC as well as DVB S2 model specific e Concatenated Reed Solo
138. al inversion clocking and timeslots as well as parameters that have no Tx equivalent such as buffer size and sweep control This feature can be used to simplify the configuration for duplex links When switched off the Rx configuration retains its values and does not return to the values prior to tracking being switched on 7 82 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 3 3 Edit Unit Menu UNIT Identity Interface MZC Clocks User Time Advanced INTERFACE Terrestrial Terrestrial interface type Tx baseband mode Rx baseband mode Gr 3 rate GOS line format GOS line encoding GOS line length IP made Ethernet traffic mode Bridge M amp C port IP vade IP made Ethernet traffic mode Bridge M amp C port TCF acceleration Satellite delay TCP acceleration Payload compression Web acceleration OWS address Tx ACM mode Ex Ahi mode Address IF traffic part IF address IP traffic part IP subnet IP traffic part IP gateway Satellite traffic part IP address Satellite port IP subnet Satellite port IP gateway hzc WLAN enable WLAN id OVE S2 IP encapsulation type MPE air MAC address DVE S2 FIO filter Modem duplex IP card duplex speed Weiahted Gas IPA IPG address selection Cisca HOLC Quad El Quad E1 timeslot set up per part MZC Modem control Remote admin password Remote wiew only user password B rta lagout period Remote serialinterface mode Remote serial interface baud rate Re
139. al IPVA IPV6 operation Support for IPV6 includes bridging routing and embedded web server along with entry display of IPV6 addresses on user interface 6 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 13 Hardware Options Note that an EIA530 card providing selectable RS422 X 21 V 35 and RS232 interfaces via a 25 way D connector is fitted as standard Three interface positions are available The upper interface position 1 supports an EIA530 or an IDR card only The lower interface position 2 supports any card except IDR Interface position 3 supports unbalanced G 703 two BNCs only Balanced G 703 is available via the EIA530 card in either interface position 1 or position 2 1 13 1 IDR Option Card The IDR option card part number P3701 provides an IDR capability including two 32kbps ADPCM ESC audio channels multiple backward alarm support and independent ESC and Auxiliary ports that replace the shared ESC Aux port on the base unit The IDR card fits in interface position 1 upper at the rear of the modem 1 13 2 G 703 Option Card The G 703 option card part number P3702 provides G 703 E1 T1 E2 T2 and ES T3 support The G 703 card fits inside the modem leaving both interface positions 1 and 2 free and makes use of either the EIA530 connector in interface position 1 or 2 for balanced signals or BNC connectors interface position 3 for unbalanced signals 1 13 3 LVDS Option Card The LVDS optio
140. al timeslot from which the Tx data was dropped Without Partial Insert if each Rx modem inserts a the received data 18 timeslots onto the T1 bearer then the second Rx modem could just about insert its 18 timeslots without 0 22 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook stamping on the 6 timeslots for this destination from the first Rx modem However Rx modem 3 still has 18 timeslots to insert but 12 of the timeslots on the T1 bearer now contain receive information from Rx modems 1 and 2 and so Rx modem 3 cannot insert all its data without losing data from another destination The traditional alternative without Partial Insert is to use separate bearers for each Rx modem and a DACCS to sort our the data but it is lower cost and less equipment to configure and maintain if the DACCS is not required at all Partial Insert becomes mandatory for multi destinational working when the total receive data at any one destination exceeds the capacity of the PCM bearers Note that the modem can provide multi destinational operation at aggregate carrier rates below 1544 kbps using the IBS overhead but with four backward alarms This means that multidestinational working down to 64kbps between nodes become practical i e it does not require the 96kbps IDR overhead on the links to get multidestinational backward alarm facilities 1 28 Choosing Optimum Custom Reed Solomon Values Complete variable code rate Reed Solomon is a
141. alarm 1 abcd normal 2 abcd AIS 3 b 1 4 a 1 b 1 Options Signalling bits abcd normal Signalling bits abcd AIS Signalling bit b 1 acd normal Signalling bits ab 1 cd normal Factory default Signalling bits abcd normal Description Determines actions to be taken with respect to Rx CAS signalling block code 7 60 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Timeslots Menu Timeslots 1 Number used 2 Timeslots 3 Maintain ID 4 Partial 5 Partial TS This menu contains the following options e Number used This indicates the number of timeslots sent over the satellite e imeslots This option is used to select which timeslots are inserted e Maintain ID This controls whether timeslot identity has been maintained over satellite i e whether the timeslots represent different data streams or are all part of the same stream e Partial This controls whether part or all of the received data is to be inserted into the terrestrial bearer e Partial TS When Partial Insert is active this controls which timeslots from the satellite are inserted into the terrestrial bearer Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Timeslots Number Used Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Timeslots Timeslots Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Timeslots Maintain ID Screen See the description of the tra
142. an those caused by the outage 7 65 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 3 2 5 Edit Rx Demodulation Menu 1 Mode 2 Sweep 3 Sweep width 4 Advanced This menu contains the following options Mode This selects the receive path modulation scheme Sweep This controls the Rx signal sweep configuration Sweep width This controls the Rx signal sweep width Advanced This controls an Rx adaptive equalizer for the FastLink FEC which compensates for transponder group delay It also controls a holdoff time for demodulator loss of lock used to prevent spurious loss of lock being reported when the Rx antenna is briefly obscured Edit Rx Demodulation Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent The table shown under Edit Tx FEC Inner defines normal operation with respect to FEC mode FEC rate and modulation scheme 7 66 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Rx Demodulation Sweep Screen Options Factory default Description Sweep mode Normal 1 Normal 32kHz 2 Other Normal In this mode the sweep width is controlled automatically by the modem The width is always set to 32kHz by the modem Other This mode allows the user to set the sweep width in order to compensate for carrier frequency uncertainty due to Tx frequency satellite and Rx frequency conversions This may be required to optimize performance at very low
143. anced RS n value RS k value RS interleaver depth DESCRAMBELER Serambler mode Serambler type Wa scrambler type CARRIER Frequency Inversion Roll off Advanced LHE LNE type SHF frequency offset OC voltage control 1 MHz reference control 1 1 LHE services control PCMA Enable Round trip delay Ra T High rate ESC usage Max ESC rate ESC interface baud rate ESC interface character length ESC interface parity IES overhead allocation to Sux channel ESC interface electrical type Bux interface electrical type ESC level chi ESC level che Backward alarm control IDR IDR 8k ESC made ESC interface baud rate ESC interface character length ESC interface parity ESC interface electrical type IDR ESC audio encoding IDR overhead assignment to Ax channel Suis interface electrical type ESC level ch ESC level ch2 Backward alarm control Front Panel Edit Rx Menus 7 57 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 Service 2 Baseband 3 Clocks 4 Demodulate 5 FEC 6 Descrambler 7 Carrier 8 Rx Tx This menu contains the following options e Service This option allows the selection of the framing mode for the modem e Baseband This option leads to a submenu that allows terrestrial framing timeslots and overhead to be configured e Clocks This allows the receive path clock to be set up e Demodulate This leads to a submenu that allows the demodulation scheme to be configured e FEC This leads to a
144. and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook The following table specifies Paradise BUC PSUS for a range of available BUC types PSU Required Paradise ODU PSU Manufacturer amp BUC Type Voltage Wattage Current 24V 48V 24V 120 5A P3536 48V 120 2 5A P3535 24V 144 6A P3536 48V 144 3A 24V 173 P3536 48V 173 24V 100W P3532 48V 96W 24V 149W P3536 48V 144W 24V 48V 192 24V 72 48V 72 24V 48V 96 24V 72 48V 72 24V 48V NJR 1W C band 5665 amp 5666 24V NJR 2W C band 5667 amp 5668 24V NJR 5W C band 5669 amp 5670 24V NJR 10W C band 5662 amp 5663 a 48V NJR 1W Ku band 5015 24V NJR 1W Ku band 5075 24V NJR 1 5W Ku band 5035 24V NJR 2W Ku band 5076 amp 5016 24V NJR 3W Ku band 5037 24V NJR 4W Ku band 5077 amp 5017 24V 24V 48V 24V 48V Codan 10W C band 6710 48V Codan 20W C band 6720 48V Codan 4W Ku band 6904 vid 48V Codan 8W Ku band 6908 48V Paradise 10W C band VSAT BUC Paradise 20W C band VSAT BUC Paradise 25W C band vBUC Paradise 10W X band vBUC Paradise 10W Ku band vBUC Paradise 10W Ka band vBUC Terrasat 5W C band IBUC Terrasat 10W C band IBUC Terrasat AW Ku band IBUC Terrasat 8W Ku band IBUC NJR 8W Ku band 5018 Codan 5W C band 6705 Paradise BUC Power Supplies Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 13 9 L band FSK DC Option Card An FSK DC option card part number P3503 is available for performing FSK communications with
145. and Operating Handbook Constellation e Series1 Example Constellation Graph Within Microsoft Excel It is also possible to use the email feature to request technical support On the web user interface select the View tab followed by Support The support configuration screen is shown over the page Complete the contact details and type your request and send the email The email is automatically sent to Paradise Datacom s technical support team Note that the SMTP email server address has to be entered on the email configuration screen for this function to work 7 174 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 4 PARADISE DATACOM IY QUANTUM SERIES STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT ID Paradise modem Serial No 10500006 Mode In control Control Shared UNIT STATUS RX TRAFFIC TX TRAFFIC TEST MODE TX CARRIER Paradise Datacom Customer Technical Support Enquiry Screen 1 20 14 IP Static Routes If you wish to work with more than one subnet the web user interface allows up to 64 static routes to be added The static route configuration screen found under the Edit Unit Network menu tab is shown over the page 7 175 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook PARADISE DATACOM QUANTUM SERIES a STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LoGOUT Local SUMMARY Memory Identity Interface h dl M amp C Advanced MisT
146. and jitter In the situation where the transmit modem has several packets in its input buffer waiting for transmission over satellite then the packets will be sent based on their priority with the highest priority being sent first Packets are buffered up to a limit after which packets may be dropped The priority value ranges from zero to seven with zero being the highest priority note that this is the opposite order of prioritization to IEEE 802 1p priority tagging A default data stream exists for any packets not explicitly part of a defined data stream These get assigned the lowest available priority namely seven 1 32 9 4 Stream Classification How does the modem know which packets belong to which streams Streams can be classified using one of the four methods described in the following sections These can be selected using the Quality of service scheme dropdown control on the web user interface The result is that each incoming packet is assigned to one of a number of QoS Classes Data will be classified as belonging to the first class in the list for which a match is found starting from the top If no match is found then the packet is assigned a default class that corresponds to a priority level of 0 The default data stream gets a BIR value of the maximum transmit data rate of the modem 1 32 9 4 11P Address It is possible to classify a data stream based on either the source and or the destination address in the IP packet as wel
147. antum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Factory default Description FastLink Requires one or more of the FastLink data rate SAFs This enables Paradise s FastLink low latency LDPC FastLink gives BER performance approaching that of conventional LDPC but with latency nearer to that of TPC In addition FastLink supports modes that optimize either BER performance or latency even further giving the flexibility to match FEC performance more closely to the constraints of the satellite application In many if not all applications FastLink should be able to replace TPC or conventional LDPC Note that FastLink does not suffer from the error floor flaring problem of earlier generation LDPC FECs and consequently does not require the use of any outer codec to enhance performance Viterbi Controls the inner FEC mode Note that the FEC off option is no longer available through this menu and has been moved to the Edit Unit Advanced Special Modes menu Edit Tx FEC Inner Rate Screen Options FEC code rate 75 3 4 de facto New 75 3 4 de facto 1 4 DVB S2 SmartLink only 0 312 5 16 TPC only 1 3 DVB S2 SmartLink only 2 5 DVB S2 SmartLink only 0 477 21 44 7 29 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook TPC only 0 493 1 2 Paradise TPC only 1 2 Viterbi Sequential DVB S2 SmartLink only 3 5 DVB S2 SmartLink only 2 3 TCM o
148. arning if it is The threshold can be set via the Edit Unit Advanced Alarms Thresholds LinkGuard Threshold screen BER Controls whether the BER threshold alarm is enabled BUC PSU Controls whether the combined over under current over temperature alarm for the Tx DC switch is considered a fault or not Handshaking Controls the action taken when a terrestrial handshake signal is activated It can be ignored or set to raise an alarm Clr 1 1 Alm Allows the user to temporarily clear a modem alarm that is preventing a 1 1 changeover Edit Unit Advanced Alarms Thresholds LinkGuard Threshold Monitoring Screen LinkGuard threshold monitoring Off 1 Off 2 On Factory default Off Description Controls regular monitoring of the signal under the received carrier for a level of interference that exceeds the set power spectral density threshold If the threshold is exceeded then an Rx traffic warning alarm is raised Once enabled the monitoring is continuous and 7 130 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook does not rely on the LinkGuard signal under carrier web graph being viewed Note that the monitoring process may slow the processor down See Section 8 17 for more information on LinkGuard Edit Unit Advanced Special Modes FEC Off Option Factory default On Description Allows the user to disable the inner FEC Under all normal operating conditions a FEC must be enabled If the FEC is sw
149. ata streams comprise of 64kbps data channels from N timeslots of terrestrial PCM bearers interfaced to the IBS SMS framing via the Drop Insert multiplexer Operating over satellite without TS ID maintenance is comparable to using an external Drop Insert mux interfaced in our 2 x 64kbps example to the modem at 128kbps Once demultiplexed to 128kbps the start and end boundaries of each timeslot are lost in the continuous 128kbps data stream Without the TS ID maintenance there would be 16 different ways 2 x 8 bits per TS that the two data streams could be inserted back into the terrestrial PCM bearer timeslots at the receive end One correct way one with channels reversed 8 bits shifted and 14 ways shifts of 1 7 8 15 bits in which parts of each channel appeared in the channel Without TS ID maintenance then Drop Insert can only useful if all the data dropped inserted comprises one single data stream of N x 64kbps from a single source Note Typically D I is tested with a PRBS from a Firebird in all relevant timeslots this is a guaranteed way to NOT TEST TS ID Maintenance as it is not required for such a test because all the data comprises one single data stream from a single source the PRBS generator Instead to verify TS ID maintenance insert the PRBS into any subset of the dropped timeslots eg just one If the Timeslot ID is not maintained you are likely to get something else back in the equivalent receive timeslot instead of th
150. ate Vit TCM Turbo No FEC decoder output rate Mo composite information rate 2 Calculate ratio of Carrier power Each symbol represents several FEC decoder reduces data rate RS decoder reduces data Bandwidth change due to Noise power transmitted bits depending on amp corrects errors Data rate reduced rate amp corrects errors Data framing is ignored in the modulation by FEC code rate rate reduced by RS code rate INTELSAT definition of i k Eb No as Eb refers to the BPSK Transmitted bit symbol 1 2 Rate 1 Decoded bit 2 transmitted bits Code rate n expressed as n k t composite data rate to PSK OOPSK 2 Transmitted bit symbol 3 4 Rate 3 Decoded bits 4 transmitted bits 126 112 7 112 Information bits 126 Decoded 8PSK 3 Transmitted bit symbol 7 8 Rate 7 Decoded bits 8 transmitted bits 219 201 9 201 Information bits 219 Decoded 160AM 4 Transmitted bit symbol 2 3 Rate 2 Decoded bits 3 transmitted bits 225 205 10 205 Information bits 225 Decoded Carrier power Moise power C NIN S dB 10Log m 10 10 1 4 5 WI Es Et Et Epec Epec Eb Ne 10 Log Bits Symbol No Na 10 Log FEC Code Rate No Na 10 Log RS Code Rate No 3 Determine Es No BPSK 0dB 1 2 Rate 3dB 126 112 7 0 51 dB Es Energy per symbol_ _ C QPSK OQPSK 8dB 3 4 Rate 41 25 dB 219 201 9 0 37 dB Mo Noise power density WN a8PSK 24 77 dB 7 8 Rate 0 58 dB 225 205 10 0 40 dB 16Q0HM
151. ation The standard modem interfaces do not require hardware changes for 1 1 redundancy operation However the G 703 option interface needs to be configured by the front panel for 1 1 mode Normal or 1 1 The 1 1 G 703 mode control selects what happens when power is removed If the power is lost in Normal mode the G 703 input and output are joined so that if in Drop Insert operation the G 703 signal is looped through multiple equipments the other traffic is not affected by a break in the G 703 line If the power is lost in 7 7 mode the G 703 output goes high impedance if power is lost allowing its 1 1 partner to carry the traffic Y cables are normally used with the terrestrial interfaces The IP interface requires separate but parallel connections to the network using cross over IP cables If using an IP traffic interface card then either cable type will suffice as the card is autosensing If the Modems M amp C ports are removed from the Ethernet Bridge then connect the IP data cables to the IP traffic port If using an IP traffic interface card connect the IP cables to either port on the interface card Please note The 1 1 controller cable must be of type P3480 Please see the diagram over the page 10 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook IP 1 1 Modem Redundancy Connection Schematic TX IF L BAND MODEM A COMBINER IP TRAFFIC 3 TO UPCHAIN dita Data Switch 1 1 CONTROL CABLE FROM
152. ation working lower into the noise SmartLink is described in more detail in Section 8 13 However the DVB S2 standard does not directly support various features traditionally used in SCPC links such as Drop and Insert ESC channel remote M amp C control AUPC IDR audio channels etc SmartLink allows ALL modem features that rely on SCPC framing including IBS SMS IDR Closed Network plus ESC etc to be used in conjunction with DVB S2 allowing legacy SCPC applications to immediately benefit from bandwidth savings and the increased robustentess of DVB S2 while providing exactly the same services as before If DVB S2 is required but no SCPC features are required then as well as selecting SmartLink the Tx or Rx service should be set to Closed network as this does not add any extra framing to that provided by DVB S2 bypassing the framer in the diagram in Section 8 13 Note that SmartLink allows any terrestrial interface to be used with DVB S2 Using SmartLink in Closed network mode does not add any overhead beyond that of DVB S2 This therefore allows pure DVB S2 G 703 operation serial interface operation etc bringing the full efficiency benefits of DVB S2 to all terrestrial data types not just packet based interfaces Once SmartLink has been selected various other DVB S2 configuration menu options become available including choice of modulation and FEC rate as well as DVB S2 FEC frame size choice and DVB S2 pilots 7 28 Qu
153. ation to achieve specific ESC rates with specific overheads then the following sections may be useful 1 30 1 IBS For Standard IBS the exact maximum continuous rate is 8 26 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Baud Rate Main data rate 15 x O H bits allocated 32 x Bauds per Character 9 where Main data rate The main modem data rate eg 64000bps 15 gives total overhead O H bits allocated The number of bits of the overhead allocated to the ESC for example if the ESC is set in P230 mode then 20 bits TS16 bits 1 8 TS48 bits 1 8 amp TS32 bits 4 8 are available 32 give the proportion of the overhead allocated to the ESC Bauds per Character The number of Baud periods per character eg for async character format 8 N there are 10 Baud periods per character start 8 data bits stop 9 as 9 synchronous bits are always used for each character Note that if the CAS Multiframe is active to transfer G 732 CAS then TS16 and TS48 are not available Note also that is the CAS Multiframe is active without CAS i e to maintain the timeslot ID for an Odd value of N or if RBS signalling is active then only 7 out of 8 of every TS16 are available for ESC as TS16 has to carry the CAS MF unique word or pack byte every 8th frame In this case simply consider TS16 as providing 7 bits of overhead not 8 For Custom IBS modes this is unchanged unless Minimum Overhead mode is selected in
154. ations that are not on the local subnet Typically this is the address of a router that has been set up to forward packets to the correct network The bridge has to learn what devices are on which network segment in order to avoid creating bridging loops where Ethernet frames circulate endlessly using up valuable bandwidth The bridge therefore maintains information on how to forward frames based on replies that are received from each device The M amp C port can be taken out of the bridge via the Bridge M amp C port menu option in which case each port has its own IP address If the modem has an IP traffic card fitted then 8 35 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook the IP traffic port of the base modem is replaced by the ports on the IP traffic card see picture below ETHERNET IP1 10 100 1000 IP2 IP Traffic Card Dual 10 100 1000 Base T Ethernet Ports 1 32 2 IP Addressing The two ports on the IP card are bridged together acting as a two port switch This is true regardless of what bridging or routing mode is selected In bridging mode IP addresses are not used so there is no restriction on what subnets are off the two traffic card ports In routing mode since the IP traffic card has a single address covering both ports there can only ever be one direct subnet off the two ports e With an IP card fitted and the base modem M amp C port out of the bridge then the base modem IP traffic port i
155. b No range 0 15dB 0 2dB Measured Frequency Offset 100Hz resolution Wanted signal level strength indicator centred on the middle of the Rx Input range AGC Output ue direct AGC output for antenna tracking 1 48 Clocking and Buffering Specifications Receive Filtering Performance Monitoring Frequency Locked Loops give phase hit immune Clock Integrity operation even with poor clock sources such as routers etc internal Standard options accuracy depends on reference fitted 1ppm to 1ppb Tx Clocking Tracking range 100ppm min Rx Clock Slaves Tx timing from Rx clock Includes full asymmetric operation Disable clock Includes full asymmetric operation Accuracy depends on reference fitted 1ppm standard options to 1ppb External timing clock DTE interface only Station Reference see below 75Q BNC female Station Clock Connector transformer isolated 1MHz to 10MHz in 1kHz steps accepts sinusoidal 20dBm or square wave e g G 703 para 10 13 4 Rx Clocking Internal Station Reference Inputs Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1kHz steps via Async ESC connector NB When set to 10MHZ the station reference may replace internal reference to all internal circuitry and reference outputs on the IF ports The unit automatically switches back to internal reference if the station reference fails Selectable in 1ms increments from Oms to 99ms at data rates up to 42Mbps and
156. backward alarms are not normally energised and fall back to the Normal state when modem power is removed The modem deferred alarm acts as a summary backward alarm and activates when any backward alarm is received this does fall back to the Fail state when power is removed Backward alarm inputs float to the Good state high 5 V and indicate Fail when connected to OV The Rx summary fault is an open collector output OV Fail open collector OK From the front panel the backward alarm inputs BA x can be set as follows E Ext A Auto Rx fail OZOK Menu Opt BA 1 BA 2 BA 3 BA 4 Mode 1 EEEE Ext patch Ext patch Ext patch Ext patch Mode2 AEEE Rx Fail Ext patch Ext patch Ext patch Mode 3 AOOO Rx Fail Good Good Good Mode 4 AAAA Rx Fail Rx Fail Rx Fail Rx Fail If external patching is required connect the Rx summary fault to the required BA input and any other modem fail outputs to the appropriate other BA inputs Leave unused inputs floating In IDR modes these are used for the 4 standard IDR backward alarms 11 9 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook In IBS modes BA 1 indicates the normal single IBS backward alarm status mirrored by the unit deferred alarm For multidestinational BS carriers it is possible to operate the modem in IBS mode but use 4 separate backward alarms as per IDR From the front panel select Service as Other based on IBS and follow the screen prompts 11 10
157. bps and IBS SMS V 35 This self synchronizing scrambler will multiply the errors degrading performance Turbo Only available in when the TPC FEC is selected OM 73 Intelsat Reed Solomon Only available when the Reed Solomon FEC is selected V 35 Controls the type of scrambler to apply Only available when scrambler selection is set to Other Edit Tx Scrambler Type V 35 Screen Options V 35 scrambler type Intelsat normal New Intelsat normal Intelsat normal 1 41 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Fairchild Linkabit CCITT Factory default ntelsat normal Description Controls the particular type of scrambler to apply when V 35 scrambling is enabled Only available when scrambler selection is set to Other 1 19 3 1 7 Edit Tx Carrier Menu Carrier 1 Enable 2 Power 3 Frequency 4 Inversion 5 Roll off 6 Advanced This menu has the following options Enable This controls the carrier on off Power This option controls the IF output power level Frequency This sets the IF frequency used to transmit to the satellite Inversion This controls whether the and Q channel outputs are swapped to give Spectrum Inversion Roll off This controls the slope gradient of the carrier at its edges and therefore controls the occupied bandwidth Advanced This submenu provides AUPC Automatic Up link Power Control BUC Type selection and BUC control
158. but should not be used over a live satellite link without the operator s permission Test Modulator RF Alternate 1 0 Screen Modulator alternate 1 0 Off 1 Off 2 On 7 148 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Factory default Off Description Selecting Tx alt 1 0 causes an alternating 1 0 1 0 pattern to be fed to the modulator at the symbol rate This causes two discrete frequencies to be generated spaced at the symbol rate about the suppressed carrier This is useful for evaluating the carrier suppression of the modulator but should not be used over a live satellite link Test Wide Spectrum Screen Enable wide spectral graph Off 1 Off 2 On Factory default Off Description Selecting the wide spectral graph prevents the Demod from locking and is therefore implemented as a test mode At four times the symbol rate it allows viewing of a wider frequency range than the standard modem web spectral graph Note a superwide graph showing 50MHz of spectrum which does not prevent the Demod from locking Test IDR Screen Options 1 Tx tone on 2 Tx tone off 3 Rx tone on 4 Rx tone off TX tone on Rx tone on Tx tone off Rx tone off Factory default Description Tx tone off Hx tone off Selecting IDR 7x tone on enables a 1KHz OdBm level tone to be generated towards the satellite in both audio channels 7 149 Quantum and Evolution Series Installat
159. can be adjusted off line by setting the modem to CW Use a calibrated spectrum analyser set to count mode or frequency counter and adjust the modem output for exactly 10MHz 1 19 3 5 Edit Memories Menu Memories 1 Store 2 Recall 3 Erase This menu contains the following options e Store This allows the current M amp C configuration to be stored to a named configuration memory for later use Up to 20 configuration memories can be created more may be stored if memory allows The memories are non volatile and will persist between successive power ups of the modem Configuration memories can be assigned any desired name using the alphanumeric keypad e Recall This allows a previously stored configuration to be selected and used in place of the current configuration e Erase This option allows configuration memories to be deleted Note that one configuration memory namely LOAD DEFAULTS always exists When this is recalled then it has the effect of setting the modem back to the factory defaults Although the LOAD DEFAULTS memory also appears under Store and Erase these operations have no effect on this particular configuration memory Note that there are restrictions on what characters can be included in the configuration memory names Only the letters of the alphabet and numerals should be used 7 137 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 3 6 Edit Redundancy Menu Redundancy 1 1 for 1 2
160. ccelerates web browsing by prefetching web page inline objects prior to them being requested by the web browser This feature requires the modem to be fitted with an IP traffic card It also requires a DNS IP address to be set Web pages comprise multiple objects which are typically fetched one or two at a time by a web browser without web acceleration and therefore a full webpage can take many times the satellite delay to be displayed The Paradise web proxy examines webpage frames as they pass through the modem and pre fetches all of the content before it is requested It is therefore typically available in cache memory at the modem local to the web browser prior to the browser actually requesting the remaining content The Bridge Filtering option forms part of the Brouting traffic mode and controls whether the Ethernet bridge filters out all the traffic other than that destined for the local sub net If this option is switched off then it is typically the responsibility of a router on the local network to filter out unwanted traffic The One for one mode option is applicable only to the G 703 interface Normally the G 703 input is looped by a relay if power is removed This is to ensure that any other traffic on the G 703 PCM bearer is not lost by a break in the bearer However when one for one mode is selected the G 703 output goes high impedance if power is removed allowing the units 1 1 partner to carry the traffic 1 20 5 Timeslots Timesl
161. ceeeseeeseeceeeseeeseeeeeeseeeseesseeseeeseeseeees 3 1 1 7 NS FAN ATIOM oe tice cic cies cece tet elect cure eet tu emere eee eeu 3 1 Chapter4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ccccccssssssseeesecesseeesseessseeesseees 4 1 Chapters lnstallallOD vcsiisicccscccsccsscestevessevievsseectessscerdonsicariossdiescdoosiussdeusduwvdeosinevinsdgs 5 1 1 8 DHBSEKID femme eins xL ISI pt EI MD M IE UR 5 1 1 9 Visual INS DG CUO saa 5 1 KIO Gotmog Stane d RE 5 1 kii JPOWGI UDiundiut itio ides des er t o e o o b d o leni 5 1 Chapter6 3q ntrodu6cli h uiii aaa 2002200020052006000228 2000050502 a aa o0 Go 0o GE aO OG aO 6 1 uM Ou A 6 1 1 19 3BiarewWareDHOLIS eee E A 6 2 1 13 1 IDR 0 0 ni C ia MEN 6 2 VAS Z Gof OS ODIO Cand 2 iicticesccetisatisaticatcatnatintigee a eee 6 2 e Feo ee ANDS OPONT IO ea due cer ietireraterd aaa drea ea PE uA HA MA I ESN 6 2 WIS HIS SPOSUOM CAN EAEE E 6 2 195 5 Quad E ODWOR CAI seco ccc utar arhan O 6 2 1 19 9 Eurocom DO r ODIO GE Ol cessesbintixistirintx uude tis nie Erb bRUFEPOFPPE EP MEE FSCO tS LO dic anP 6 3 n sr IP AVAGO ONO Gre mmt 6 3 1 13 8 Optional L band BUC Power Supplies seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 4 1 13 9 L band FSK DC Option Card ccccccccecccseeceseceeeeeeeeseeseneceneseeeeseesaees 6 6 LAG SOWIE OPON cere ees Gace nde apes ace are eae eee ME M MP eee eae 6 6 iS ovii ee nee re rae E E me St eT ea 6 13 V
162. cked for errors 14 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Framing 2048k Mode Screen 2048k data format Unformatted 1 Unformatted 2 G 732 Options Unformatted G 732 Factory default Unformatted Description IBS G 732 is Intelsat N 30 1920kbps Sat 2048k mode Unformatted is N 32 Sat 2184k mode IDR and Closed Network ESC G 732 aligns satellite frame with terrestrial for distant end partial insert Unformatted uses an arbitrary point for frame insertion Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Framing CAS Screen G 732 CAS signalling No CAS 1 CAS 2 No CAS Options CAS When CAS is selected the CAS will be conveyed from end to end of the link using the IBS overhead No CAS This indicates that a terrestrial CAS multiframe and abcd signalling nibbles for each timeslot are not present Consequently Timeslot 16 may be dropped inserted in a similar manner to other timeslots Factory default MOS Description For G 732 bearer operation specifies whether Channel Associated signalling information is present in Timeslot 16 14 2 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Framing TS Order Screen Remap timeslot order Do not map 1 Do not map 2 Map Options Do not map Do not allow timeslots to be reordered Map Allow timeslots to be reordered Factory default Do not map Descripti
163. creen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx FEC Outer Advanced Menu See the description of the transmit path equivalent See the Edit Tx FEC Outer Advanced description for a table of Reed Solomon N K and Interleaver Depth values used in normal operation Edit Rx FEC Outer Advanced RSN Codeword Length Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx FEC Outer Advanced RSK Data Length Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent 7 69 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Rx FEC Outer Advanced Interleaver Depth Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent 1 19 3 2 7 Edit Rx Descrambler Menu See the description of the transmit path equivalent The transmit section description also includes a table that defines normal operation with respect to scrambler selection Edit Rx Descrambler Enable Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Descrambler Type Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent 1 19 3 2 8 Edit Rx Carrier Menu Carrier 1 Frequency 2 Inversion 3 Roll off 4 Advanced This menu has the following options e Frequency This sets the IF frequency used to receive from the satellite e nversion This controls whether the and Q channel outputs are swapped e Hholl off This controls the expected slope gradient of the received carrier at its edge
164. creens When the Hound trip delay method for Paired Carrier is set to Delay then the following screens are displayed in sequence Min delay 0 to 300ms 000 00 Step 0 01ms New 000 00 Units ms Minimum value 000 00 Maximum value 300 00 Step size 0 01 Factory default 000 00 Description The minimum satellite round trip delay This value directly affects the modem acquisition time Once Paired Carrier is working in order to minimize the acquisition time it is recommended to use the actual measured satellite delay value shown on the Status PCMA screen and set the minimum delay to this value minus 0 5ms 7 81 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Units Minimum value Max delay 0 to 300ms 000 00 Step 0 01ms New 000 00 ms 000 00 Maximum value 300 00 Step size Factory default Description 0 01 000 00 The maximum satellite round trip delay This value directly affects the modem acquisition time Once Paired Carrier is working in order to minimize the acquisition time it is recommended to use the actual measured satellite delay value shown on the Status PCMA screen and set the maximum delay to this value plus 0 5ms Edit Rx Rx Tx Screen Rx values track Tx Off 1 Off 2 On Factory default Off Description Controls whether specific Rx configuration parameters mirror the equivalent Tx parameters Exceptions include the IF frequency spectr
165. ctly used in straight bridging mode although the address must be a valid one for the local network in point to point bridging mode The IP address is however used in modes using TCP acceleration and header compression See Section 8 12 for more details of IP addressing Edit Unit Interface IP Address Traffic Port IP Netmask Screen Traffic port IP netmask 255 255 255 255 New 255 255 000 000 Factory default 255 255 255 255 Description Sets the IP subnet mask for the base modem IP traffic port or the IP Traffic card if this is fitted 7 100 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface IP Address Traffic Port IP Gateway Screen Traffic port IP gateway 0 0 0 0 New 010 000 070 003 Factory default 0 0 0 0 Description Sets the IP address of a default gateway for the base modem IP traffic port or the IP Traffic card if this is fitted The gateway represents the next hop destination which is normally the address of a router for packets destined for somewhere other than the local network This is used with TCP acceleration brouting and header compression An address of 0 0 0 0 means that the gateway is not set In straight bridging mode it is not normally necessary to set this gateway as the bridge automatically learns the location of each device Note that there are two gateways that can be defined in the modem The Traffic Port IP Gateway is used exclusivel
166. d the modem remote serial control port is configured into RS232 mode at 4800 baud The modem will poll the serial port on a regular basis for the latest GPS position and use this in the Paired Carrier control process The modem automatically selects two commonly used GPS protocols namely GGA GPS Fix Data and GLL Geographic position Latitude Longtitude and will support whichever is available It uses the GPS information to calculate the minimum and maximum delays to satellite and updates these if they need to change from their existing values Set location Allows the selection of the method for determining the satellite round trip delay This can be entered as a time delay or can be automatically calculated from location information It can also be calculated automatically using information provided by a GPS system attached to the modem in this case it is still necessary to enter a position for the satellite via the Edit Rx Carrier Advanced PCMA Location screens The delay is required in order for the Paired Carrier signal processing algorithm to find a best match for its stored copy of the outgoing transmitted signal with the composite return signal in order to subtract the unwanted near signal leaving just the far carrier For the fastest possible acquisition time once Paired Carrier is working it is recommended that the actual measured satellite delay shown on the Status PCMA screen is used 0 5ms to set the minimum and maximum
167. d Operating Handbook Edit Unit User Level Screen User level Advanced 1 Basic 2 Advanced Options Basic Advanced Factory default Advanced Description Enables or disables advanced menu options By selecting the basic setting many menus and options become unavailable thereby simplifying the menu structure when the more advanced modem features are not required Edit Unit Time Screen Date amp time 14 41 45 06 04 2005 14 41 45 06 04 2005 This option allows the current time and date of the modem to be set in the format HH MM SS DD MM YYYY The time is maintained even while the modem is switched off Edit Unit Advanced Alarms Thresholds Deferred Alarm BER Threshold Screen BER threshold 9 9E 15 to 1 0E 2 1 0E 4 Step 0 1E 15 New 1 0E 4 7 126 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Units Minimum value 9 9E 15 Maximum value 1 0E 2 Step size 0 1E1 Factory default 1E 4 Description Sets the error rate threshold above which a deferred alarm will be generated This alarm can be switched off or on using the BER threshold alarm option of the Edit Unit Advanced Alarms Actions menu Edit Unit Advanced Alarms Thresholds Rx Eb No Deferred Alarm Threshold Screen EbNo threshold 0 to 99dB 03 0 Step 0 1dB New 03 0 Units dB Minimum value 0 0 Maximum value 99 0 Step size 0 1 Factory default 3 0 Description Sets the Eb No threshold below which a
168. d Operating Handbook FEC Mode FEC Rate Modulation Scheme Viterbi default 1 2 3 4 7 8 default BPSK QPSK default OQPSK 5 16 BPSK QPSK OQPSK 21 44 1 2 Paradise 2 3 Paradise 3 4 de facto 0 789 Paradise 7 8 de facto 7 8 Paradise default 0 93 Paradise 3 4 de facto 8PSK 16QAM 7 8 de facto default 0 93 Paradise Conventional LDPC LDPC U2 QPSK Ys 1 3 2 5 Y 2 3 4 5 5 6 8 9 9 10 Table of Normal Operation with respect to FEC Mode FEC Rate and Modulation Scheme Edit Tx FEC Inner FEC Screen FEC type TPC New SmartLink Options Viterbi Requires the Viterbi SAF feature standard on base modem TCM 1 21 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Requires the TCM SAF feature which is provided free with the 8PSK SAF feature TPC Requires the TPC SAF feature Sequential Requires the Sequential SAF feature LDPC Requires one or more of the LDPC data rate SAFs This enables Conventional LDPC Note that this feature has been superseded by FastLink low latency LDPC which gives comparable performance SmartLink Quantum only This is provided as part of DVB S2 and is not a SAF feature in its own right This selects SmartLink which allows SCPC features to be used with DVB S2 space segment DVB S2 provides very efficient forward error correction FEC modulation and satellite framing and very robust demodul
169. d by sending messages through the asynchronous ESC channel which is carried over the satellite multiplexed with the main data channel An asynchronous ESC channel is available in Closed Network Minimum Overhead IBS SMS and IDR modes AUPC requires dedicated use of the ESC channel and while the ESC channel is being used for AUPC then it is not available for other purposes The modem can be set to either just monitor the distant Eb No or to maintain it at a specified level As well as being able to view the distant Eb No and BER estimate a deferred alarm can be set to activate if the distant Eb No falls below a user set threshold and the distant end Eb No can be recorded regularly in the local end traffic log To maintain the distant Eb No a target Eb No level has to be set along with a maximum transmit power level for the local end When the target Eb No is exceeded by more than a pre defined tolerance the transmit power is adjusted to bring the distant Eb No back to the target value The power will continue to be adjusted automatically until the Eb No settles on the target value The use of a tolerance value prevents continual transmit power variations under normal minor thermal noise variations The rate at which adjustments are made is automatically controlled in such a way as to prevent rapid power variations If the satellite link is lost then the transmit power will freeze at its current level until the link is restored 1 23 2 Configurin
170. d interface position HSSI Quad E1 IP Traffic and Eurocom D1 The IDR option is fitted in the upper interface position with the terrestrial interface in the lower position If the G 703 option is fitted then balanced G 703 supporting T1 E1 T2 E2 T3 and E3 modes is available Balanced operation T1 1544kbps 1000 E1 2048kbps 1200 and T2 6136kbps 1100 is provided on the EIA530 D type connector when G 703 is selected in addition to RS422 V 35 and RS232 EIA530 modes Unbalanced operation E1 2048kbps 750 T2 6136kbps 75 QO E3 34376kbps 750 and T3 44376kbps 750 requires the use of the two BNC connectors in interface position 3 The line impedance and all other parameters are selected via software The software also selects what happens to the G 703 port when power is removed Either the G 703 ports can be set to go high impedance used in 1 1 redundancy operation or they can be configured to loop the G 703 6 16 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook input back to the output typically used when Drop Insert is in operation and the same PCM bearer is cascaded through several modems ESC and Aux Connector This connector is fitted as part of the IDR option and provides access to e Four backward alarm form C outputs and four backward alarm inputs together with an Rx summary alarm signal for direct connection to the backward alarm inputs These are used in IDR mode e Two audio ESC ports
171. d point to multipoint RS485 over the ESC channel are supported The following drawing shows the internal connections that are made 14 14 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook ESC Tx A p ESCRx A M amp CRx j M amp CTx A Y Link Local ESC Tx A ESCRx A M amp CRx Y x M amp CTx A Link Remote With both of these options the physical ESC port is disabled due to being internally linked to the M amp C port The mode must be set according to whether the modem is at the local or remote end of the link The effect of Link Local is to transmit whatever is received over the satellite ESC channel out onto the local modem s M amp C bus while at the same time transmitting all incoming M amp C messages out over the satellite ESC channel The effect of Link Remote is to loop back whatever is received over the modem s satellite ESC channel to the modem s M amp C port and to transmit over the satellite ESC channel whatever is transmitted by the modem out of its M amp C port IP to Serial supports the transmission of IP wrappered RS485 messages 14 15 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook through the ESC channel which are then transmitted as serial messages on the remote RS485 bus ESC Backward Alarm Options Off On Factory default Off Description Controls the ESC Backward
172. d render the modem unusable Method 1 The compact flash in the modem has a special piece of software called the fallback image that is used to recover when an upgrade fails It is essential that this is upgraded prior to any upgrade or downgrade as older versions of the fallback image are less reliable with newer versions of modem software This is done as follows a Goto the Downloads section of the Paradise Datacom web site http www paradisedata com and from the Modem Software Download section select the Install Quantum Evolution Series Modem Software option b Download the fbupgrade zip file to your PC and extract the two files fbupgrade exe and fbimage to a folder on your PC c Connect your PC to the modem M amp C Ethernet interface using a straight CATSE Ethernet cable ensuring the modem has an IP address compatible with the PC i e on the same subnet The modem IP address can be set via the Main Edit Uni M amp C IP address and subnet mask options d On your PC open a DOS Command Prompt Window select Start Run and enter cmd and change the directory to the location of the downloaded files 7 168 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook e Atthe command prompt enter fbupgrade modem IP address gt f You should see a PC screen similar to the following after which the modem will automatically restart ec Command Prompt HEHEHEHEHE HEHEHEHEHE HEHEHEHE E HEHEHEHEHE HEHEHEHE IE HEHEHE
173. data channel rate If an IDR option card is fitted then in IBS SMS mode the Aux channel can be used synchronously to use all available overhead not already in use by the ESC channel this can provide a channel of up to 4 4 of the main data rate In IDR mode the Aux channel can be configured to provide 32kbps or 64kbps in place of one or both 32kbps ADPCM audio ESC channels which can then be used for BER testing Main channel Controls the channel through which the BER test patterns are transmitted 7 146 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Test BER Tx Pattern Screen BER pattern PRBS 15 New Alt10 Options Alt 10 All 1 All 0 PRBS 20 0151 PRBS 15 PRBS 11 User QRSS PRBS 23 PRBS 20 0153 PRBS 19 PRBS 9 PRBS 7 PRBS 6 3 in 24 1 in 16 2 in 8 1 in 8 1 in 4 Alt 1100 Selects the desired test pattern The pattern is a pseudo random sequence of 1s and Os of the specified length that repeats continuously The User pattern allows a user defined pattern to be entered Factory PRBS 20 0151 default Description Selects the PRBS BER test pattern Test BER Tx Results Screen BERT Sync OK Time 40 0mins Loss 1 Errors 3 BER 1 0E 6 The BERT shows the instantaneous test pattern synchronisation status When the Rx path is synchronised to the incoming Tx test pattern then this will display Sync OK and when synchronisation is lost it will display NO SYNC The Time field indica
174. data rates by setting a sweep width that is smaller than the default Normal Controls the Rx signal sweep configuration Edit Rx Demodulation Sweep Width Screen Units Sweep width 1 to 250kHz 032 Step 1kHz New 032 kHz Minimum value 1 Maximum value 250 Step size 1 Factory default 32 Description Controls the Rx signal sweep width when the Sweep mode is set to Other This is a setting i e the total width is twice the value that is entered In general the default value should be use but at very low data rates it may reduce demodulator acquisition time if the sweep width is 7 67 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook set to a lower value Edit Rx Demodulation Advanced Menu Advanced 1 Reacquire 2 Equaliser This menu can be selected when user level is set to Advanced following the setting of the modulation type It contains the following options Reacquire reacquisition holdoff This applies only to MIL STD 188 165A L band modems It allows a period of time to be defined for which after the demodulator loses the carrier signal the demodulator does not go back to its normal acquisition mode but continues to try to track the signal This is useful where there may be a temporary obstruction to the satellite signal such as from a helicopter as it potentially allows the demodulator to regain the carrier more quickly than would otherwise be the case Equa
175. deferred alarm will be generated Edit Unit Advanced Alarms Thresholds Buffer Slip Deferred Alarm Screen Buf slip threshold 0 to 9999hrs 0000 Step 1hrs New 0000 7 127 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Units hrs Minimum value 0 Maximum value 9999 Step size 1 Factory default 0 Description Sets the threshold period for consecutive buffer slips above which a deferred alarm is generated A setting of O zero disables this alarm Edit Unit Advanced Alarms Thresholds BUC PSU Alarm Screen DC current min 0 1 to 6A 0 10 Step 0 01A New 0 10 Units A Minimum value 0 1 Maximum value 6 Step size 0 01A Factory default 0 1 Description On L band modems sets the trip threshold at which a fault is declared when the current drawn by the Tx ODU is outside the limit Both a minimum and a maximum current threshold can be set Edit Unit Advanced Alarms Thresholds AUPC Deferred Distant AlarmScreen Deferred distant E 0 1 to 9 9dB 0 1 Step 0 1dB New 0 1 7 128 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Units dB Minimum value 0 1 Maximum value 9 9 Step size 0 1 Factory default 0 1 Description When AUPC is active sets the trip threshold at which a fault is declared when the distant end Eb No is outside the limit Edit Unit Advanced Alarms Thresholds Dropped TRAU Count Threshold Screen TRAU threshold 0 0 to 9999 0 9999 0 S
176. dem provides only a default configuration for the RIP and OSPF protocols that can be enabled from the user interfaces These will be all that is required in many cases Further configuration of all routing protocols is available for expert users via a telnet interface to the Quagga software the Quagga user manual available from http www quagga net docs quagga pdf You can telnet into a different command line interpreter for setting up each routing protocol and one that can be used for basic level setup of all routing protocols These provide Cisco OS like commands that will be familiar to users of Cisco equipment 1 32 12 Header Compression The modem supports RObust Header Compression ROHC of e P UDP headers e P UDP RTP headers e All Ethernet headers 8 50 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook The 40 bytes of IP UDP and RTP headers are typically compressed to between 1 to 3 bytes Currently the headers of TCP packets will not be compressed Ethernet header compression is also supported The 14 bytes of Ethernet frame the Ethernet CRC is not sent over satellite even when compression is off are typically reduced to 1 byte Before Header Compression IP UDP RTP Payload 70 bytes 8 bytes 12 bytes Variable size depending on codec Header 40 bytes After Header Compression Header Payload 1to 3 bytes Variable size depending on codec Example G 729 packet with 20ms 2
177. der Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Overhead Closed Network Plus ESC Screens ESC Interface See the description under Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Overhead Closed Network Plus ESC Screens IDR ESC Audio Encoding Options Factory default Description Off When off V1 and V2 are omitted and consequently only 32kbps overhead is transmitted or the 64kbps of V1 and V2 overhead can be reallocated to Aux data via the IDR Aux mode setting The 32kbps overhead includes FAS backward alarms and an 8kbps synchronous ESC channel 2x16k in V1 Two 16kbps ADPCM channels are provided in V1 with V2 either being omitted or being replaced with Aux data as determined by the IDR Aux mode setting 1x32k in V1 32kbps is provided in V1 with V2 either being omitted or being replaced with Aux data as determined by the IDR Aux mode setting 2x32k in V1 V2 The normal full 96kbps of IDR overhead is used including two audio ESC channels encoded as 32kbps ADPCM as well as the standard 32kbps for FAS backward alarms and an 8kbps synchronous ESC channel Off Controls audio data format for the ESC overhead in IDR mode The overhead can be set to 32 64 or 96kbps 64kbps of this can be not transmitted allocated to voice or allocated to Aux data via the Aux controls 14 23 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook IDR Aux Data Options Off No Aux data is placed in the overhead 32K 32kbps of Aux data replac
178. e TxESC ceon 9 v escas e m f u V wEScomemA mEscoaam a of o pescon w z 5 V u Reese Daaoura RESC Danou E i o Esc oeroua wEScosems EN Tx ESC Octet out B R ESCOdeouA RES Ostet ost weScOmMmaB e U indicates lines are optional C Eq E E M m Oo N c In Closed Net Plus ESC mode the variable rate async ESC is available on this port In IBS modes high rate async ESC is available on this port In IDR modes this port provides access to the 8kbps IDR ESC channel This can either by synchronous at 8kbps or if the Async ESC feature is available asynchronous at up to 4800 or 9600 Baud 11 6 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Aux Port Pin Numer Syne Aeyne P542 Usage nsmzumee m f o peron rt Tanco e o poen ve Lm o Racmess oancero pacon e o ennon ve e o oon rhone e o poes ue Ce o poan poon 5 w fpo ue U indicates lines are optional C C 1 1 In Closed Net plus ESC mode the aux port is not used In IBS modes the Aux port can be set to both Intelsat using TS32 bit 1 and Sync modes selectable to use any of TS16 TS32 bits 1 amp 5 8 amp TS48 In both modes a clock is provided and the port can be used synchronously with the clock or asynchronously allowing the async data to be oversampled by the higher rate clock In this oversampled mode as specified by Intelsat the Baud rate is limited
179. e information in this handbook this cannot be guaranteed and the information contained herein does not constitute a product warranty A product warranty statement is provided separately to this handbook Paradise Datacom maintains a programme of continuous product improvement and reserves the right to change specifications without prior notice 1 4 GNU General Public License This product contains software source code distributed under the GNU General Public License GPL Paradise Datacom fully acknowledges the terms of this license If you would like a copy of the GPL source code in this product on a CD then please send USD 15 00 along with a request for the Quantum Evolution Series Satellite Modem GPL Source Code CD to Paradise Datacom to cover the cost of preparing and mailing the CD to you 2 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 3 Safety Information PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION BEFORE INSTALLATION AND USE 1 5 Safety To ensure operator safety this satellite modem conforms to the provisions of EMC Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC and complies with the following standard EN 60950 1 2006 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment Prior to installation and operation please ensure that the following points are observed 1 6 Environmental The equipment is designed to operate in a static 19 inch rack system conformi
180. e shown in the Edit Tx FEC Inner Menu section Note Paradise TPC rate 7 8 was developed to give better performance than Viterbi rate 7 8ths by about 1dB with a similar latency However if you require interoperability with other manufacturers equipment or a better coding gain then you should select de facto TPC rate 7 8 1 32 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx FEC Frame Type Screen The following screen may be shown at this point after the FEC has been selected in DVB S2 IP multistreaming mode then there will be one of these screens for each stream FEC frame size Normal New Short Options Short Selects a DVB S2 frame size of 16200 bits Normal Selects a DVB S2 frame size of 64800 bits Factory default Short Description Sets the DVB S2 FEC frame size Edit Tx FEC Pilots Screen The following screen may be shown at this point after the FEC has been selected in DVB S2 IP multistreaming mode then there will be one of these screens for each stream Pilot tones Off New On Options Off 7 33 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook On Factory default Off Description Pilot tones are an optional part of DVB S2 They provide an unmodulated tone at regular intervals in the transmitted data that can help receivers to lock and stay in lock particularly when using higher order modulation schemes in noisy environments T
181. e BTS and BSC Sat ABIS supports 1 1 redundancy with no external hardware Four Ethernet ports for future growth In relation to compression Sat ABIS e Removes silence idle speech frames e Removes idle data frames channels not assigned to calls e Performs LAPD signalling optimization including compression of repetitive data patterns such as idle flags between HDLC control messages on signal channels Drop and Insert of timeslots is provided thereby supporting fractional T1 E1 links Abis implementations vary with manufacturer and therefore the modem allows each timeslot and 16kbps portions of timeslots see picture overleaf to be allocated to either voice or signalling thereby allowing the correct compression techniques to be applied to each portion of the data 8 62 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook ym Paradise Evolution modem1 Ge CQ S ou http 10 0 200 103 statusdual php TB 1 b D C Free Hotmail 7 Suggested Sites Web Slice Galery Telegraph co uk new Modem configurator door entry SY The Independent ue Other bookmarks 1 4 PARADISE DATACOM E EN F EVOLUTION SERIES STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Local SUMMARY RAK BImory Interface CIT Clocks Advanced Network ID Paradise Evolution modem ri Sat Abis Control Shared ABIS link mode Uplink v
182. e Modem Ethernet Ports Both of the Ethernet connections by default form part of an Ethernet bridge and share an IP address Essentially the bridge makes the modem disappear from the network in relation to passing IP traffic over satellite Consequently for simple point to point communications little or no user set up is required to pass IP traffic over satellite If both Ethernet ports are configured to be part of the bridge which is the default then a single Ethernet connection to the modem can be used for both IP traffic and modem M amp C control using either of the two RJ45 connectors If the M amp C port is configured to be outside of the bridge then one Ethernet port is dedicated to IP traffic and the other to M amp C control as labeled on the connectors To communicate with the modem itself for M amp C purposes an IP address and subnet mask must be set Note that settings an IP address of 0 0 0 0 causes the modem to request an IP address from a DHCP Dynamic Host Control Porotocol server on the network Typically an external router will be required to perform complex network IP routing functions such as dynamic routing Static routes are supported allowing routing decisions to be made based on a set of explicit routing rules that can be entered via the web user interface The use of a default gateway IP address is also supported When specified i e the value is not 0 0 0 0 then the gateway provides a next hop IP address for all destin
183. e PRBS probably the idle code from one of the other dropped timeslots If the Timeslot ID is maintained you should consistently get the PRBS back in this same subset or single timeslot Bear in mind that without TS ID maintenance when dropping N timeslots statistically it will still work one time in 8xN when the random timeslot alignment happens to be correct Implementation of Timeslot ID Maintenance The requirement is to provide 1 Timeslot boundary maintenance start end of each timeslots 8 bits within the data stream 8 12 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 2 Timeslot identity ID maintenance ie which 8 bits relate to which timeslot first second third etc within the data stream The data from each timeslot appears as a set of 8 bits from each terrestrial frame Timeslot boundary maintenance is provided by placing the data into the IBS frame timeslot aligned after TSO When TSO is located the next 8 bits represent 8 bits from one terrestrial timeslot the following 8 from the next etc Timeslot Identity Maintenance again relies on relative position to TSO Data from the first timeslot of the group of timeslots is always placed in the first timeslot after TS0 the second of the group in the second TS and so forth Once the 8 bits of data from every timeslot have been placed in the frame the process repeats until the frame is full For the following frame to be similarly formatted the timeslo
184. e Transmitted Bit rate is higher than the Symbol rate and so E N ie the Carrier Noise referenced to Transmitted Bit rate is lower than the E Noe the Carrier Noise referenced to the Symbol rate as this same power is referenced to a higher bit rate Allowing for the change in bit rate in the demod gives Ji 5 Es 101g No Of Bits Symbol No No Next in the demod chain comes the FEC Decoder The receive Carrier Noise referenced to this point is referred to as Epec No In the FEC Decoder the bit rate is reduced as the data is decoded to provide corrected data at a lower rate Because the data rate reduces 8 29 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook through the FEC Decoder Epee No is higher than E No as the same power is referenced to a lower bit rate Allowing for the change in bit rate in the FEC decoder gives Epe Et 10 log FEC Code Rate No No Following the FEC Decoder the inner FEC ie TPC Viterbi or TCM comes the Reed Solomon Outer FEC Decoder if active This Outer FEC RS Decoder operates similarly to the Inner FEC Decoder reducing the bit rate as it corrects errors and finally generating the Composite Information Bit Rate at its output The Carrier Noise expressed at this Composite Information Bit Rate is referred to as the E N or Ey No or E No with and b referring to Information and Bit respectively Again because the data rate r
185. e and Satellite Overhead limits the Traffic Data Rate Range in all modes 4 8kbps to 10Mbps PD10 20Mbps PD20 25Mbps vL Dala Rale Range PD25 55Mbps PD55 100Mbps PD60 no satellite Closed Network overhead with high data rate options User Data Rate Range As Closed Network above except limits inclusive of Traffic Interface Electrical User Traffic Data Rate Minimum Overhead overhead of approximately 1 4 times the ESC baud rate Closed Network Plus Resolution of 1bps Supports ESC rate from 110 baud ESC to gt 38 4kbaud 4 8kbps to 10 Mbps 6 7 satellite overhead added IBS SMS Option Resolution of 1bps User Data Rate Range 4 8kbps to 10 Mbps 96k overhead added IDR Option Resolution of 8k limitation of frame structure 13 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Used with IBS SMS satellite framing and IDR Options to provide 2 x 32kbps audio ADPCM coded channels Audio Channels Option within a 64kbps IBS carrier and 2 x 32kbps audio ADPCM coded channels plus 64kbps data within a 128kbps IBS carrier DVB S2 LDPC BCH option as per EN 302 307 QPSK 8PSK 16APSK rates 1 4 to 9 10 SCPC Note BPSK and O QPSK provided as standard other modulations are options FastLink Low Latency LDPC option BPSK 0 499 O QPSK 0 532 0 639 0 710 0 798 8PSK 8QAM 0 639 0 710 0 778 16APSK 16QAM 0 726 0 778 0 828 0 851 32APSK 0 778 0 828 0 886 0 938 64QAM
186. e connecting cable length The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over a 10m cable over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles e g 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc Similarly the maximum data rate increases as the connecting cable length is reduced i e 20Mbps to 5m 40Mbps to 2 5m The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that there is a clocking problem external to the modem i e changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to 7x Clock In the Data In signal is checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to nternal or Rx the Data In signal is checked against the nt Tx CIk Out signal All signals are balanced differentially driven and received at standard ECL levels The loopbacks LA and LB provided are direct supersets of the EIA signals LL Local Loopback and RL Remote Loopback Loopback LC is an optional request signal from DCE to DTE to request that the DTE provides a loopback path to the DCE By selecting Advanced it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line RS or Device DTE Ready In li
187. e does not form part of the Ethernet bridge then a traffic IP address must be set in addition Note that the modem is not configured for auto sense of the cable type and consequently either a straight or crossover patch cable may be required depending on the equipment being connected typically a straight cable is required when connecting direct to a PC and a crossover cable is required when connecting to a hub or switch Setting up IP addresses is covered in more detail in Section 8 12 Station Clock This connector is a 75Q BNC female that accepts a 1 10MHz signal either a square wave of gt 1V p p e g a G 703 para 10 synchronising clock or a sinusoid at a power level of OdBm or greater An alternative Station Clock signal at RS422 interface levels can be applied to the Async ESC connector Either signal can be used by the modem as a reference for the receive output clock the Station Clock does not have to be the same rate as the data as an internal PLL converts between rates In addition if the Rx Clocking is set to use the Station Clock and the Tx Clocking is set to Rx then the Station Clock also sources the internally generated Tx Clock Tx and Rx data rates are independent If a 10MHz signal is applied this signal may also be used in place of the internal reference for the Tx and Rx IF synthesisers 6 18 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 7 User Interfaces The modem has the follow
188. e g s Network ID Paradise modem i PT 3 ci Serial No 10500355 Routes 0 15 Routes 16 31 b d Routes 32 47 b d Routes 48 63 b d Header Compresion Mode In control Destination Subnet mask Gateway Click to apply routes Control Shared Route 0 10 0 30 1 255 255 0 0 10 0 0 10 UNIT STATUS Route 1 10 0 30 2 255 255 0 0 10 0 0 10 RX TRAFFIC Route 2 10 0 30 1 255 255 0 0 10 0 0 10 TX TRAFFIC TEST MODE Route 3 TX CARRIER Route 4 Route 6 Route 7 Route 8 Paradise Static route Route 9 Static route Route 10 Route 11 Route 12 Route 13 rw m m m m m mg mw e m m lt Static Route Configuration Screen Each route consists of a Destination IP Address Subnet Mask and a Gateway Address There is a checkbox for each route that enables the route when checked Note that Paradise does not recommend using DHCP to allocate the modem an M amp C IP address when static routes are being used 1 20 15 Header Compression IP UDP and RTP header compression is supported in accordance with the Robust Header Compression ROHC standard RFC 3095 profiles 2 and 3 ROHC typically reduces the 40 bytes of IP UDP and RTP header which is typically used with Voice over IP data down to between 1 and 3 bytes Ethernet header compression is also supported in addition and this reduces 14 bytes of Ethernet frame down to typically 1 byte Overall savings from compression from both types of compression e g for a G 729 voice strea
189. e indicates the time since the test was started or restarted The Errors field indicates the total number of error bits detected since the test started The Average BER field indicates the number of bit errors in relation to the number of bits received Latency is shown in terms of both bits and time The Sync OK LED shows the instantaneous test pattern synchronisation status When the Rx path is synchronised to the incoming Tx test pattern then the LED will be green and it will be red when synchronisation is lost The analyser Sync Lost Threshold can be customised or left as Auto The Counter Action on Sync Loss can be set to Heset Continue or Freeze allowing further customization of the display The Restart button can be used to start or restart the BER test including clearing all of the error counts 7 171 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 20 13 Modem Email Function When providing Quality of Service reports to satellite services end users it would be extremely useful to be able to easily include pertinent performance information from the modem The modem supports this by incorporating the desired status information into emails that can be sent anywhere either to someone on the local network or worldwide if an Internet connection is available Performance data can even be fetched over the satellite from a remote modem and then sent by email from the local modem This is possible due to the modem
190. e is a single router then e On the modem local to the router the IP traffic gateway will normally be used to point to the router 8 36 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook e The satellite gateway of the remote modem will normally point to the satellite IP address of the modem local to the router If there are two routers then e Either the modem IP traffic gateways could point to the local router and static routes point to the far modem or alternatively e The satellite gateways could point to the other modem s satellite address and static routes could be used to forward to the local router assuming dynamic routing is not being used The IP traffic address is used when the M amp C port is out of the bridge It is also used when an IP traffic card is fitted to address the IP card regardless of the M amp C port settings The IP traffic address is not particularly useful until TCP acceleration header compression or routing is switched on at which point b routing decisions are being made which use the IP traffic address TCP acceleration requires a gateway to be set unless everything is on the same subnet Note that brouting is a mode that uses both bridging and routing at the same time UDP packets will be bridged and TCP packets will be routed but will still have an Ethernet frame over satellite Bridged packets always retain their Ethernet frame over satellite Ethernet frames are only absent over
191. ear consecutively when the DH overhead option is selected IDR 8k ESC Off 1 Off 2 Asynchronous 3 Synchronous IDR 8k ESC Screen ESC interface baud rate 9600 baud New 9600 baud ESC Baud Rate Screen ESC interface character length 8 bits 1 7 bits 2 8 bits ESC Character Length Screen ESC interface parity polarity None None New None ESC Parity Screen ESC interface RS485 RS485 New RS485 ESC Interface Screen IDR ESC audio encoding 2x32K in V1 V2 2x32K in V1 V2 New 2x32K in V1 V2 IDR ESC Audio Encoding Screen 14 21 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook IDR Aux data Off 1 Off 1 32K 2 64K IDR Aux Data Screen Aux interface RS485 1 RS232 2 RS422 3 RS485 4 IP Aux Interface Screen Backward alarm mode 1 4 external New 1 4 external Backward Alarm Mode Screen ESC level ch1 0 to 38dB 0 Step 2dB New 0 ESC Audio Levels Screen These screens are explained in the following sections IDR 8k ESC Options Off Asynchronous Requires ESC SAF feature standard on base modem Provides up to a 9600 baud asynchronous channel Synchronous Factory default EH Description Controls the operating mode of the low rate IDR ESC channel 14 22 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook ESC Baud Rate ESC Character Length ESC Parity ESC Interface See the descriptions un
192. ecause yo adi eed to install a suitable 3 ersion of the Java Runtime 21 4 4 the following link for further p d venenum 11 08 35 11 08 40 11 08 45 11 08 50 11 08 55 11 09 00 11 09 05 11 00 10 11 09 15 11 09 20 11 09 25 11 09 30 v A aa ER ANE Modem Time m Eb No Graph 7 158 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook PARADISE DATACOM 3 Ww QUANTUM SERIES STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Local Graphs IP Traffic Alarms Log Packets Y Drop Pkts Y Errors SUMMARY ID Paradise modem Serial No 20700392 Mode In control Control Shared 1hour 24hours 30days UNIT STATUS 7500 7000 6500 TX TRAFFIC 6000 RX TRAFFIC TEST MODE 5500 gt 5000 1 4500 4000 3500 TX CARRIER kBits Sec 3000 gt 2500 2000 1 1500 1000 500 p 15 05 15 10 15 15 15 20 15 25 15 30 15 35 30 seconds interval I Rx Traffic Ml Tx Traffic Satellite Traffic Graph 1 20 3 Configuration Memories In common with the local user interface the web interface allows the storing of user configurations to memory on the modem and the recall of these later However the web interface also allows these memories to be uploaded and downloaded to and from a PC This in turn allows configurations to be shared by different modems This offers a convenient time saving method of configuring a batch of modems by gen
193. ecified If the default gateway is a router then this allows the router to be set up to filter data in whatever way is appropriate On In this mode the bridge will discard all traffic other than that destined for the local subnet This can be useful in preventing network loops from occurring A network loop can be created for example in a point to multipoint scenario where there are multiple Rx only modems with a common indirect return path and a default gateway is specified that causes data not destined for a particular Rx modem to be routed out of the gateway and back to the sender through the return path Off Controls whether the Ethernet bridge filters out all traffic other than for the local subnet Edit Unit Interface IP Misc Cisco HDLC Screen Cisco HDLC On 1 Off 2 On Factory default Off Description In routing mode controls whether Cisco HDLC is used to encapsulate IP packets being transmitted over satellite This mode 7 110 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook can be used to receive and output the IP stream as a serial stream to a Cisco serial router Edit Unit Interface Quad E1 Menu Interface 1 Port 1 2 Port 2 3 Port 3 4 Port 4 This menu has options for configuring the Tx and Rx side of each of the four terrestrial E1 ports on either a Quad E1 or a Sat ABIS interface card If neither card is fitted then this menu will not be available Selection of an E1 port o
194. ed 1 32 14 Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM uses feedback from the receiver to the transmitter to respond to changes in channel conditions to optimise throughput by providing only the level of error protection that is required ACM can be used in both directions at the same time maximising throughput for outbound and return Deployed links have reported throughput gains of up to 100 ACM works in conjunction with DVB S2 although the return channel does not have to be DVB S2 unless ACM operation is required for both outbound and inbound carriers By varying the error correction strength to match atmospheric conditions link margin is converted into useful bandwidth Modulation and FEC rate modcod is dynamically matched to the current Es No returned from the remote modem Symbol rate is kept constant changing the terrestrial data rate up or down with Es No ACM operation automatically accounts for all other link impairments including antenna alignment error inclined orbit phase noise and other degradations 8 52 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook ACM can be used on point to point IP links ACM must be on in Tx on the transmitting modem and Rx in the receiving modem It must be on in both Tx and Rx in both modems if ACM is to be actively used for both outbound and inbound carriers It requires a satellite return channel either DVB S2 or SCPC The return channel
195. ed TX TRAFFIC Jul 21 16 41 28 Alarm RxDeframerSyncLossAlarm Cleared Jul 21 16 41 27 Alarm RxDemodUnlockedAlarm Cleared Jul 21 16 41 27 Alarm RxDemodUnlockedAlarm Raised TA CARRIER Jul 21 16 41 27 Alarm RxDeframerTS32SyncLossAlarm Raised o m 0 Jul 21 16 41 27 Alarm R DeframerSyncLossAlarm Raised Jul 21 16 41 26 Alarm RxDeframerTS32SyncLossAlarm Cleared Jul 21 16 41 26 Alarm RxDeframerSyncLossAlarm Cleared Jul 21 16 41 26 Alarm RxDeframerTS32SyncLossAlarm Raised Jul 21 16 41 26 Alarm RxDeframerSyncLossAlarm Raised pu Jul 21 16 41 25 Alarm RxDemodUnlockedAlarm Cleared Jul 21 16 41 25 Alarm R DemodUnlockedalarm Raised u M A 7X eomseess ela System Log Screen 7 163 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 20 7 System Alarms System alarms can be viewed using the View Alarms menu tab An example screen is shown overleaf PARADISE DATACOM o QUANTUM SERIES c x 2H STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT SUMMARY Configuration SA Monitor Alarms Unit b d Tx ID Paradise modem Serial No 999 Show alarm type Fault Warnings All C Accept Mode In control Control Shared Alarm Name Status Level Rx fault Cannot find frame sync on Rx data check Rx Fault RX TRAFFIC Service settings TX TRAFFIC Rx fault Cannot find IBS T8532 multiframe sync on Rx Fault data E TEST MODE Rx fault Demodula
196. ed async data Compliant with Intelsat IESS 403 low rate ESC definition ESC Aux Port Electrical Interface IBS Aux Data Channel 1 54 IDR Option Specifications Parameter A Modem IDR ESC Audio Two 32kbps ADPCM channels 4 wire 6000 7dBm to 16dBm programmable in Interface 0 1dB steps Outputs Four form c relays Inputs Four protected inputs short to OV to send alarm with matching summary Rx fail output Alarm inputs software configurable for a All external patch b 1 Rx fail and 2 4 external patch c 1 Rx fail and 2 4 OK d 1 4 Rx fail When the IDR option is fitted independent ESC amp ESC Aux Ports Aux ports on the IDR option replace the single shared ESC Aux port on the base unit 13 8 Backward Alarms Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook RS232 RS422 or RS485 external interfaces or internal link to remote M amp C port software selected No external cabling required between the ESC and M amp C ports for M amp C via ESC channel within overhead Other devices externally wired in parallel with M amp C port can also be accessed remotely Provides clock data and sync octet timing lines ESC Port Synchronous access to 8kbps IDR ESC With the Async ESC option async ESC access to the 8kbps IDR ESC is provided giving up to a 9600 baud async channel IBS and Closed Net Plus ESC facilities as before installation of IDR option but now on
197. ed over Edit Tx Carrier Advanced BUC Power Offset Screen Units Minimum value Maximum value Step size Factory default Description Tx power offset 99 9 to 99 9dB 00 0 Step 0 1dB New 00 0 dBm dBw 99 99 0 1dB 0 This screen allows the modem to display and the user to edit the final SHF power instead of the IF carrier level Use the up down arrows to change the sign Once set the user is navigated to the Tx power units selection screen Edit Tx Carrier Advanced BUC Power Units Screen Tx power units dBm 1 dBm 2 dBw This allows the user to set the modem to display and edit the Tx carrier level in terms of either the Tx Power or EIRP measured in dBm or dBW 7 51 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Carrier Advanced BUC Type Screen Options BUC Type None New C 5 8 6 425 GHz None There is no BUC attached or it is controlled independently Other If you are not using a Paradise BUC select Other and manually configure the BUC parameters RFT5000 Ku Uses RS485 comms to RF T5000 LO frequency 15450 MHz User FSK enabled but user must set LO frequency of BUC C5 85 6 725 GHz CODU Uses RS485 comms to CO unit LO frequency 4900MHz Ku 14 14 5 GHz CODU Uses RS485 comms to CO unit LO frequency 13050MHz Ext Ku 13 75 14 5 GHz CODU Uses RS485 comms to CO unit LO frequency 12800MHz RFT5000 C Uses RS4
198. educes through the RS Decoder E No is higher than Epec No as the same power is referenced to a lower bit rate Allowing for the change in bit rate in the RS Decoder gives Ep E Dec 10 log RS Code Rate Qu No No It is this Ey N that is typically displayed on the front panel of Modem equipment Finally after the RS Decoder comes Deframing and baseband processing such as Drop Insert IBS SMS or IDR deframing does decrease the bandwidth but the bandwidth reduction effects of deframing are ignored as Intelsat chose to define the mandatory modem performance in terms of E N specifying that this relates to the Composite Information Bit Rate ie it includes framing Baseband processing has no effect on bandwidth and is totally ignored Practical Implications of Displayed Eb No Practically this means the following For a constant Tx Power you will get the same displayed E N whatever the settings of Modulation Inner FEC and Outer RS FEC as the E N display compensates for these parameters The bandwidth will vary and so will the Carrier Noise at the input of the demod but the displayed E N will be steady as it compensates for these parameter changes When comparing BER performance for different Modulation FEC schemes against E No the plotted E N already accounts for the changes in Carrier Noise caused by the different Modulation and FEC settings Any BER difference you see with different schemes is a real dif
199. eeeseeeseeeesseeeeseeesseeeas 8 10 1 22 1 IBS SMS Framing ascitic cee eee eee a eae 8 10 E22 2 BD Pan me eee eet ieee een TT 8 17 1 23 Automatic Uplink Power Control ccccccccsccceecseeeceeeeeeeeaeeseeeseeeseeeeaneeeneeseess 8 18 1 23 1 IMFO OU COM aien AA cia a eae eaucacatteass 8 18 T2322 COMMOUMNG AUP Co m 8 18 Jd Tort genre Ni DR AN 8 19 jr Basie I NOON em M r 8 19 T242 SSWITChING PIMIOSODMY sectarian 8 20 124 3 Detected FP ANURCS euo DNI a ces eeu ae nae uae ane ues 8 20 1 24 4 Manual Switchover ccccccccccccccceececeeceseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesees 8 20 1 24 5 1 for 1 Setup Procedure eesesssesssessseeeeee nennen nnn 8 20 1 25 Software Activated Features ccccccccccecccseeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeeesseeesseeesaeeeeas 8 21 t20 Sotware Upgrading TT 8 22 1 27 Partial Insert and Multi destinational Working eeseseeeeeeesseese 8 22 1 28 Choosing Optimum Custom Reed Solomon Values eeeeseuess 8 23 1 29 Bata and SyimDOl ales 2 ex ERREUR Eo 8 25 1 30 Determining Maximum ESC Baud Rates ccccccccececeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeesaeeesaeees 8 26 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 30 1 ID S E E desta ROO S D DADO od d D p pcd Qd D DE DC cu e to M ELA d iSc domm 8 26 1 90 2 ClosediNetwork Plus ESC sere e x ea
200. eeeteeeeeeenees 13 5 1 50 Intelsat Reed Solomon Codec and Custom Option Specifications 13 6 1 51 Drop and Insert Option Specifications cc cccceccsecceeeceeeseeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaass 13 6 1 52 Extended Drop and Insert Option Specifications eeeseeeeee 13 7 1 53 Advanced ESC and Advanced Aux Option Specifications 13 8 1 54 IDR Option 9pecllcallofiSssi deu ur P P Et e a E 13 8 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 59 BERI Oplion SBecIITCaUOFiS 55 555 52 cick uM M M eae NM DESEE PME chek che lsat oe DE ce ECL LE 13 9 1 56 AUP SpeciiCcatlOllsussdie du sve NP d a aa E I eue E T E PUE ee 13 10 IS Data Rae SpeciHeallofiS ain adacetacodeculcendesadcaa dade qud qu quM QUE Ta IPIE T DUM qve qedi0U 13 10 1 58 Trafic Log Specifications sirsie iie eee epus eec eue ce suc ee ue su e ene a ua 13 12 R99 COMINGS PSEII CAL OMS rarae tX a REDIISUDTUUUUU RU SEU MIUSMINUSMUSMdUEUE 13 12 M60 terret TERITIG ousssenvadtieieiv e maritus vesti ao Rat eSao etie eun ema DRt IE yun OR IAN ERU Cn Uu uia UUEE 13 13 TOI BUC PENB TAG T MM 13 13 102 Pettormatice Graphs scecceco edtetseoninodi pino n a e m qdpe qune t pite vet Ex c bum expe p qvas 13 14 Chapter 14 Advanced Framing 2er eode ee deve de22502e6osa ique Ceoaio suia secos i sse Ceca omui aee 14 1 Chapter HEECII iad 15 1 Chapter
201. een sounded a conventional unpredistorted 16QAM constellation is transmitted The resulting demodulated constellation is captured and displayed in the top right of the predistorter monitor pane The Tx constellation is then modified in such a way as to optimise the received constellation 6 When the Rx EVM converges to a stationary value or when the required number of algorithm iterations has been completed the adaption process stops The resultant Tx constellation can then be saved allowing it to be recalled if necessary some time later Note that it is necessary to go through this learning process whenever the operating point of the HPA is changed Consequently it may be convenient to generate and save the predistortion information for all HPA operating points in advance and simply select the appropriate saved configuration whenever the HPA operating point is changed 7 The predistorted Tx constellation and resulting Rx constellation are shown bottom left and right respectively of the monitor pane Note that not all nonlinearities can be equalized fully This is especially the case if the nonlinearity is being driven well into saturation or if the nonlinearity is hard limiting For further information on the predistorter please consult the white paper available at the Paradise Datacom website 7 4 PARADISE DATACOM S QUANTUM SERIES E STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Local SUMMARY Predistorter ID Paradise modem Serial
202. ellite Actions Other CM Carrier mute TF Tx flow control CTS Clear To Send line is switched off RF Rx flow control RR Receive Ready line is switched off 12 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 38 Transmit Faults FautText Notes Relays To Ter Tx fault External Tx clock The modem is set to use an external clock but no clock is selected but no clock being provided The clock generation will use the internal from interface clock as a backup to maintain the carrier and signal integrity Check the data connector is attached and check for activity on the clock input lines Tx fault Data Ready Input The DRI line has been de asserted by the data source active feeding the modem indicating a unit fault with data source Tx fault Signal Valid Input The SVI line has been de asserted by the data source active feeding the modem indicating it wished to disable transmission If the carrier is set to RTS Enabled the carrier will be muted Tx fault Data input is all The data supplied to the modem is all ones AIS This is ones AIS indicating normally used to indicate an upstream equipment fault It upstream equipment fault is not a modem fault This alarm can be switched off if required using the Edit Unit Advanced Alarms Actions menu Tx fault Frame sync lost The modem detects frame synchronisation when the Drop on Tx input Check beare
203. em Routes 0 15 2 d Routes 16 31 b d Routes 32 47 Y Routes 48 63 Header Compresion erial No 10500355 i Mode In control Destination Subnet mask Click to apply routes Control Shared Route 1 10 0 30 1 255 255 0 0 UNIT STATUS n RX TRAFFIC TX TRAFFIC O TEST MODE Route 4 TX CARRIER Route 5 F Route 6 Route 7 C Heip Route 8 Enter each static route values Route 9 1 Route 10 reate the routes The modem Route 11 ay take 30 40 seconds to omplete this task Route 12 F 3 Route 13 Route 14 S u IM s T ia Header Compression Configuration Screen 7 177 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 20 16 Fetching Web Pages from a Remote Modem When a framed service is selected it is possible to use the ESC channel to fetch web pages from a remote modem thereby allowing M amp C control of the remote modem via the normal web interface Because the ESC channel is low rate the modem implements this feature in a very efficient manner Instead of fetching each entire web page the local modem sends commands over the ESC channel to fetch the required data which it then populates into a locally generated web page before sending this onto to the web browser The selection of Local or Remote mode is made through the toggle switch on the right hand top corner of each web page as shown below JISE DATACOM VIEW gt TEST HELP s LOGOUT Local Remote Modem Web Interf
204. em to be forwarded to individual email accounts this is the outgoing SMTP mail server name e g smtp yourmailserver com An account name and password may be necessary Fill out the recipients email address subject email title and select the appropriate tick boxes and email reporting interval as necessary The Reply to address field is optional and is the address used to deliver failure notifications in the event that an email cannot be delivered to the recipient s email address 7 172 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook The email configuration screen found under Edit Unit M amp C Email menu tab is shown below 4 PARADISE DATACOM gt QUANTUM SERIES bs STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Local Memory M amp C Clocks Advanced T Upgrade T Network Switch SUMMARY Identity Interface ID Paradise modem Serial No 10500355 Mode In control SMTP Mail Server Control Shared Outgoing mail server 10 0 0 2 Authentication required v UNIT STATUS Account name modem paradise co uk _ Password RX TRAFFIC Email Reporting TX TRAFFIC Distant EbNo v Rx power level v TEST MODE Final BER v AUPC power offset V TX CARRIER Modem temperature v Event log v Current alarms v Configuration memories v meo Spectral data v Constellation data V PRBS BER v Rx EbNo v Rx Frequency Offset vw Unit faults vw Recipient amp Interval Recipient s email test am
205. en Remote Es No 11 3dB Tx 16APSK 8 9 10243830bps ACM On Rx 8PSK 5 6 523830bps ACM Off This screen is constantly updated with the following information some of which potentially change dynamically when ACM is active e The remote modem s Es No energy per symbol to spectral noise density ratio e The transmit path modulation FEC rate and data rate along with the on off status for ACM in the transmit path When ACM is on the modulation FEC rate and data rate will change dynamically in response to changes in Es No e The receive path modulation FEC rate and data rate along with the on off status for ACM in the receive path When ACM is on the modulation FEC rate and data rate will change dynamically in response to changes in Es No ACM operation is described in Section 8 12 14 7 10 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Status BUC Screen Output 40 0dBm Mode Terminal RF 15 3dBm BUC 10 0dB Status 25 C Type 10W 12 8A This screen is available only on L band modems It is updated with the following information e Output this is the output power in dBm at the waveguide flange or Off if the BUC is not transmitting e Mode in Terminal closed loop mode this presents the Terminal RF output power level i e the modem output power to the BUC and the BUC attenuation level In open loop mode Terminal RF and BUC attenuation data is not shown and instead the mode is shown as
206. en Rx mute threshold 0 to 99dB 3 0 Step 0 1dB New 03 0 Units dB Minimum value 0 0 Maximum value 99 0 Step size 0 1 Factory default 3 0 Description User defined Eb No threshold used in sun outages to mute the terrestrial output See previous screen Edit Unit Advanced Operation Ack Pwr Brk Screen This allows the transmit carrier to be restored following a mains power failure if the transmit carrier control has been set to on mute if outage Please see Edit Tx Carrier menus Edit Unit Advanced Operation End Demo Screen This allows the modem demonstration test shot features to be turned off therefore effectively losing the remaining balance of demonstration time left and returning the modem to a state whereby it is using only permanent SAF features that have been set Edit Unit Advanced SAF Code Screen New SAF code Factory default None Description Encrypted code for enabling Software Activated Features Enter O to enable a free 10 day test shot of all features Three test shots are available and may be activated singly or together one after another to 7 136 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook give up to a 30 day test period Edit Unit Advanced Adj Ref Screen Only applicable on L band modems Adjust 10MHz reference 080 080 This allows the frequency of the internal 10MHz reference to be adjusted by using the up and down arrows This
207. en IP over ESC has been selected This pushes the serial M amp C data across to the distant end Modem via the IP ESC for use at the remote serial ports This link is a serial extension for control of distant end equipments IP Remote This allows the serial M amp C data received via IP from the local Modem to be used at the distant end serial ports Uses TCP port 6703 This link is a serial extension for control of distant end equipments Please refer to following pinout definition table Note that this mode is deprecated and P Remote Hem M amp C should be used 7 118 Factory default Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook instead IP Remote Rem M amp C This allows the serial M amp C data received via IP from the local Modem to be used at the distant end serial ports Compared to P Hemote mode this setting changes the direction of the driven lines from the distant end Modem to account for RS485 cabling differences Uses TCP port 6703 This link is a serial extension for control of distant end equipments Please refer to following pinout definition table IP Forward to Remote Only available when IP over ESC has been selected This takes advantage of the local IP address and forwards M amp C information directly to the remote Modem Uses TCP port 6703 This link is a serial extension for control of distant end equipments RS232 The following diagrams show how the M amp C inter
208. ence Screen 10MHz reference Off 1 Off 2 On By selecting On the modem s internal 10MHz reference signal can be sourced from the modem up the coaxial site cable to the BUC Edit Tx Carrier Advanced BUC Output Screen BUC carrier This switches the BUC Tx carrier on and off independently of the modem s Tx carrier on off control This may be useful where one BUC carries several carriers passively combined but with one modem providing DC 10MHz Ref FSK and you wish to mute all the carriers Edit Tx Carrier Advanced BUC Attenuation Screen BUC attenuation 15 to OdB 15 Step 1dB New 15 7 59 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Units dB Minimum value 0 Maximum value 15 Step size 1dB Factory default 0 Description This allows the user to vary the attenuator in the BUC Typically this is used when there is a short run from the modem to the BUC made with reasonable quality cable and where with a low loss the minimum output from the modem could saturate the BUC input unless the attenuator early in the BUC gain profile is set suitably high If in doubt always start with the minimum modem Tx carrier level and the maximum BUC attenuation Edit Tx Carrier Advanced BUC 1 for 1 Screen Mute services in Standby Off 1 Off 2 On This controls whether BUC services i e DC supply and 10MHz reference stay with the on line modem or switch to the standby modem whe
209. erating a configuration on one downloading it to a PC and then uploading it to other modems in turn When recalling a configuration memory the LOAD DEFAULTS memory will reset the modem to its factory defaults If LOAD DEFAULTS is selected from the web user interface then the modem ss current M amp C IP address netmask gateway giveaway takeaway control Modem ID and password are all retained whereas when selected from the local user interface they are not this is in order not to break the web user interface session which could risk losing control of the modem The screens for downloading and uploading configuration memories are shown over the page 7 159 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 4PARADISE DATACOM 9 QUANTUM SERIES STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Memory i Download Download Stored Configuration SUMMARY Control Shared Configuration File Size Date ee 1 conf 1688 bytes 13 Jul 2005 15 27 RX TRAFFIC 9 conf 1688 bytes 14 Jul 2005 11 40 C TX TRAFFIC mycurrentconfig conf 1702 bytes 14 Jul 2005 11 41 C TEST MODE Download Stored Configuration TX CARRIER Help List of all the configurations stored on this modem that can be downloaded and stored on he local computer Select required configuration then click the Download Stored Configuration button Configuration Memory Download Screen PARADISE DATACOM i QUANTUM SERIES
210. erleaver synchronisation words will be more noticeable equivalent to a loss of t 1 when t 5 20 loss as opposed to t 710 10 loss On the negative side the longer the codeword the proportionally higher the delay through the encoder decoder and interleaver deinterleaver The delay of the combined encoder and decoder is approximately 8 x 2 x n k 60 bits and the interleaver amp deinterleaver a further 8 x n x depth bits if calculating the delay use the data rate inc framing and Reed Solomon Intelsat recommend an interleaving depth of 4 for rates less than 1544kbps and 8 for rates of 1544kbps and above 8 23 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Practical values for Reed Solomon code rate will depend on the amount of overhead the circuit can tolerate For overheads between 1 6 and 30 the table below gives practical values of n k t with the error correction at its maximum 8 24 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook o h n k t o h n k t o h n k t io emn 204 200 2 187 167 10 111 91 10 208 200 4 163 143 10 210 200 5 153 133 10 8 243 225 9 131 111 10 91 71 10 For other values of overhead o h expressed as 1 xx maximise t then mm fe 241 233 7 mm 7 245 229 8 m 5 LR ms n Round 2 x o h x t o h 1 k n 2t If n is greater than 255 reduce t For some applications particula
211. es the data in IDR audio ESC channel V2 requires the IDR audio mode setting to be 2x16k in V1 or 1x32k in V1 64K 64kbps of Aux data replaces the data in IDR audio ESC channels V1 and V2 requires the IDR audio mode to be set to Off Factory default on Description Controls the Aux channel in IDR mode Allocates Aux data in place of one or both of the IDR voice channels if these are not used or can be used to reduce the 96k overhead to 64k or 32k Requires Aux SAF feature Aux Interface See the description under Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Overhead Closed Network Plus ESC Screens ESC Audio Levels Units dB Minimum value 0 Maximum value 38 Step size 2 Factory default 0 Description Sets the input output levels for the IDR audio ESC channels The two channels can be configured independently Backward Alarm Mode Options Backward alarm 1 4 external Backward alarm 1 internal backward alarm 2 4 external Backward alarm 1 internal backward alarm 2 4 forced okay Backward alarm 1 4 internal 14 24 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Factory default Description Backward alarm 1 4 external Controls routing of multiple backward alarms in IDR mode When internally linked from Rx Fail to BA1 or BA1 4 these alarms respond similarly to the normal single backward alarm Requires Custom SAF feature 14 25 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter
212. escription applies Please note this is per port Signal Description Electrical Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX Line code is fixed as HDB3 for all ports The master clock source for all ports is the lowest active port number that is configured and connected For example if port one is being used then this provides the clock source for all other ports Therefore as far as the clock configuration is concerned all other ports are described as slaves The slaved ports require a bearer to be generated from the modem Alternatively timing may be distributed to the terrestrial equipment modem from a single master clock source f clocking topology is not considered prior to implementing a Quad E1 system then clocking problems may result Note Quad E1 requires an IB SMS service to be selected and if multiple E1s are to be used then additional SAF codes may have to be purchased 2E1 3E1 and 4E1 10 17 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Example RJ45 connectors are shown in the following figure MALE FEMALE Multi Mux Interface The P3706 Quad E1 interface card supports a MUX SAF feature which when enabled via the Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial menu allows the following combinations of terrestrial multiplexed data to be aggregated onto a single satellite carrier EIA530 data IP data Line code is fixed as HDB3 for all E1 ports Other electrical interface rates
213. eway ooo Sets the IP gateway for the Bridge filtering Bridge M amp C v raffic interface Web Acceleration DNS IP Addr Enable VLAN filtering VLAN ID Weighted Qos TCP acceleration mode Interface Configuration Screen Quality of Service is based on IEEE 802 1p priority tagging It uses a 3 bit field within the VLAN tag as a means of prioritising packets The modem responds to the priority level set in the VLAN tag when the packet is received The default is to use strict priority queuing where three queues are established with the highest priority level 7 being sent first followed by the medium priority levels 6 and 5 and finally packets from the low priority levels 4 to 0 queue However if there is a large amount of high priority traffic this can have the effect of starving bandwidth for lower priority traffic Selecting Weighted QoS enables fair weighted queuing This applies a weighting to the three traffic queues where the highest priority data gets most bandwidth but bandwidth is reserved for other lower priority data for every 4 packets sent from the high priority queue 2 are sent from the medium priority queue and 1 from the low priority queue The modem supports IEEE 802 1q VLAN tagging If Ethernet frames with VLAN tags are presented to the modem when in bridge mode then these packets will be transmitted transparently along with the VLAN tags VLAN filtering can also be used with point to multipoint
214. ex setting for the interface but as part of the negotiation will advertise 10Mbps full duplex as the only option available 100M half duplex In this mode the IP Traffic card will auto negotiate both the speed and duplex setting for the interface but as part of the negotiation will advertise 100Mbps half duplex as the only option available 100M full duplex In this mode the IP Traffic card will auto negotiate both the speed and duplex setting for the interface but as part of the negotiation will advertise 100Mbps full duplex as the only option available 1000M half duplex In this mode the IP Traffic card will auto negotiate both the speed and duplex setting for the interface but as part of the negotiation will advertise 1000Mbps half duplex as the only option available 1000M full duplex In this mode the IP Traffic card will auto negotiate both the speed and duplex setting for the interface but as part of the negotiation will advertise 1000Mbps full duplex as the only option available 10M half duplex fixed In this mode the IP Traffic card interface will be fixed to 10Mbps half duplex operation 10M full duplex fixed In this mode the IP Traffic card interface will be fixed to 10Mbps full duplex operation 7 108 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Factory default Description 100M half duplex fixed In this mode the IP Traffic card interface will be fixed to 100Mbps ha
215. explicitly signalled to the terrestrial network A decrease does because it could result in a buffer overflow in the transmit modem if it receives more data than it can transmit Upstream buffer control is achieved by sending Ethernet Pause frames that define a period of time for which transmission should be suspended In principle Pause frames are supported only for full 8 53 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook duplex links and support for them in vendor equipment is optional therefore the modem auto negotiates this capability with the attached equipment Paradise ACM is intrinsically tied to an IP traffic shaper and TCP accelerator allowing data grooming to match data priority to the available bandwidth Without this there would be no effective data management of a dynamically varying channel which would become a free for all where you would not be sure which packets will be passed over satellite and which will be dropped Note that an external traffic shaper cannot be aware of the instantaneous data rate in the modem and is therefore restricted to shaping for the nominal data rate of the link i e for a fixed modcod The Ethernet Pause frame does not help in any way with external traffic shaping its purpose is purely to minimize any packet loss at the point in time when a modcod change occurs It is therefore strongly recommended to use the modem s internal traffic shaping feature in conjunction with A
216. faces may be configured using the IP Local IP Remote and IP forwarding options to facilitate distant end M amp C Please note the first two options form a pipe to transfer messages to the distant end equipments and if M amp C of the Modems is necessary then an alternative provision must be made The third diagram is an alternative illustration of IP Remote and can be facilitated by IP over the main data channel multimux etc 7 119 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook I REMOTE paas xc A port INTERNAL LINE FR OM IP ESC PORT FR OM Mec PC Mei TO DISLANT FMD EQUIPMENTS IPFORWARD TO REMOTE O wa IP REMOTE pas viet OT PORT INTERNAL LINE INIERIMAL LINE I O IP ESL ETHERNET i s PORI FR OM IP ESC FROM M amp C PC M amp C TO DIST ANT IO LOCAL M amp C P ADDR END EQUIPMENTS TCP 703 MAN O 7 ETHERNET PORT FROM IP TRAFFIC FROM M amp C PE M amp C TO DISTANT IO REMOTE M amp C IP ADDR END EQUIPMENT 5 TCP 6703 Description Specifies the remote control serial interface mode 7 120 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook The table below highlights the change in RS485 pinout when P Remote or P Remote Rem M amp C is selected Please refer to chapter 11 for full connector pinouts Name RS485 Paradise Paradise IP Remote IP Remote Rem M amp C Shield Gnd NENNEN Shield Gnd Shield
217. fault Description In this mode VLAN tags are not generated or removed by the modem This means that no filtering of traffic based on VLAN id takes place Since each remote modem receives the same broadcast traffic a device such as a router must be present to filter out any traffic that is intended only for other remote modems On In this mode each remote modem can be assigned a VLAN id which is used by the Hub to tag each packet destined for any device attached to a network off that particular remote modem The tags are added by the Hub Tx modem and removed by the remote modem The remote modem uses the tag to filter out unwanted data that has been broadcast indiscriminately to all remote modems Off Controls whether VLAN tags are being used to implement point to multipoint filtering of traffic at remote modems to filter out unwanted broadcast traffic This option is only available in Hub and Remote Ethernet traffic modes since it is only used in point to multipoint mode where there is a direct return path Edit Unit Interface IP Misc VLAN ID Screen Units VLAN ID 0 to 4094 0000 Step 1 New 0000 Minimum value 0 Maximum value 4094 Step size Factory default 0 Description Sets a specific value of VLAN id This is required only for remote modems assigning a VLAN id to a Hub modem has no effect The VLAN id is used to uniquely identify each remote modem It is used to filter wanted from unwanted I
218. ference it is not necessary to further compensate for the changes in Carrier Noise this change induces You do however have to be aware of Bandwidth considerations You might find a Modulation FEC scheme which gives an exceptional BER for a given E No but it will of little practical value if the bandwidth it requires occupies a whole transponder 8 30 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook When you look at BER performance figures at a specified E N you get the same BER performance whether the data is framed or not Adding framing to a Closed Network link would increase the bandwidth decrease the Carrier Noise decrease the displayed E N as it does not compensate for framing and therefore degrade the BER However when brought back to the same E N you do of course recover the same BER Framing therefore does not degrade the BER for a stated Ej N but it does require more power and bandwidth to achieve the same E No 8 31 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Eb NoExplanatory Diagram cen N dB 1 Measure Carrier Noise Noise Carrier Noise Symbol Transmitted FEC Decoded Composite From Satellite Rate Bit Rate FEC Data Rate Information Rate DEMOD L DECODER M ER L DEFRAMING Es Signal noise expressed Et _ Signal noise expressed Epec _ Signal noise expressed at Eb Signal noise expressed at Mo atthe symbol rate Mo at transmitted bit r
219. figure energy per bit to spectral noise density ratio in large font for easy viewing It shows the user settable Modem Identifier on the bottom line of the screen Selecting the Down arrow displays the following screen Es No gt 15dB ID London New York This screen shows the receive path Es No figure energy per symbol to spectral noise density ratio in large font for easy viewing It shows the user settable Modem Identifier on the bottom line of the screen Selecting the Down arrow displays the following screen BER 1 0E 12 ID London New York This screen shows the receive path final bit error rate BER in large font for easy viewing It shows the user settable Modem Identifier on the bottom line of the screen Selecting the Down arrow displays the following screen 7 13 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Rx power 38dBm ID London New York This screen shows the receive signal power level in large font for easy viewing It shows the user settable Modem Identifier on the bottom line of the screen 7 14 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 3 Edit Menu Edit 1 All 2 1X 3 Rx 4 Unit 5 Memories 6 Redundancy This menu contains the following options All This option leads the user through the most commonly used modem settings giving a quick way of setting up the modem The sequence can be terminated at any time by pressing the MAIN key
220. following options e Service This option allows the selection of the framing mode for the modem e Baseband This option leads to a submenu that allows terrestrial framing timeslots and overhead to be configured e Clocks This allows the transmit path clock source to be selected e Modulation This leads to a submenu that allows the modulation scheme to be configured e FEC This leads to a submenu that contains options for selecting the inner and outer forward error correction FEC schemes e Scrambler This leads to a submenu that allows scrambling to be controlled e Carrier This leads to a submenu that allows the carrier frequency power spectrum inversion and AUPC Automatic Power Up link Control to be controlled 1 19 3 1 1 Edit Tx Service Screen Tx service Closed 1 Off 2 Closed 3 CI ESC 4 IBS SMS 5 IDR 6 0M 73 7 DVBS2 Options Off The Tx service is switched off Closed network This mode adds no overhead to the data and is compatible with other closed network equipment It is provided as part of the base modem Closed network plus ESC This adds the lowest possible overhead to the satellite data to provide whatever ESC rate is selected the variable rate ESC channel can provide up to 70 of the main channel rate It also provides a backward alarm facility Above 32kbps a synchronous scrambler is used in place of the error multiplying V 35 scrambler normally used on closed networks This mode suppor
221. for 1 redundant pair of modems Note that FSK communications will always be switched over 1 71 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Rx Carrier Advanced LNB Type Screen Options Factory default Description LNB type None NEW C 3 635 4 2 GHz None There is no LNB attached Other If you are not using a Paradise LNB select Other and manually configure the LNB parameters C 3 685 4 200 GHz LO Frequency 5150MHz Ku 10 95 11 45 GHz LO Frequency 10000MHz Ku 11 2 11 7 GHz LO Frequency 10250MHz Ku 11 7 12 2 GHz LO Frequency 10750MHz Ku 12 25 12 75 GHz LO Frequency 11300MHz None Allows the user to select a number of Paradise LNBs or Other if another manufacturer s LNB is being used If Other is selected then the following LNB frequency offset screen is displayed Note the Std C LNB uses a high side Local Oscillator LO and the received SHF frequency is LO IF frequency not LO IF as with most other bands This is academic as it is handled automatically by the modem which displays the correct SHF frequency Edit Rx Carrier Advanced LNB Frequency Offset Screen SHF freq offset 99 999 to 99 999GHz 05 15000000 Step 100Hz New 05 15000000 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Units MHz Minimum value 0 Maximum value 65535 Step size 1 Factory default 0 Description Once set all Rx IF frequencies
222. g also referred to as an IEEE 802 1p Priority Tag This is part of a 32 bit field inserted into an Ethernet frame between the MAC address and length field The priority tag has eight possible values each of which maps directly to an equivalent internal class within the modem for which a BIR CIR etc can be set Each packet passed to the modem must have this field set to the appropriate value in order for the modem to recognize the different data streams Note that the modem includes support for IEEE 802 1p priority tagging as an alternative QoS scheme to traffic shaping in its own right In this case the packets must already be tagged at the point of entry to the modem It is a layer 2 feature that uses 8 classes of data 3 bit field to prioritise packets The modem uses the tags to decide which packet to transmit over satellite first when it has more than one packet to send Two modes are supported namely Strict Priority Queuing and Fair Weighting Queuing e Strict priority queuing packets are queued for transmission based solely on their priority highest will always be sent first 8 47 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook e Fair weighting queuing higher priority transmitted first but lower priority packets are given a percentage of the bandwidth to stop total starvation The 8 QoS priority levels are mapped to three TCP IP queues Packets with highest QoS priority level 7 are sent to high pr
223. g AUPC To use the AUPC function the following procedure should be followed 1 Prior to switching on AUPC configure the modems at both ends of the link and ensure the basic satellite link is operating correctly 2 Set the transmit power to achieve the distant Eb No expected under clear sky conditions The ESC channel is automatically configured during AUPC operation and any user ESC channel settings are ignored However use of the ESC channel by the AUPC function will change the bandwidth of the signal and may have a slight affect on the Eb No To counteract this configure the ESC channel to a nominal baud rate of 2400 when setting up 8 18 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 3 Optionally set a target Eb No minimum threshold to generate a Backward Alarm if you want an indication of when the distant Eb No falls below the threshold 4 Set the AUPC mode to monitor the distant Eb No in order to determine if it is working correctly i e the distant Eb No and BER figures will be displayed If the distant end information is not available then the modems are not configured correctly 5 Record the distant Eb No under clear sky conditions and then set the AUPC mode to maintain the distant Eb No 6 Seta target Eb No and set the maximum power level 7 Review the distant Eb No to determine if it is being maintained correctly under differing atmospheric conditions Optionally use the web graphing feature to reco
224. g on the modulation scheme that symbol may convey one BPSK two QPSK three 8PSK or four 16QAM bits of information The diagram below shows how the symbol rate is built up from the data rate Terrestrial Data rate Data rate Data rate Baseband signal IF signal data rate framing framing RS framing RS atsymbolrate modulated FE at symbol rate Clock n 2 ON IF STAGES DIN RS OUTER FEC ERROR Data CODEC Data rate IBS SMS x 1645 Specified as H K 1 2 rate x BPSK 1 Occupied bandwidth increase IDR 96kbps e g 219 201 2 3 rate x32 OPSK 2 1 2 x symbol rate XHK 5 4 rate x45 Intelsat recommended rate x PSK 3 carrier spacing 7 6 rate x 8 7 180AM 4 1 4 x symbol rate Uncoded x1 Example IBS SMS 1 125 112 1 2 rate FEC QPSK Occupied bandwidth b4kbps framing RS coding 153 6kbps 6 8ksps 92 46kHz 68 266kbps f5 8kbps Carrier spacing 107 52kHz Relationship Between Data Rate and Symbol Rate You will see that with 1 2 rate FEC and QPSK a common combination the Symbol Rate is the same as the Data Rate assuming no Framing or Reed Solomon This is a useful combination to check on any data sheet as this will give you the Symbol Rate limits of the modem from which the Data Rate limits in all other modes and combinations can normally be derived 1 30 Determining Maximum ESC Baud Rates Should you wish to determine the exact maximum ESC Baud rates in order to change the overhead alloc
225. gate rate carrier e g two independent 64kbps circuits in one 128kbps carrier Additional Features Paradise products In addition to the basic Intelsat definition above the modem provides the following additional features in IBS SMS mode A high rate ESC channel carried in spare parts of the overhead This allows up to 68 22 32nd of the overhead to be used for ESC providing a 2400 Baud ESC with a 64kbps carrier and proportionally higher ESC rates with higher data rate carriers gt n addition to the Intelsat low rate oversampled async ESC Channel on the shared ESC Aux port the modem when fitted with the IDR option also provides a clock so the port may be used as a synchronous Aux channel The overhead usage can be varied from the one bit per frame TS32 bit 1 defined by Intelsat up to 21 bits per frame providing a synchronous Aux channel at up to 4 396 of the main data rate This may be 8 10 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook used for example with external or internal BER testers to provide a continuous measurement of the live BER IBS SMS Definition Frame Format IBS framing is a derivative of the framing used on 2048kbps PCM bearers within Europe specified in ITU G 732 G 732 specifies a frame of 32 timeslots each timeslot is 8 bits of data and the timeslots are labelled TSO TS31 TSO and TS16 are reserved for special functions leaving the remaining 30 timeslots available for data ie
226. given range inclusive at stops 1o 0Mbps i Enables FastLink low latency LDPC data rates in rate SMbps to 10Mbps the given range inclusive FastLink LDPC Enables FastLink low latency LDPC data rates in rate 10Mbps the given range inclusive 20Mbps FastLink LDPC data Enables FastLink low latency LDPC data rates in rate 20Mbps Midi the given range inclusive 25Mbps FastLink LDPC data Enables FastLink low latency LDPC data rates in rate 25Mbps to the given range inclusive 55Mbps Evolution PD55 or 60Mbps Quantum PD60 FastLink LDPC data Enables FastLink low latency LDPC data rates in rate 60Mbps to the given range inclusive 155Mbps Quantum PD155i only optimized for use with FastLink low latency LDPC 16APSK implementation optimized for use with FastLink low latency LDPC Note that this SAF is not required when using 16APSK with DVB S2 FastLink low latency LDPC FastLink low latency LDPC Software Activated Features continued Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook DVB S2 ACM data Enables DVB S2 ACM feature in Tx to the rate 50kbps to 2Mbps specified data rate Note that DVB S2 ACM Rx is free of charge subject to modem supporting DVB 92 Rx rate 2Mbps to 5Mbps specified data rate rate SMbps to 10Mbps specified data rate DVB S2 ACM data Enables DVB S2 ACM feature in Tx to the rate 10Mbps to specified data rate 20Mbps Quantum PD20 or 25Mbps Evolut
227. he carrier immediately and submit a damage report Carefully unpack all items taking care not to discard packing materials particularly the molded foam inserts Should the unit need to be returned to Paradise Datacom then you should use the original packing carton as it is designed to provide the necessary level of protection during shipment 1 9 Visual Inspection Once unpacked visually inspect the contents to ensure all parts are present and that there are no signs of damage 1 10 Getting Started If the unit is to be rack mounted then adequate ventilation and cooling should be provided This must include leaving adequate clearance around the ventilation holes on the sides and the fan on the back panel Connect the appropriate cables to the Transmit IF and Receive IF connectors at the rear of the unit Output power level can be controlled using the front panel menus The optimum input level for the demodulator is 45dBm 15dB 1 11 Power Up Power the unit and wait for it to complete its nitialization when it will display summary status information For local use from the front panel menu select Main Edit All to define all parameters prior to operation It is also possible to set up the unit from a web browser this is described in Section 7 4 When setting up a number of units it may be preferable to save the configuration settings of one unit and then transfer them to each of the others this procedure is expl
228. he interface type can be selected as Synchronous or Asynchronous Signal Description Circuit Electrical Number Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX Y Clock In AL LN qe E em ELM pe qe 1 RS232 3 RS232 RS232 C Te C pem sem Sig Accpt d Out DA 113 BA 103 CA 105 CB 106 Int Tx Clock Out Lr 114 115 BB 104 CF 109 AB 102 101 Sig Valid In ro 1 DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX 1 lt Clock Out Sig Valid Out COMMON LINES Tee e memores sni A o N C2 NO A o N C2 N Local Loop In 18 Rs232 Remote Loop In 21 Rs232 The maximum synchronous data rate is 100kbps over good quality screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 50kbps to 20m 25kbps to 40m etc Note that this is a synchronous RS232 interface if you need an asynchronous interface then please contact the factory 108 107 141 140 A o N C2 NO A o N oO N 10 7 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook For the Synchronous RS232 interface theinput clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherw
229. he received signal is data transparent 1 16 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook o 6 f Switch the first carrier off Check the Tx power level setting is correct and bring up the second carrier using the selected common transmission frequency and e Check the receive signal level Eb No spectrum and constellation are as expected e Check the received signal is data transparent Switch the second carrier off To avoid non linear distortion ensure adequate HPA back off when using multiple carriers through a single amplifier particularly with higher order modulations when testing at a single site 8 10 11 12 13 14 At each modem set either location information or alternatively the round trip delay to satellite Main 2 Edit 3 Rx 7 Carrier 4 Advanced 2 PCMA 2 Round Trip Delay If location information is entered for the modem position then the satellite delay will be calculated automatically To minimise acquisition time when using a round trip delay the delay should be specified to within 1ms of the nominal value that you have calculated Enable the Tx carrier in the first modem Both demodulators should lock Rx traffic LED should go green Enable the Tx carrier in the second modem Both demodulators should go out of lock Rx traffic LED should go out Please note the combined carrier power will increase by 3dB when the second carrier is enabled Enable Paired
230. he station reference satellite clock or internal reference Fully supported with front panel display of terrestrial error rate based on CRC T1 ESF and G 732 or Frame Alignment Word errors all bearer types Bearer Backup Terrestrial CRC 13 6 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook The IBS SMS or Closed Net Plus ESC overhead maintains the identity of individual Drop Insert Timeslot ID Maintenance timeslots for N21 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 and 30 See extended option below 1 52 Extended Drop and Insert Option Specifications Parameter Modem J Selected timeslots may be independently re ordered on both Tx and Rx paths wer All or only a subset of the received data may be Multi Destinational inserted into the terrestrial bearer on the receive Working RS path for multi Destinational working The IBS SMS or Closed Net Plus ESC is extended Timeslot ID Maintenance to maintain the identity of individual timeslots for all values of N from 1 to 31 Timeslot Re Ordering Both Channel Associated Signalling CAS and Robbed Bit Signalling RBS are fully supported For G 732 Drop Insert CAS signalling is extracted from terrestrial TS16 and carried over the satellite in IBS SMS TS16 and TS48 before re inserting into Signalling the distant terrestrial TS16 For RBS the IBS or Closed Net Plus ESC overheads maintain the identity of the in band signalling and it is re inse
231. hey add an overhead of around 2 596 to the transmitted data Edit Tx FEC FastLink Optimisation Mode Screen The following screen will be shown at this point after the FEC has been selected if FastLink has been selected FastLink optimisation mode Balanced New Low latency Options Balanced Provides performance that is a good balance between low latency and good BER performance It is the best compromise between trying to achieve the low latency of TPC and the BER performance of conventional LDPC 7 34 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Factory default Description Low latency Provides a lower level of latency that attempts to match or beat that of TPC This is at the expense of a small increase typically around 0 3dB compared to Balanced mode in Eb No required to achieve a specific BER level Low BEH Provides better BER performance typically reducing the Eb No required to achieve a particular BER level by around 0 3dB compared to Balanced mode at the expense of higher latency Latency halves as data rate doubles so this mode is suitable for applications that are not latency sensitive and for higher data rate applications nominally 2Mbps and above Short Sets the FastLink optimisation mode FEC design involves a trade off between achieving low latency and good BER performance and the optimisation mode allows performance to be slanted towards one or the other of these
232. ial multiframe this gives two signalling bits ab and in T1 ESF which has a 24 frame terrestrial multiframe this gives four signalling bits abcd The frames in which the bit is robbed are synchronised to the terrestrial multiframe as follows T1 D4 6th amp 12th T1 ESF 6th 12th 18th 24th Stealing the LSB every sixth frame was acceptable when PCM signals conveyed primarily PCM audio as it made a negligible difference to the audio quality However when the PCM network was later used to convey data not just PCM encoded voice only 56kbps of data could be conveyed using 7 bits per timeslot as it was difficult to guarantee the signal would not pass through a link using Robbed Bit Signalling where the 8th bit would be overwritten every 6th frame causing errors on the 64kbps data Signalling Over Satellite Common Channel Signalling CCS With Common Channel Signalling the whole 64kbps signalling channel timeslot must be conveyed from one end of the link to the other and typically this is done on sub primary order satellite circuits thin routes by selecting the timeslot carrying the CCS for Drop Insert as with other data timeslots Special action is required with CCS as the equipment at both ends of the link needs to be configured for the thin route over the satellite so it does not dynamically allocate traffic to a timeslot that is not passed over satellite link Channel Associated Signalling The IBS specification includes an
233. ialogue other languages supported Graphic display backlit high contrast wide angle LCD 17 key tactile full keyboard For multi drop applications R8485 interface For direct to PC applications RS232 interface front panel selectable M amp C port may be directly internally linked to ESC port for over the satellite M amp C without cabling Ethernet 10 100 BaseT via RJ45 embedded Web server SNMP agent V1 V2c V3 1 1 redundancy controller built in Y cables passively split data maintaining impedances IF inputs outputs are passively split combined outside the units Off line unit tri states data outputs and mutes Tx carrier 1 N up to 16 supported for many interface types Monitor 0 10V analogue output Signal level Eb No or Rx offset frequency on Alarms amp AGC connector 13 12 Alarm Relays User Interface Remote Monitor and Control Redundancy Features Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook echanical handles and rear panel connectors and fans 100 240VAC 10 6 1A at 100V 0 4A at 240V 47 63Hz Fused IEC connector live and neutral fused 48 Volts DC option EMC EN55022 Class B Emissions EN55082 Part 1 Immunity AC Mains inrush surge current at power up 25A 250V Modem uses 3 15A slow blow fuses in all cases Maximum power consumption fully loaded is approx 105W Earth leakage current is approx 2mA 250V Power Supply Mains data 1 60 Inte
234. idth and the potential for interference from adjacent carriers A factor of 2096 is the most bandwidth efficient Edit Tx Carrier Advanced AUPC Menu AUPC 1 Mode 2 Target Eb No 3 Power offset This menu contains the following options e Mode This controls the ability to attempt to maintain the remote Eb No at a specified target level by varying the local modem transmit power level e Target Eb No This is used to set a target Eb No for the distant modem that this modem tries to maintain by adjusting the transmit power level e Power offset This sets the maximum increase in transmit power level that can be made to maintain the distant Eb No Edit Tx Carrier Advanced AUPC Mode Screen AUPC mode Off 1 Off 2 Monitor 3 Maintain Options Off Monitor remote Eb No In this mode the modem will monitor the Eb No of the remote modem via 7 46 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Factory default Description the ESC without making any changes to the Tx power level Maintain remote Eb No In this mode the modem will attempt to maintain the remote Eb No at the specified target level As with Monitor remote Eb No above it uses the ESC to maintain the distant end Eb No Off This controls the AUPC mode of operation Note that both modems must be placed in either Monitor or Maintain mode for AUPC to work Typically the local controlling modem is placed in Maintain mode and the re
235. ill always be sent first e Fair weighting queuing higher priority transmitted first but lower priority packets are given a percentage of the bandwidth to stop total starvation The implementation of IEEE 802 1p is as follows e The 8 QoS priority levels are mapped to three TCP IP queues in the modem e Packets with highest QoS priority level 7 are sent to high priority TCP IP queue e Delay sensitive packets QoS levels 6 and 5 are sent to the medium priority queue e The remainder QoS levels 4 to 0 are sent to the low priority TCP IP queue e For strict priority queuing all packets in high priority queue are processed before any in medium priority queue which in turn are processed before any in the low priority queue For fair weighting queuing for every 4 packets sent from high priority queue 2 are sent from medium queue and 1 from low priority queue Off 7 106 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Description Enables IEEE 802 1p IP packet prioritisation Edit Unit Interface IP Misc Modem Duplex Screen Options Factory default Description Modem duplex Half duplex New Full duplex Half duplex Selects half duplex mode for the base modem terrestrial IP traffic interface This is the safest mode to use if unsure It must be selected when the modem is connected using an Ethernet hub where more than one hub port is being used The base modem will either transmit
236. imeslots Maintain ID Screen Options Factory default Description Maintain timeslot ID over satellite Off 1 Off 2 On Off Timeslot identity will not be maintained On The modem will activate the satellite CAS multiframe in order to provide timeslot identity maintenance for certain numbers of timeslots Off Set to on if timeslots contain different data streams set to off if timeslots are all part of the same stream Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Timeslots Idle Code Screen Options Factory default Description Dropped timeslots Leave on bearer 1 Leave on bearer 2 Replace with Idle code Leave on bearer he Tx data remains on the bearer and wil be accessible to downstream equipment unless Rx data is inserted over it Replace with Idle code The Tx data is replaced as follows MSB to LSB G 732 timeslots are replaced with 01010101 G 732 CAS in TS16 is replaced with 0101 if CAS signalling is active T1 D4 and T1 ESF timeslots are replaced with 10000000 Leave on bearer Controls whether dropped timeslots are replaced with Idle code If the Rx 14 9 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook data is to be inserted into the same timeslots as the Tx data has been dropped from then the Rx data will replace the Tx data and therefore this setting is irrelevant In G 732 timeslot O is never replaced with Idle code Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Overhead Menu Overhead 1 C
237. imum data rate for TPC is 60Mbps for DVB S2 is 90Mbps and for FastLink is 100Mbps 29 56 NESSES C1 01 48 97 35 CQ N o S9 loo _ gt ora AISIA OS olo Q3 NO CO Oo Bo Co won SLIKE NIO A N Co On gt ss es eS O 1O O1 13 11 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 58 Traffic Log Specifications Parameter Modem Capacity Over 6000 entries Entrv Format Fault message with time and date stamp Z Separate entry when fault clears changes 1 59 Common Specifications Parameter Interface Loop Local and Remote Framer Loop Local RS Loop Local Loop backs FEC Loop Local Deframer Framer Loop Remote Internal IF loopback local automatically matching Rx IF frequency to Tx Transmit CW Pure Carrier Test Modes Transmit Alternate 1 0 Pattern Wideband spectrum analyzer displa 4 Independent Change Over Contacts Unit Fault Rx Traffic Fault Tx Traffic Fault Deferred Alarm backward alarm BER or Eb No below user set threshold Revised embedded software may be downloaded Embedded Software into FLASH memory via Ethernet port with modem remaining in equipment rack Contguwaton Memes 20 configurations can be stored and recalled from Configuration Memories the front panel or remote M amp C Memories can be labeled with text string to aid identification Clear and intuitive operator interface with plain English d
238. in order to use the bridged TCP acceleration mode Any UDP packets will be bridged over satellite in this mode Bridge mode This allows selection of the mode of operation of the modem Ethernet bridge See Section 8 12 for further details of bridge operation 7 94 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface IP Mode Bridge M amp C Screen Options Factory default Description Bridge M amp C Off 1 Off 2 On Off In this mode the Remote M amp C Ethernet interface will not be included in the Ethernet bridge thereby keeping IP traffic and M amp C traffic separate When separate the two Ethernet connectors on the base modem are no longer interchangeable Note that care should be taken in selecting this mode for a remote modem if the two cables have been mixed up then M amp C communications with the modem will be lost On In this mode the Remote M amp C Ethernet interface is included in the Ethernet bridge thereby allowing IP traffic and M amp C traffic to be via either one cable or via two cables with them being interchangeable in relation to the two physical Ethernet ports on the base modem On Controls whether the Ethernet M amp C interface is included in the Ethernet bridge or whether the Remote M amp C and IP traffic interfaces are isolated from each other 7 95 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface TCP Accelerat
239. ing user interfaces e A built in local user interface provided via the modem front panel e A built in remote web user interface that provides web pages from the modem using a web server to a web browser There are also serial and Ethernet remote control interfaces that allows the built in interfaces to be replaced or supplemented by an alternative means of modem control These use a proprietary command protocol called the Paradise Universal Protocol PUP This can be used either directly over a serial RS232 or RS485 interface e g via a HyperTerminal session or via Ethernet e g via a Telnet session The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v1 v2c and v3 are also supported 1 17 User Names Passwords and Modem Control The modem can be controlled by either a local user via the local front panel or a remote web user In addition a remote user can either have full control over the modem or be restricted to viewing modem information Access to the modem is controlled by passwords These concepts are explained in the following sections 1 17 1 Local Mode On shipping from the factory the modem defaults to Local mode which allows control of the modem from the front panel interface only Web users can however log in and view the modem settings while the modem is in Local mode Note that SNMP is disabled by default and therefore cannot be used as an alternative method of remote control until it is enabled When SNMP is enabled
240. iochronous Doppler Receive Doppler buffering is required because the incoming data from the satellite is subject to Doppler shift which occurs in an approximately 24 hour cycle The Doppler shift is due to the satellite movement relative to the earth and is directly proportional to its station keeping accuracy Towards the end of a satellites life when its station keeping is degraded to save fuel the Doppler shift on incoming signals increases and buffers may have to be increased in size The receive buffer acts as a elastic store or FIFO First In First Out memory gradually emptying and filling to absorb the difference over the 24 hour period If the clock signals within the system all originate from one source then the buffer will never be exceeded it will simply slowly fill and empty over this 24 hour cycle Plesiochronous This refers to buffering needed when there is more than one clock in the system and a buffer is required to absorb the difference between the two clocks Typically data is placed into the buffer with one clock and removed with another thus causing a gradual continuous filling or emptying of the buffer causing slips on a regular basis The period between buffer slips when it is totally full or empty will be constant and proportional to the difference between the two clocks A buffer will provide both functions it simply depends on how the system clocking is arranged whether it provides Doppler buffering or a co
241. ion PD25 DVB S2 ACM data Enables DVB S2 ACM feature in Tx to the rate 20Mbps specified data rate Quantum PD20 or 25Mbps Evolution PD25 to 60Mbps Quantum PD60 or 55Mbps Evolution PD55 DVB S2 ACM data ACM6 Enables DVB S2 ACM feature in Tx to the rate 60Mbps to specified data rate 100Mbps DVB S2 ACM data ACM7 Enables DVB S2 ACM feature in Tx to the rate 100Mbps to specified data rate 155Mbps Adaptive equalizer Receive adaptive equalizer for FastLink SCPC operation Implements a 9 tap filter that removes inter symbol interference caused by group delay at the edges of transponders allowing higher throughput on the transponder enm lle 60Mbps to 155Mbps Enables TCP and UDP payload compression compression compliant to RFC 1951 DEFLATE Software Activated Features 6 12 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 15 Front Panel UNIT STATUS O o gt Paradise Batacon PREG sarete maser mma n 19nbps Eauduidth Sauing Q e e PARADISE DATACDM TEST MODE Sateiiite feden e QUANT UM SERIES Modem Front Panel The front panel comprises e LEDs light emitting diodes that provide basic modem status e ALCD liquid crystal display display that acts as the main user interface e A keypad for alphanumeric entry and menu selection 1 15 1 LEDs The five LEDs display warning and fault information as shown below Green Unit OK Red Unit fault Green
242. ion Screen TCP accelaration No TCP acceleleration New No TCP accelaration Options TCP acceleration mode This mode provides routing of non TCP packets combined with acceleration of TCP packets using a Performance Enhancing Proxy PEP that overcomes performance problems associated with using standard TCP over satellite No TCP acceleration TCP acceleration is turned off Factory default Description This option is available in routing mode In bridging mode acceleration is selected via the Ethernet mode control No TCP acceleration mode 7 96 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface IP Mode Round Trip Delay Screen Round trip delay 0 to 999ms 520 Step 1 New 520 Units ms Minimum value 0 Maximum value 9999 Step size 1 Factory default 520 Description This allows a satellite round trip delay to be entered This is used only in conjunction with the modem s TCP acceleration feature It is used to set the size of the modem s internal packet buffer to match the bandwidth delay product for the link i e the link s data capacity multiplied by the end to end delay When TCP acceleration is operating at its maximum throughput level this helps to maintain the throughput at a steady level avoiding perturbations that can otherwise occur Edit Unit Interface IP Mode Payload Compression Screen Payload compression Off 1 Off 2 On Options
243. ion and Operating Handbook Selecting IDR Rx tone on enables a 1KHz OdBm level tone to be generated towards the terrestrial equipment in both audio channels Note that these are toggle on off functions and when disabled will be shown as hashed out 7 150 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 20 Web User Interface The modem includes an embedded web server that allows full monitoring and configuration of the modem via a web browser available on port 80 Secure connections via HTTPS port 443 are also supported Microsoft Internet Explorer V6 0 and above is supported as standard Paradise Datacom has a policy of avoiding the use of non standard browser extensions in its software wherever possible but cannot guarantee correct operation with any other browser although from time to time we do check operation with other popular browsers In general the web menus are structured in a similar way to those on the front panel LCD display Consequently this section explains only those features of the web interface that are different CAN CONFUSE ETHERNET SWITCHES ON THE NETWORK AND CAUSE PACKET STORMS THAT MAY BRING YOUR NETWORK DOWN THIS IS BECAUSE THE SWITCH WILL SEE THE PACKETS LOOPED BACK THROUGH THE MODEM AS AN INDICATION THAT THE NETWORK DEVICES THAT ORIGINALLY TRANSMITTED THOSE PACKETS HAVE MOVED TO A DIFFERENT SWITCH PORT AND WILL THEREFORE RETRANSMIT ALL RECEIVED PACKETS AGAIN AD INFINITUM f NO
244. iority TCP IP queue Delay sensitive packets QoS levels 6 and 5 are sent to the medium priority queue The remainder QoS levels 4 to 0 are sent to the low priority TCP IP queue For Strict priority queuing all packets in high priority queue are processed before any in medium priority queue which in turn are processed before any in the low priority queue For Fair weighting queuing for every 4 packets sent from high priority queue 2 are sent from medium queue and 1 from low priority queue The following example shows a traffic shaping scheme based on priority tagging ial x gt ChitFs Shaping Test Modem 1 10 1 70 1 Windows Internet Explorer m y T F http 7 10 1 70 14statusdual php r ty X Live Search E vr d Sois Shaping Test Modem 1 10 1 70 1 ey gt Bl ash Page Tools STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT SUMMARY t Network ID Cliff s Shaping Test Modem 1 Serial No 10802119 Made In control Control Shared mE CIR bps BIR bps Priority UNIT STATUS Class RX TRAFFIC 100000 so0000 F TA TRAFFIG 100000 500000 6 gt 2 100000 1000000 5 3 100000 1000000 4 4 100000 1000000 3 5 100000 1000000 2 6 200000 s00000 1 Help Move the cursor over an item s 7 200000 800000 o x label for help Total 1000000 Tx data ia 1000000 H TEST MODE TX CARRIER 1 32 9 4 4
245. ipment Radio Disturbance Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement 2 Immunity EN 50024 1998 A1 2001 A2 2003 Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement Extensive testing has been performed to ensure that the unit meets these specifications when configured with any or all of its available hardware options To ensure that the modem maintains compliance with electromagnetic compatibility standards please observe the following points The equipment must be operated with its cover on at all times If it is necessary to remove the cover for any reason then you must ensure that the cover is correctly refitted before normal operation For the baseband data interfaces all D type connectors must have grounding fingers on the plug shell to guarantee continuous shielding The back shells must comply with the requirements of VDE 0871 and FCC 20708 providing at least 40dB of attenuation from 30 MHz to 1 GHz A good quality cable with a continuous outer shield correctly grounded must be used Connections to transmit and receive IF interfaces must be made with double screened coaxial cable for example RG223 U 4 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter5 Installation 1 8 Unpacking Prior to unpacking inspect the exterior of the shipping container for any sign of damage during transit If damage is evident contact t
246. is used by the modem for traffic purposes when configured for IP traffic Note that entering an IP address of 0 0 0 0 causes the modem to dynamically request an IP address from a DHCP Dynamic Host Control Protocol server on the network removing the need to allocate static IP addresses to each modem The allocated IP address can be seen on the View Unit Config Unit screen Note that the IP address may take a short period before it appears as the request to the DHCP server is made every minute until a reply is received Note that when the IP 7 123 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook address is changed any device such as a PC that was previously communicating with the modem may take several minutes to recognize the new address unless the ARP table on the device is flushed the ARP table is used to match IP addresses and MAC addresses Edit Unit M amp C IP Subnet Mask Screen Remote control port IP netmask 255 255 000 000 New 255 255 000 000 Factory default 255 255 0 0 Description Sets the remote control port IP subnet mask The same IP subnet mask is used by the modem for traffic purposes when configured for IP traffic Edit Unit Clocks Screen Station clock source None 1 None 2 BNC 3 RS422 Options None BNC RS422 Factory default None Description Controls the station clock source to be used in place of either the internal 10MHz reference or to replace only the Rx
247. ise Datacom Evolution Series PD10 L band Satellite Modems Paradise Datacom Evolution Series PD25 IF Satellite Modems Paradise Datacom Evolution Series PD25 L band Satellite Modems Paradise Datacom Evolution Series PD55 IF Satellite Modems Paradise Datacom Evolution Series PD55 L band Satellite Modems Paradise Datacom Quantum Series PD20 IF Satellite Modems Paradise Datacom Quantum Series PD20 L band Satellite Modems Paradise Datacom Quantum Series PD60 IF Satellite Modems Paradise Datacom Quantum Series PD60 L band Satellite Modems Redundancy Switch operation is documented separately see nstallation and Operating Handbook for Quantum and Evolution Series Redundancy Switches The Quantum PD155i Satellite Modem IP Router is documented in the Installation and Operating Handbook for Quantum PD155i Satellite Modem IP Router Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 2 About This Handbook 1 1 Conventions This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of voltage levels that constitute a dangerous risk of electric shock and serious injury This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating instructions critical to correct system function 1 2 Trademarks All trademarks used in this handbook are acknowledged to be the property of their respective owners 1 3 Disclaimer Although every effort is made to ensure the accuracy and completeness of th
248. ise have caused untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to 7x Clock In the Data In signal is checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to nternal or Rx the Data In signal is checked against the Int Tx Clk Out signal By selecting Advanced it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line CA or Device DTE Ready In line CD switch to the inactive state It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line CA by selecting Change Tx Modulator Carrier RTS Controlled For Asynchronous RS232 interface the Tx Rx AIS detectors and the data marginal detectors are automatically disabled to prevent any unwanted alarms The internal Tx clock output is also automatically used to provide a reference clock to the incoming Async data For best operation Paradise recommends using the Async RS232 interface at least 10 times oversampled For example an Async baud rate of 56 7kbaud requires a Modem bit rate of 512kbit P3702 in G 703 Mode If the G 703 option is fitted to the modem together with either the EIA 530 connector or BNC connector panel then G 703 becomes a front panel software selectable interface If G 703 is selected under Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial then the following interface description applies When G703 interface is selected the Advanced menu allows the mode to be selected The G703 interface
249. isplay This is used when making menu selections and when entering values 1 18 1 2 Navigation Keys Menus are displayed as a hierarchy of sub menus Navigation is performed using either the arrow and ENTEH keys or by entry of the menu identification number that immediately precedes each menu name The Up arrow key navigates between menu options by moving the cursor up one line except when entering a numeric value when it increments the digit highlighted by the cursor Note that when entering the values of timeslots to be dropped or inserted the Up arrow key is used to enter a hyphen The Down arrow key navigates between menu options by moving the cursor down one line except when entering a numeric value when it decrements the digit highlighted by the cursor Note that when entering the values of timeslots to be dropped or inserted the Down arrow key is used to enter a comma The Left arrow key moves the cursor to the left On a menu this is used to navigate between menu options When entering an alphanumeric value it moves the cursor to the preceding digit The Left arrow key has a special function when viewing the system log where it is used to move backwards in the log by 100 entries The Right arrow key moves the cursor to the right On a menu this is used to navigate between menu options When entering an alphanumeric value it moves the cursor to the next digit The Right arrow key has a special function when viewing the system log whe
250. it carrier frequency Receive carrier frequency Transmit terrestrial data rate Receive terrestrial data rate Transmit symbol rate Receive symbol rate Status Traffic Screen Tx OK since 10 14 46 on 6 4 05 Rx OK since 10 14 46 on 6 4 05 Carrier Mute Brk This screen is constantly updated with the following information e When there is no transmit path fault then the message Tx OK since HH MM SS on DD MM Y Y is displayed where HH indicates hours MM indicates minutes SS indicates seconds DD indicates the day of the month MM indicates the month of the year and YY indicates the year When a transmit path fault exists then a fault message is displayed instead that indicates the nature of the fault e When there is no receive path fault then the message Rx OK since HH MM SS on DD MM YY is displayed where the time and date format is as explained above 1 8 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook When a receive path fault exists then a fault message is displayed instead that indicates the nature of the fault The transmit carrier status which displays one of the following o Normaf the carrier is on o Mute Ext the carrier is muted due to an alarm detected by the modem hardware o Mute Ter the carrier is muted due to either the terrestrial Tx RTS pin being active this is an input signal that can be used to mute the carrier under external control as req
251. itched off then the demodulator may not be able to resolve potential phase ambiguities repeatedly making and breaking the RF input to the modem may or may not resolve this Edit Unit Advanced Special Modes Tx Rx Differential Coding Screens Tx differential coding On 1 Off 2 On Factory default On Description If FEC off is selected then further menus are displayed that allow control of whether differential coding is enabled or not only the Tx differential coding screen is shown above Under all normal operating modes both the FEC and differential coding must be On Edit Unit Advanced Special Modes Q323 Compatibility Screens The Q323 interface card was a modified version of the standard Q302 G703 card which could be fitted to P300 series modems The following menu screens allow Quantum and Evolution series modems to be compatible with P300 series modems fitted with Q323 interface cards No additional hardware is required in the Quantum or Evolution modem for this compatibility The Q323 function allows E1 framed data to be modified to solve interaction problems with AIS data 7 131 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Invert Data Q323 Switch 1 Off 1 Off 2 On Options Off Normal non Q323 operation On TS1 31 is inverted Factory default Er Description Controls whether TS1 31 Data is inverted through the modem Note this is the same as SW3 1 within the Q323 definition
252. ite frames no data detected Rx Rx fault PCMA unlocked BONA tniotked Rx fault PCMA unlocked Consult troubleshooting section of Paired Carrier quick L0 T start guide for list of potential causes GPS input to Paired Carrier for calculating the delay to paul Ne Coe ddl satellite has failed Check status of and cable to the check connection external GPS system 12 5 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Fault Text Notes Relays To Ter Other This is as a result of setting the modem to mute terrestrial data on an rx loss of sync where the data Rx fault Terrestrial muted isunmuted when the Eb no threshold is exceeded This due to sync loss is used to counter an excessive number of log entries due to sun outages scintillations causing the demod to continuously go into and out of lock This is a DVB S2 error when valid DVB S2 baseband Rx fault Baseband sync frames are not detected in the DVB S2 satellite frames lost This could be due to corruption due to interference poor signal etc Rx fault No ABIS traffic This is a DVB S2 alarm indicating that no valid MPEG2 transport stream packets were detected within the received DVB S2 satellite frame Rx fault No transport traffic The received DVB S2 satellite frame does not contain a valide baseband frame indicating the the data has become corrupted poor signal interference etc Rx fault Baseband CRC error
253. ither the selection of a value from a list of options or require the entering of a new value Examples of these types of screen are shown below Station clock source None 1 None 2 BNC 3 RS422 Screen Type 1 Menu Selection from Pre defined List IF carrier freq 50 to 90 100 to 180MHz 070 0000 Step 100Hz New 070 0000 Screen Type 2 Entry of New Value Note features that are not available appear on the display are preceded by a There are several reasons why a feature may not be available e The feature is a Software Activated Feature SAF and the appropriate SAF code has not been enabled Please contact Paradise Sales who can issue a SAF key to unlock the feature Alternatively all SAF features can be enabled for a limited time as described in Section 8 5 e The feature is advanced and the user level setting is basic This is a mechanism that has been added to simplify the user interface by hiding options that are less frequently used Advanced features can be displayed using the process described in Section 7 3 3 3 e The feature is available but its use is precluded by the current operational modem settings for example in normal use Reed Solomon n and k values are controlled automatically and cannot be set by the user 7 5 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 Front Panel Menu Structure The menu hierarchy for the front panel is described in
254. jects such as images These images do not form part of the web page and are requested separately by the web browser If the web page contains multiple embedded images or objects then it can take multiple times the satellite round trip time to fetch these since browsers will typically request them serially through a single TCP connection or possibly two to the web server The modem will request all of the images in parallel so that they are available at the modem nearest the web browser when the browser makes the requests for the additional images significantly reducing the time it takes to display a typical web page It is necessary to switch the Web Proxy on only at the modem at the web browser side of the satellite link Off Enables acceleration of HTTP requests 7 98 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface IP Mode DNS IP Address DNS IP addr 000 000 000 000 New 000 000 000 000 Factory default 0 0 0 0 Description Sets the IP address of the DNS server to be used when the Web Proxy in the modem is switched on The DNS server is used to resolve the IP address associated with any domain name used in the web browser The DNS server IP address is normally included as part of the network connection details on Windows PCs Edit Unit Interface IP Mode Tx Rx ACM Mode Screens Tx ACM mode Off 1 Off 2 On This screen is displayed when the Tx service is set to DVB S2
255. k is identical to that which has been supplied to the local modem for transmission over satellite This is not necessarily true for IP data Being packet based IP naturally supports multiplexing of different data streams These streams often have different inherent priority levels and competing demands for bandwidth What is transmitted over satellite often requires careful management both in terms of what is actually sent versus what is filtered out and in relation to the order in which packets from different streams are sent i e the relative priority levels of packets from different streams and the effect this has on packet jitter Traffic shaping essentially controls these two key aspects of traffic management namely access to satellite bandwidth and the level of delay and jitter that is experienced The Paradise traffic shaping feature is controlled via the modem web user interface under Edit Unit Advanced QoS 1 32 9 1 Guaranteed Bandwidth The allocation of bandwidth to a classified data stream can be controlled via the Edit Unit Advanced QoS tab of the web user interface The Commited Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth in bits per second bps that will be allocated to the specified data stream This is the level of bandwidth that is guaranteed under all normal circumstances where the equipment is operating correctly The sum of all CIRs for all classified data streams cannot be more that the transmission data rate
256. ks This controls the station clock source to be used in place of the internal 10MHz reference User This allows the selection of one of two user modes namely basic which restricts user access to just a subset of the most common modem controls whereas advanced mode allows the user to access all options This is not intended to be a security measure it merely removes options from view when not necessary and can therefore simplify modem use Time This allows the time and date to be set Advanced This submenu controls alarm thresholds special modes and allows the entry of SAF codes to activate additional software features in the modem 1 19 3 3 1 Edit Unit Modem Identifier Screen Modem identifier Paradise Quantum modem Paradise Quantum modem Factory default Depends on modem model Description User assigned field typically the unique modem name number or location 7 84 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 3 3 2 Edit Unit Interface Menu 1 Terrestrial 2 IP 3 Quad E1 This menu contains the following options e Terrestrial This allows the selection of the terrestrial interface that is routed through to the main traffic channel of the modem e P This allows set up of the terrestrial and satellite IP ports including mode and addressing e Quad E1 This is used to set up the ports on a Quad E1 or Sat ABIS terrestrial interface card Please see the note below pertaini
257. l as the port number of the TCP or UDP header in the packet 8 44 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Each address has an associated subnet mask that delimits the particular host subnet from the overall network For example if an address is 10 3 0 0 and the mask is 255 255 0 0 then any packet containing the subnet 10 3 will be matched To match on the whole of an address the mask must be set to 255 255 255 255 If matching on a port is also selected then the packet will only be classified as part of the data stream if both the address and the port number match A maximum of 16 data streams are supported each of which has its own CIR BIR and priority level setting S The following example shows a traffic shaping scheme based on matching on source address and source port number Note the Enable shaping checkbox which controls whether traffic shaping is enabled or not Cliff s Shaping Test Modem 1 10 1 70 1 Windows Internet Explorer a T File Edit View Favorites Tools 2 http 10 1 70 1 statusdual php Help we d 3 cliff s Shaping Test Modem 1 10 1 70 1 4 PARADISE DATACOM DL EVOLUTION SERIES n dh co Page Tools STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Loc IBELZASSIUILILEM TEED GEA 008 SUMMARY ID Cliffs Shaping Test Modem Quality of service scheme ip Address Enable shaping v 1 Serial No 10802119 QoS IP address c
258. l be used Should this clock fail then the modem will switch to an internal backup clock Internal The modem outputs a clock on the nt Tx Clock Out line for use by external equipment The clock is normally generated from the internal frequency reference Alternatively a station clock of 10MHz can be applied to the unit and used to synchronise all internal clocks and IF synthesisers which normally use the internal reference Heceive reference The Tx clock is generated from the Rx output clock This is only of any practical use when the Rx clock is set to Satellite or Station clock Station The Tx clock is generated from the station clock Hub Internal Sets the clock source for the Tx path 1 23 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook If the Tx clock is set to Internal a G 703 interface card is fitted but NOT currently selected and the G 703 clock extension SAF feature is enabled then the following menu will be is displayed at this point Use G 703 as clock reference Off New E1 This allows the G703 clock to be forwarded over satellite as a clock reference see Section 8 8 for further details Options OFF E1 T1 Factory default OFF Description This provides a high stability clock over satellite derived from a G 703 card that can be used for clocking any interface in place of GPS 7 24 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 3 1 4 Edit
259. l interface is not G703 the user is asked a further question Generate a G703 clock reference from satellite clock Options OFF E1 T1 Factory default OFF Description Allows a high stability reference signal to be proogated over satellite Any selection on this screen will result in the generated Rx clock for the Rx data path being requested at the Rx data rate and being locked to the satellite signal However if the user selects 71 E1 then the modem will also generate an Alt1 0 timing reference signal at either T1 or E1 on the appropriate G703 port Note that this mode is only accessible when the user selects satellite clock and the selected Terrestrial interface is NOT G703 T1 is not available when EIA530 mode is used as the same physical connector is required for T1 balanced operation Please refer to Paradise application note 002 available from the Paradise web site for further information 8 9 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 22 Framing and Drop Insert Overview 1 22 4 IBS SMS Framing IBS SMS Service Features The Intelsat definition of IBS framing IESS 309 is intentionally very similar to Eutelsats SMS framing EESS 501 SMS QPSK FDMA System Specification as they are both designed to allow common equipment to provide for both services Where a reference is made to IBS framing the text applies equally to SMS framing Standard Features specified in IBS SMS definitions
260. lass Source address port Mode In control QoS HESS Control Shared Class CIR bps BIR bps Priority Source Address Source Mask Source Port E UNIT STATUS 0 500000 900000 o 10 1 70 5 255 255 255 255 21 ap iioi i1 400000 800000 17 10 1 70 2 255 255 255 255 22 TX TRAFFIC sucede 2 50000 1000000 2 x 10 3 80 0 255 255 192 0 23 TX CARRIER 3 50000 1000000 3 10 3 0 0 255 255 0 0 24 EE AERE 4 o o o 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 o 5 o o o 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 o 6 o o o 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 o m 7 o o o 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 o elp Move the cursor over an item s 8 o o o x 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 o abel for help 9 o o o x 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 o 10 o o o 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 o 11 o o o 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 o 12 o o o 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 o 13 o o o 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 o 14 o o o 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 o 15 o o o x 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 o Total 1000000 s 1000000 A v 4 b IL TF M nenet 100 7 As can be seen QoS Class 0 is guaranteed a bandwidth of 500 OO0bps It may be allocated up to 900 OO00bps depending on what is allocated to other QoS classes If no other data is being received then Class 0 will be allocated up to 900 OO00bps if needed 8 45 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Assume at this point when Class 0 idea
261. led signal Received signal containing anly the containing near and far signal component far signal components E Digital Analogue Demodulator Demodulator To modem baseband Ex data processing Quantum Modem Paired Carrier Processing Paired Carrier can be added to existing systems as well as being incorporated into the design of new systems The signal cancellation techniques used guarantees at least 25dB typically 30dB cancellation of the unwanted signal meaning that the uplink and downlink signals can share the same space segment By doubling satellite throughput in terms of spectral efficiency bits s Hz Paired Carrier can be used to cut operational expenses and or free up satellite bandwidth for new applications and services The savings can be used to reduce bandwidth or increase throughput or convert to a higher coding gain to decrease power Both symmetric and asymmetric point to point links are supported Symmetric links typically have similar antenna sizes and use similar power levels at each end of the link whereas asymmetric links wil typically use a larger antenna at one end of the link and a smaller antenna at the other end with dissimilar power levels In the asymmetric case the system can be designed to require signal cancellation at only one end of the link with the unwanted signal at the other end being reduced to a level comparable with system noise Paired Carrier is designed for use in point to point links Fo
262. lf duplex operation 100M full duplex fixed In this mode the IP Traffic card interface will be fixed to 100Mbps full duplex operation 1000M half duplex fixed In this mode the IP Traffic card interface will be fixed to 1000Mbps half duplex operation 1000M full duplex fixed In this mode the IP Traffic card interface will be fixed to 1000Mbps full duplex operation Half duplex Sets the speed and duplex for the IP Traffic card interface Changes will be effective immediately but if an auto negotiated mode is selected then the Ethernet connection to the IP Traffic card may have to be briefly disconnected in order for the change to take effect See the preceding description of the Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial IP Modem Duplex Screen for further general information about what duplex setting is most appropriate Although some of the available options appear somewhat similar the implementation of auto negotiation varies between different manufacturers and consequently Paradise has extended its support in this area to cater for as many combinations as has been found to be needed 7 109 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface IP Misc Bridge Filtering Screen Options Factory default Description Bridge filtering Off 1 Off 2 On Off In this mode the bridge will forward all traffic not destined for the local subnet to the default gateway if one has been sp
263. liser This menu controls a 9 tap adaptive equaliser for FastLink note that DVB S2 has a built in equalizer that is used automatically all the time Typically about 15 of the bandwidth on transponders at the band edges is subject to signal distortion called group delay This causes inter symbol interference due to filters on the transponder processing different frequency components of the signal in different amounts of time This restricts how the transponder band edges can be used In particular large carriers cannot use the band edges without compensating for the problem The FastLink adaptive equaliser which is a SAF feature and requires an add on hardware card compensates for group delay and amplitude distortion 1 19 3 2 6 Edit Rx FEC Menu See the description of the transmit path equivalent 7 68 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Rx FEC Inner Menu See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx FEC Inner FEC Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent The table shown under Edit Tx FEC Inner defines normal operation with respect to FEC mode FEC rate and modulation scheme Edit Rx FEC Inner Rate Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx FEC Outer Menu See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx FEC Outer RS Mode Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx FEC Outer RS Type S
264. lly wants 900 000bps that the Class 1 data stream is flowing at 350 OO00bps Since 350 OO00bps is less than the CIR of Class 1 then it will get all the bandwidth it needs Class O0 will get its guaranteed 500 000 bps but will be allocated only an additional 150 OO0bps bringing its total to 650 OO00bps because this is all of the spare bandwidth and is less than the Class O BIR value In another example assume Class 2 is being received at 400 OO00bps and Class 1 at 950 OOObps In this situation the Class 1 data stream will be allocated 800 OOObps its maximum while Class 2 will be allocated only 200 OO00bps The spare bandwidth is allocated to Class 1 first because it has a higher priority When the BIR of Class 1 is reached the remaining spare bandwidth will be allocated to Class 2 1 32 9 4 2 Diffserv DSCP Class It is possible to classify data streams based on the Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP value in the IP packet header The DSCP class bits are the top three bits of the DS field in an IP header the other three bits of the field indicate drop precedence which can be mimicked using the Priority setting for the stream in the modem Each packet passed to the modem must have this field set to the appropriate value in order for the modem to recognize the different data streams The modem maps the eight possible DSCP classes directly to eight equivalent internal modem classes each of which can be allocated its own CIR BIR etc D
265. losed ESC 2 1BS SMS 3 IDR This menu contains the following options Closed ESC This controls the overhead in Closed Network plus ESC mode allowing the high rate asynchronous ESC channel to be set up The different options are presented as a sequence of screens that configure all aspects of the overhead IBS SMS This controls the overhead in IBS SMS mode allowing both the low and high rate ESC channels to be set up The different options are presented as a sequence of screens that configure all aspects of the overhead IDR This controls the overhead in IDR mode allowing the IDR 8kbps ESC channel and audio channels to be set up and the routing of multiple backward alarms in IDR mode It also allows Aux data to be allocated in place of one or both of the IDR audio channels if these are not used or it can be used to reduce the standard 96kbps overhead to 64 or 32kbps The different options are presented as a sequence of screens that configure all aspects of the overhead 14 10 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Overhead Closed Network Plus ESC Screens The following sequence of screens will appear consecutively when the Closed ESC overhead option is selected ESC interface baud rate 9600 baud New 9600 baud ESC Baud Rate Screen ESC interface character length 8 bits 1 7 bits 2 8 bits ESC Character Length Screen ESC interface parity polarity None
266. lt message Rix path okay since OR last Rix fault message Tx carrier status DEMOOULATOR Eb Ho OR Ez Ha Final BER Rx power level Buffer status Rx frequency offset Humber of buffer slips overflows and underflows FCMA Faired Carrier lock status Paired Carrier frequency offset Paired Carrier satellite delay ACH Remote Ez Ma ACh Tx modod ACh Tx data rate Tx ACM on off status ACh Rx madcad ACh Rx data rate Rx ACK an aff status BUC Output power of BUC Output power ta BUC BUC attenuation BUC temperature BUC class BUC current lewel MISC AUPC Remote Eb Ma Power offset ESC link status Target EBS No Positive power offset limit Hegative power offset limit Slew rate Rx carrier lass action 1 FOR N Switch status ABIS ABIS compression ABIS bandwidth ABIS dropped TRAU count Large font Large fant Eb Ma ANDO Modem identifier Large font Ez Mao AMD Modem identifier Large font Final BER AND Modem identifier Large fant Rx power lewel ONO Modem identifier Front Panel Status Menus l 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 Setup 2 Traffic 3 Demodulator 4 PCMA 5 ACM 6 BUC 7 Misc The Status menu contains the current modem status split over several screens as described below Status Setup Screen Tx 70 0000MHz Rx 74 0000MHz 2048000bps 2048000bps 4096000sps 4096000sps This screen is constantly updated with the following information Transm
267. m can be as high as 60 It is widely acknowledged that ROHC is the most suitable available header compression technology for use over satellite and outperforms older technologies such as Compressed Real Time Protocol CRTP and IP Header Compression IHCP Note that because the header compression is applied only over the satellite portion of the link and results in the original packets being recreated upon receipt the compression process is completely transparent It is possible to specify which data streams routes compression should be applied to see the screenshot overleaf Each route consists of a Destination IP Address and Subnet 7 176 gt Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Mask There is a checkbox for each route that enables the route when selected This allows the user to apply header compression to selected routes The following will be compressed when the feature is enabled e The Ethernet header will be compressed on every frame e IP and UDP headers will be compressed when the IP payload contains a UDP packet The IP header can only be compressed when the packet contains a UDP transport layer payload e IP UDP and RTP headers when the IP payload contains both a UDP and RTP packet b a 4 PARADISE DATACOM STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP J LOGOUT Local i SUMMARY Memory Identity Interface h d M amp C Upgrade Network ID Paradise mod
268. m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors Check the phase of the Data In with respect to the Clock Out line It is possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line by selecting Edit Tx Carrier RTS enabled 10 11 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook X 21 DTE Operation This has only a clock to the modem from the terrestrial equipment Configure a cable with a 15 pin D male at one end X 21 DTE and a 25 pin D male at the other end as follows X 21 DTE Signal RS422 Circuit Electrical 15 pin D male Description Name Number Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX T COMMON LINES Sig gnd Ls 0 Signal Ground ses To emm Y Prot gnd 1 Shield Prot m ground Clocking For the interface to function as X 21 the clocking must be set as follows The Tx Clocks menu should be used to take the single clock from the terrestrial by selecting Tx Clock In The Rx Clocks menu should also be set to ret
269. m and insert into different timeslots however the data frames containing RBS are placed in the same relative positions within the terrestrial multiframe by the Insert MUX in order to preserve RBS 14 4 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Framing CRC Screen Process bearer CRC Ignore CRC New Ignore CRC Options Ignore CRC Specifies that the terrestrial G 732 frame does not contain a checksum or it should be ignored Check CRC Specifies that the terrestrial G 732 frame does contain a checksum that should be checked for errors If enough errors accumulate then a Tx Drop MUX BER alarm will be raised Input BER gt 1E 3 Factory default ignore CRC Description This option is applicable only with G 732 Drop Insert bearers and controls the processing of any terrestrial checksum Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Framing CRC Frame Re acquisition Screen Frame re acquisition on CRC loss Normal New Normal 14 5 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Options Normal Specifies that no attempt is made to re acquire terrestrial Drop Insert frame synchronization if CRC synchronization cannot be achieved within 8ms Resync if CRC lost for 8ms Specifies that re acquisition of the terrestrial Drop Insert frame synchronization should occur if CRC synchronization cannot be achieved within 8ms Factory default Normal Desc
270. manding applications allowing a single FEC to potentially replace the use of multiple existing FECs If one FEC is to be used in place of all others then Paradise believes you should choose one with flexible configuration as opposed to a fixed set of modulation and code rates that are inevitably a compromise FastLink is available on all Paradise SCPC modems at all data rates up to 100Mbps FastLink LDPC is compatible with Paired Carrier FastLink does not interoperate with any other LDPC FastLink performance a full set of BER graphs and latencies is defined in a separate datasheet available from the Paradise Datacom web site at http www paradisedata com FastLink performance is summarized in the table shown over the page 8 65 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook FastLink Code Rate Eb No for 5e 8 Guaranteed Latency ms at 64kbps Low Low Low Low Modulation Balanced Latency BER Balanced Latency O QPSK O QPSK O QPSK O QPSK See Note 1 Note 2 5 5 5 7 6 1 16APSK See Note 3 16APSK See Note 3 16APSK 8 2 16APSK 32APSK 32APSK 32APSK 32APSK FastLink Low latency LDPC Performance Summary 8 66 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 37 LinkGuard Interference Detection LinkGuard is a Paradise patent pending technology for detecting in band interference underneath satellite carriers while remaining on traffic
271. mber must be quoted on all documentation and on the outside of the packaging Within the UK contact Paradise UK for an RMA number 5 Generate the required import paperwork explicitly following the import export procedures stated when the RMA number was given 6 Outside of the UK fax the paperwork to us directly and return the goods to Paradise Datacom Within the UK fax the paperwork and return the goods to Paradise UK 16 1
272. mbined Doppler and Plesiochronous buffering if there are two clocks in the system Typically a buffer used for a Plesiochronous system is set larger than a Doppler only buffer as it has to accommodate a steady filling emptying plus a superimposed daily cycle The slips both underflows and overflows are displayed as part of the status information Approximately equal counts indicate the buffer is too small to accommodate the incoming Doppler shift 2ms is usually sufficient One count significantly higher than the other indicates that the buffer is slipping due to a large difference in the clock from the satellite and the buffer output clock With typical earth station clock accuracies buffers never need be larger than approximately 16ms 8 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 21 1 Transmit Clocking There are three transmit clocking modes that are used in the modem 1 21 1 1 Internal Clock When nternal is selected the modem which is always configured to be a DCE Data Communications Equipment supplies the clock This is provided by the modem to the DTE Data Terminal Equipment via the ETC External Transmit Clock signal line for using in clocking the data through to the modem It is important that the terrestrial data coming into the modem uses the ETC clock looped back through the DTE equipment TxData TxClock TT Internal Tx Clock ST Modem Tx y y 4 Data Interface
273. mit 1E 8 1 R1 2 Coding SE Se ES S G E T Rate 7 8 Rate 3 4 1E 9 Eb Noin qB 13 23 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 14 Advanced Framing This chapter describes the advanced SCPC framing options available on the modem local user interface menus The modem web user interface supports equivalent menu options Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Menu Advanced 1 Framing 2 Timeslots 3 Overhead When the user level is set to Advanced see the Edit Unit Advanced User Level screen this menu allows configuration of framing timeslots and overhead Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Framing Menu 1 2048k mode 2 CAS 3 TS order 4 Drop mode 5 G732 sig 6 T1 sig 7 CRC This menu contains the following options 2048k mode This option is used to indicate whether a continuous 2048kbps traffic stream is formatted as G 732 or not e CAS This option specifies whether Channel Associated Signalling CAS information is present in Timeslot 16 e TS order This controls whether timeslot reordering is allowed e Drop mode This specifies the framing format for Drop MUX operation e G 732 sig This option controls whether CAS information is processed and routed through the satellite e 1 sig This specifies whether Robbed Bit Signalling RBS information is present in the traffic source e CRC This is used to specify whether the terrestrial G 732 frame contains a checksum that should be che
274. modem when a 1 for 1 switchover occurs in a 1 for 1 redundant pair of modems Note that FSK communications will always be switched Over 7 74 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Rx Carrier Advanced PCMA Menu 1 Enable 2 Round trip delay This menu has the following options e Enable This is used to switch Paired Carrier off and on Access to this menu option requires the Paired Carrier feature to have been previously enabled through the modem SAF mechanism e Round trip delay This allows the option of setting the satellite round trip delay either by entering positional coordinates for the modem earth station and the satellite or alternatively setting an absolute delay The delay is required in order for the Paired Carrier signal processing algorithm to find a best match for its stored copy of the outgoing transmitted signal with the composite return signal in order to subtract the unwanted near signal leaving just the far carrier Edit Rx Carrier Advanced PCMA Enable Screen PCMA enable Off 1 Off 2 On This is used to switch Paired Carrier off and on Access to this menu option requires the Paired Carrier feature to have been previously enabled through the modem SAF mechanism For first time use please see the Paired Carrier deployment recommendations in the information box overleaf When switched on the modem expects the received signal to consist of two overlapped carriers u
275. mon RS and Bose Chaudhuri Hocquenghem BCH outer FEC model specific e A full range of terrestrial interfaces including RS422 V 35 RS232 Synchronous and Asynchronous LVDS HSSI Ethernet Internet Protocol IP and G 703 T1 E1 T2 E2 and 13 E3 There is also a G 703 variant that multiplexes and demultiplexes four E1 interfaces and can be used in a MultiMux configuration which multiplexes serial data G 703 and IP traffic A multiple E1 Sat Abis interface is available for direct connection to an Abis interface between a GSM BTS and BSC compressing voice traffic by up to 50 e Automatic Uplink Power Control AUPC automatically adjusts modem output power to maintain a constant Eb No at the distant end of the satellite link e Front panel display and keypad for local control e Remote control through both serial and IP interfaces IP remote control can be through a variety of methods including built in web pages served from the modem s embedded web server to any supported web browser the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP a standard Telnet protocol session where the user communicates using a Telnet client terminal emulation program e Compact 1U chassis 405mm deep e An extensive set of TCP IP features including TCP acceleration header and payload compression web acceleration bridging static and dynamic routing DHCP IEEE 802 1p QOS support IEEE 802 1q VLAN support traffic shaping ACM IPV6 etc Includes support for du
276. mote modem is placed in Monitor mode unless it is also controlling another modem via AUPC If AUPC is switched off in the remote modem then the modem in question will not respond to requests to provide Eb No information See Section 8 3 for a full description of AUPC Edit Tx Carrier Advanced AUPC Method Screen Options Factory AUPC method Normal New Normal Normal This should be selected when two Quantum Evolution modems are at either ends of the satellite link Self In this mode the modem will adjust power output in an attempt to maintain the Eb No at its target level using the Eb No from its own received carrier rather than the Eb No value being passed back from any remote modem P300 This should be selected when the distant end modem is a P300 series modem This uses a P300 style of ESC communications involving RS485 as opposed to native Evolution Quantum ESC communications which use IP over the ESC channel The P300 RS485 messages are more concise and may reduce ESC bandwidth requirements Normal 7 47 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook default Description This controls the AUPC method of operation Edit Tx Carrier Advanced AUPC Carrier Loss Action Screen Carrier loss action Freeze at current value New Freeze at current value Options Set to Nominal The AUPC delta power is set to zero so the carrier returns to its nominal power Freeze at curre
277. mote serial interface R5425 address Remote control port IP gateway Remote control port IP address Remote control port IP subnet CLOCKS Station clock source Station clock use Station clock frequency USER User level TIME Time Date AD vAHCEL larmz Thresholds BER threshold EBS No threshold Buffer slip threshold DC current minimum OC current maximum Deferred distant Eb Ma Link Guard interferer threshold ABIS dropped TRAU threshold ctionz Tx 41S alarm action Rx lS alarm action Link Guard interferer monitor BER threshold alarm OC alarm Tx handshake alarm action 1 for 1 alarm clear Special modes FEC off Tx differential coding Rx differential coding W323 compatibility PCM thin route bearer spoofing QOGPSK channel advance Sun outage Rix terr mute control Sun outage Rx terr mute threshold Direct WO Operation Acknowledge power break End current test zhot Mew SAF code entry 1 MHz reference adjustment Front Panel Edit Unit Menus Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 Identity 2 Interface 3 M amp C 4 Clocks 5 User 6 Time 7 Advanced The Edit Unit menu contains the following options Identity This is a user assigned field that is typically the unique modem name number or location Interface This submenu allows the selection and set up of the terrestrial interface M amp C This submenu controls remote M amp C settings including passwords interfaces and timeouts Cloc
278. n a 1 for 1 switchover occurs in a 1 for 1 redundant pair of modems Note that FSK communications will always be switched over 7 56 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 3 2 Edit Rx Menu RE Service Baseband Clocks Demodulati or FEC Descrambler Carrier Rx Tx Interface SERVICE Rix Service BASEBANHL Made lata symbol rate Sodio made Advanced Framing Timest ots Overhead CLOCKS Rx path clock source Clock extension Buffer size Advanced Centre buffer after failure recovery Manual buffer centre DEMOOULATION Modulation Sweep Sweep width Advanced FRAMIHUG eU048k data format G fs2 CAS signaling Remap timeslot order Insert bearer format Generate bearer Frocess CAS in TS16 Ti signal contains RBS CAS action on satellite backward alarm CRE Process bearer CRE Frame re acquisition an CRE loss TIMESLOTS Humber of timeslots used Timeslot selection Timeslot ILI maintenance over satellite Partial insert Partial insert timeslot selection OVERHEAD Closed E Sc ESC interface baud rate ESC interface character length ESC interface parity ESC interface electrical type Backward alarm control IBS overhead allocation to Bux channel Suis interface electrical type IBS5 5MS Acquisition haldoff helicopter mode High rate ESC made Fast nk adaptive equaliser FEC Inner FEC type Code rate LI B 72 frame size I B 52 pilots Fastlink optimisation mode Outer RS made Adv
279. n card part number P3001 provides LVDS on a D25 female connector The LVDS card fits in interface position 2 lower at the rear of the modem 1 13 4 HSSI Option Card The HSSI option card part number P3705 provides the modem with a High Speed Serial Interface with an industry standard 50 way SCSI 2 type DCE connector supporting data rates of up to 55Mbps The HSSI card fits in interface position 2 lower at the rear of the modem 1 13 5 Quad E1 Option Card The Quad E1 option card part number P3706 supports four synchronous G 703 HDB3 encoded balanced RJ45 interfaces Drop and insert of up to 32 timeslots is provided on all four interfaces alternatively full E1 bearers are also supported The combination of drop and insert plus full bearers allows any data rate to be selected between 64kbps and 8448kbps in multiples of 64kbps The data is multiplexed onto a single carrier using either an IBS SMS frame format overhead 6 7 or 6 2 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Closed Closed ESC frame format overhead lt 0 5 that ensures extremely efficient use of satellite bandwidth with no bandwidth being wasted at any data rate The Quad E1 card is set up and used in a similar way to the G 703 option card Following selection of the Quad E1 card as the terrestrial interface via the Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial screen Section 7 3 3 3 2 two menus Edit Tx Interface Section 7 3 3 1 8 and Edit Hx I
280. n this menu will lead through the following set of options depending on whether it is a Quad E1 or Sat ABIS card Note the Quad E1 interface can use either an IBS framed service fixed 6 7 overhead or Closed Network or Closed Network plus ESC configurable overhead with minimum of 0 39 See Section 8 10 for maximum overhead baud rates for Quad E1 Edit Unit Interface Quad E1 Tx Data Rate Screen Tx data rate 0 to 2048000bps 0000000 step 64000bps New 0000000 Units bps Minimum value 0 Maximum value 2048000 Step size 64000 Factory default 0 Description Sets the terrestrial bit rate for the relevant Quad E1 port This must be configured in multiples of 64kbps 7 111 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface Quad E1 Tx Mode Screen Options Factory default Description Port 1 mode Other 1 Off 2 E 3 A 4 Abis 5 Ater 6 Other Off The specified port on the Quad E1 card is not being used and is therefore disabled E The specified port on the Quad E1 card is being used between a PSTN Packet Switched Telephone Network and MSC Mobile Switching Centre A The specified port on the Quad E1 card is being used between a BSC Base Station Controller and MSC Mobile Switching Centre Abis The specified port on the Quad E1 card is being used between a BSC Base Station Controller and BTS Base Transceiver Station Ater The specified port on
281. n this mode the user can choose the values of n k and interleaver depth Factory default RU Description Controls whether the Reed Solomon outer FEC encoder is active 7 36 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx FEC Outer Advanced Menu Advanced 1 RSN 2 RS K 3 Interleave This menu can be selected when user level is set to Advanced following the setting of the modulation type It contains the following options e RSN This sets the Reed Solomon codeword length i e k data symbols n k parity symbols where n k 2 symbol errors per codeword can be corrected e HSK This sets the number of data symbols per Reed Solomon codeword range n 2 to n 20 in steps of 2 e Interleave This is used to set the Reed Solomon interleaver depth which controls resilience to burst errors larger depth gives best BER through data dispersal at the expense of introducing processing delay The table below defines normal Reed Solomon operation ap 88e FE Terentia Data Rte Terrestrial Data Rate e LJ Suan a Closed IBS SMS IDR Closed ESC OM73 d IBS SMS IDR Cl d ESC OM73 Intelsat 225 205 1778 194 178 194 1788 1 leat Other I 2k LH er _ Table of Reed Solomon N K and Interleaver Depth Values for Normal Operation 126 112 en 126 112 7 1 37 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx FEC Outer Ad
282. nalling data timeslots carry pairs of the abcd signalling nibbles from the terrestrial T8516 When not carrying CAS but where the CAS Multiframe format is being used for solely for timeslot ID maintenance for Odd values of N these 15 signalling data timeslots are available for the high rate ESC Similar to the fitting of the main data into the 60 timeslots available for data per IBS frame the abcd signalling information has to be fitted into the 30 available nibbles in the 15 signalling data timeslots in TS16 TS48 following the CAS MF unique word in TS16 There are certain values of N for which this will work ie where 30 N gives an integer These include N 1 2 3 5 6 10 15 30 In these cases then the CAS multiframe is 8 frames in duration with the first frame containing CAS MF unique word in TS16 and pairs of abcd signalling nibbles in TS48 and the following seven frames contain pairs of abcd signalling nibbles in TS16 and TS48 For values of N which are not supported by an 8 frame CAS multiframe with room for 30 nibbles of signalling the multiframe is simply extended in length by multiples of 8 frames until it reaches a value where it can accommodate an integer multiple of the signalling information in one multiframe Although the multiframe is extended in multiples of 8 frames giving a further 30 locations to carry signalling each 8 frames the CAS MF unique word is not repeated but is instead replaced b
283. nance Try reducing ESC baud rate or increasing maximum multiframe period A frame backward alarm has been detected at the Tx input This indicates that equipment downstream of the receive path has failed and is returning an alarm This may be due to any receive downstream equipment but could be due to the modem Rx output failing Check the modem Rx path status and that the Rx data output from the modem is connected to the downstream equipment A multiframe backward alarm has been detected at the Tx input indicating that equipment downstream of the receive path has failed to find multiframe sync and is returning an alarm On the Rx path if the Insert Mux bearer is set to Originate then check the Rx path is also using CAS otherwise it will generate a bearer without a TS16 Multiframe The required BUC output power cannot be achieved This alarm is only displayed when the modem is in terminal mode amp the modem attempts to set the BUC output power by adjusting it s output level amp a attenuator in the BUC This can be caused by too much attenuation in the cross site cabling or inability to control the attenuator in the BUC such as use of a non Paradise BUC with no input attenuator Configuration error exceeded data rate for FEC scheme Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded Configuration error exceeded Configuration error exceeded Configuration error
284. nd web browsers typically fetch each in line object sequentially one at a time once the skeleton web page has been received Some browsers will start a second TCP connection so two objects can be fetched in parallel A typical web page with several images can take multiple times the satellite delay before it is fully displayed By prefetching all in line objects in advance in Modem 1 in the picture above on average there is a 30 reduction in the time taken to display a web page Note that the modem does not have enough memory to cache web pages the benefit is due to prefetching only The modem requires the IP address of a Domain Name Server DNS in order to convert domain name requests into actual IP addresses HTTP web acceleration is provided as a free feature with TCP acceleration on the IP Traffic card it does not run on the base modem due to memory constraints 8 49 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 32 11 Static and Dynamic Routing The modem can be operated as a two port static router one port being the terrestrial interface and the other port being the satellite interface Static routing is useful for small networks that do not require dynamic routing it can be activated by selecting routing mode but not enabling any dynamic routing protocols static routing is provided as a free feature Each route comprises a Destination IP Address Subnet Mask and a Gateway Address If the destina
285. nd Operating Handbook 1 32 7 2 Ethernet Point to Multipoint Bridging Uses a shared outbound carrier to multiple remote modems with either direct returns over satellite to multiple Rx modems at the hub indirect terrestrial returns or no return If no return channel exists then you can only ever send multicast traffic since there is no reply to any ARP requests so no other traffic will ever be sent to the modem from the PC The hub Tx modem does not expect to receive replies to ARP requests since replies will be by a different path i e via hub Rx modems However the ARP replies sent to the Rx only hub modems still get back to the originating devices so these still continue to sent data to the modem which passes it indiscriminately over satellite except for data destined for devices it recognises as being on the local terrestrial side of the network It does not matter what subnetting is used at the remotes the devices can be on one or many subnets unless o TCP acceleration or header compression is also being used in which case all the modems need to be on a single subnet o When routing is used all the modems need to be on a single satellite subnet but you can use different subnets on the terrestrial side Double hop is supported where a remote can communicate with another remote via the hub Double hop is not wasteful of bandwidth because the hub Tx modem only retransmits data over satellite if it cannot find the destination
286. ne TR switch to the inactive state It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line RS by selecting Edit Tx Carrier RTS enabled Please note Although the HSSI cable uses the same connector as the SCSI 2 specification the cable impedances of HSSI and SCSI 2 cables are different SCSI 2 cables can be as low as 70 Ohms whereas HSSI cables are specified at 110 Ohms As a result cables made to SCSI 2 specifications may not work correctly with HSSI Incompatibilities will be more apparent with longer cable lengths 10 4 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook EIA530 in RS422 Mode If the EIA 530 interface is fitted and RS422 signals are selected under Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial then the following interface description applies Signal Description Circuit Electrical Number Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX Aen NC CN NC DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX ne 2 COMMON LINES a e NEU oe eem m a a Je fee eoan om or s Jo fro es feee Lene om pow dn The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem rep
287. nfiguration but passes the initial built in test proceeding to the initialising screen Software upgrade fails or unit fails to boot Notes Relays To Ter To Sat Other One of the PSU on the redundancy switch have failed of the PSU on the One of the PSU on the redundancy switch have failed switch have failed The Tx carrier is set to mute after a power failure The power has failed and returned The fault needs to be acknowledged in order to allow the carrier to be unmuted While attempting to maintain a constant Eb No at the distant modem the AUPC function has adjusted the modem power level to the maximum offset allowed Check AUPC settings Indicates that one or more SAF features such as Paired Carrier that have been purchased on a ee license are about to expire A new purchase order should be raised if the features are still required Remove the mains input lead wait for a short period of time and then re power the unit As soon as the initialising screen is reached enter 1 3 7 and 9 using the keypad The scrolling full stops seen after the initialising message should change to asterisks and the Modem will boot The invalid configuration will be stored to memory entitled deleted_date Hold down the main button whilst applying power choose the front panel menu option rescue connect a PC to the top Ethernet port IP traffic and browse to the default IP address of the modem 10
288. nformation such as model number serial number software version firmware version and details of the modem hardware configuration SAF This displays details of which software activated features are currently active which are disabled the number of SAF test shots remaining and the remaining SAF test shot period before the temporary SAF features time out Monitor This provides access to transmit receive and unit information that is continually updated including the data rates at different points in the transmit and receive processing chain power supply levels modem internal temperature and modem loopback status Alarms This provides access to transmit receive and unit current alarm information Note that entering O clears any existing latched alarm Log This provides access to the system log This includes a list of all notable events that have occurred including alarms Entries are timestamped Note that entering O clears the log Config This provides access to summaries of the transmit receive and unit settings 1 19 5 Test Menu Test 1 Loopback 2 BER test 3 RF 4 IDR 5 IP The menu contains the following options Loopback This allows selection of internal loopback between the transmit and receive paths at different points in the processing chain This provides a convenient way of checking modem operation in isolation from other equipment Local loopback refers to returning local signals traveling within the modem in the
289. ng Overview Note that to successfully upgrade a modem using Internet Explorer running on a Windows Vista PC you must turn Protected Mode OFF on the PC Upgrades are provided as a single compressed zip file These can be used to either upgrade or downgrade the software the process for both operations being the same From the screen shown overleaf it is necessary only to browse to the location of the upgrade file and open the file The latest software can be found under Downloads on the Paradise company web site at http www paradisedata com The software should be downloaded from the web site to a temporary location that can be accessed by the modem Feedback on the progress of the update which typically takes around 10 minutes depending on the speed of the link is provided on the screen The modem will be automatically restarted when the upgrade is complete Note that a remote modem can be upgraded over the satellite link by setting up the IP traffic interface and browsing to the remote modem s IP address in order to access its web server the upgrade process then being followed as normal 7 167 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook In the event that an upgrade is unsuccessful for example because the upload to the modem was interrupted then it is possible to enter a recovery mode The memory on the modem is configured to include a failure recovery sector that includes a very basic file system By kee
290. ng equipment downstream of Tx has failed Rx warning Backward alarm at Insert MUX indicating equipment downstream of Rx has failed Rx warning The final BER is worse than the user threshold set for the deferred alarm Rx warning Rx FIFO underflow on ports 1 to 4 Rx warning Rx FIFO overflow on ports 1 to 4 A backward alarm has been detected at the Rx input This indicates that equipment downstream of the transmit path i e from the modem Tx output has failed and is returning an alarm This may be due to a downstream receive path equipment failure the modem Tx failing or a satellite failure Check the modem Tx path status Check the Tx IF output from the modem is connected to the upconverter equipment and onwards Monitor the Tx carrier or distant Rx if possible with a spectrum analyser A multiframe backward alarm has been detected at the Rx input indicating that equipment downstream of the transmit path has failed to synchronise to the CAS multiframe and is returning an alarm This could be caused by any equipment from the Tx modulator onwards but is unlikely to be other than the Tx mod the Rx demod or further down the Rx path This indicates which of the four backward alarms are active at the Rx input This indicates that equipment downstream of the transmit path ie the distant end Rx path or further downstream has failed and is returning an alarm In Multidestinational circuits this may not correspond to the
291. ng whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to 7x Clock In the Data In signal is checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to nternal or Rx the Data In signal is checked against the Int Tx Clk Out signal By selecting Advanced it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line RS or Device DTE Ready In line TR switch to the inactive state It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line RS by selecting Edit Tx Carrier RTS enabled Q3705 in HSSI Mode If the HSSI interface is fitted and is selected under Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial then the following interface description applies Signal Description Electrical Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX je Fe 36 DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX 10 3 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Li Signal Description Electrical o Levels L 1 a m COMMON LINES LI RN queens m 8 o IR ENNIUS peen poe s o Ie The modem can operate at high data rates using the HSSI interface but the maximum useable data rate is limited by th
292. ng Handbook 1 34 Paired Carrier Paired Carrier can be used to reduce satellite bandwidth requirements by up to 50 by overlapping transmit and receive carriers in the same space segment It uses ViaSat s patented PCMA technology Adaptive self interference cancellation is used to subtract the units transmitted signal from the composiste received signal leaving just the desired signal This is depicted in the diagrams below uplink downlink signal signal Typical satellite transmission with separate frequency slots for uplink and downlink ety St W Hz W Hz frequency uplink amp downlink signals Using Paired Carrier uplink and downlink carriers overlaid can save 50 on space segment SERENE ad W Hz frequency Frequency Re use by Overlaying Carriers The Paired Carrier processing in the modem to cancel the unwanted signal in the composite received signal to be left with only the desired signal is shown in the diagram overleaf The signal cancellation algorithm estimates and compensates for gain frequency phase and delay in matching the unwanted component of the composite Rx signal with a delay buffered version of its own transmission 8 58 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Quantum Satellite Modem Digital Analogue Tx QUT Modulator Madulatar From modem baseband Mc c NTC REI WESS DIOSESIM digital transmit signal Paired Carrier Cancellation Circuitry Cancel
293. ng and RF Frequency 10MHz OdBm 1dB 1 46 Tx Modulator Specifications Parameter Modem IF Output Power Level 0 to 25dBm continuously variable in 0 1dB steps gea Output Power 0 to 30dBm continuously variable in 0 1dB steps Output Level Stabilit 0 5dB 0 C to 50 C Transmit Filtering 7 IESS compliant a 0 35 a 0 25 q Occupied Bandwidth 1 2 times Symbol Rate tae Channel 1 4 times Symbol Rate pacing IF Output Frequency Stabilit Seay L band Output ee m Frequency Stability 7 5E 8 yr with high stability reference option 45dBc out of band to 5GHz 40dBc out of band 10MHz to 5GHz By external contact closure or by TTL signal PAIGAL TAn rme nno applied to rear panel Alarms amp AGC connector 13 3 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 47 Rx Demodulator Specifications Parameter Modem IF Input Range 30 to 60dBm wanted signal Minimum 130 10 log symbol rate L band Input Range Maximum 80 10 log symbol rate i e 90dBm to 10dBm Signal of OdBm 35db above level of desired input up to a maximum Composite signal of 10dBm Selectable from 1kHz to 32kHz up to 10 Mbps Frequency Acquisition 1kHz steps Range 10kHz to 250kHz from 10 to 52 Mbps 10kHz steps 5dB Es No QPSK At 9 6kbps less than 1s at 6dB Es No QPSK At 10 Mbps less than 100ms at 6dB Es No QPSK Intelsat IESS compliant a 0 35 a 20 25 0 0 20 Measured E
294. ng to IEC 297 2 Operation of the equipment in transportable installations and vehicles equipped with the means of providing a stable environment is permissible Operation of the equipment on vehicles ships or aircraft without means of environmental conditioning may invalidate the safety compliancy Please contact Customer Technical Support for further advice Operation of the equipment in an environment other than that stated in the specifications will also invalidate the safety compliancy The equipment must not be operated in an environment in which the unit is exposed to Unpressurised altitudes greater than 2000 metres Extremes of temperature outside the stated operating range Excessive dust Moisture or humid atmospheres above 95 relative humidity Excessive vibration Flammable gases Corrosive or explosive atmospheres 1 7 Installation The equipment is classified in EN 60950 1 as a pluggable equipment Class A for connection to the mains supply note that a 48V DC version is also available As such it is provided with a mains inlet cord suitable for use in the country of operation In normal circumstances this will be of an adequate length for installation in a rack If the mains cable proves to be too short then any replacement must have a similar type fuse if fitted and be manufactured to a similar specification For example look for HAR BASEC or 3 1 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook HOXXX
295. ng to some options that have been removed from this menu 1 Edit Unit Interface RF IF Port Impedance Option Note that this option is no longer available or required on Paradise modems even when software upgrading older modems The line impedance 50 or 75 Ohms is matched without the need for any user input 2 Edit Unit Interface ESC Interface Option 3 Edit Unit Interface Aux Interface Option Note that these options are now available only via the Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Overhead screens described in Chapter 14 Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial Screen Terrestrial interface type RS422 New RS422 Options RS422 7 85 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Available at data rates of up to 10Mbps LVDS Available at all data rates RS232 Available at data rates of up to 100kbps V 35 Available at data rates of up to 10Mbps G 703 Available at data rates of T1 E1 T2 E2 T3 and E3 IP Available at all data rates When the P3714 IP Traffic card is fitted then this will be enabled and the IP Traffic port on the base modem will be disabled With the IP Traffic card fitted on selection of P as the terrestrial interface the user will be asked to enter an IP address subnet mask and default gateway for the IP Traffic card HSSI Available at all data rates Quad E1 Once selected the Tx and Rx paths of the Quad E1 card can be set up using the Edit Tx
296. nly 0 666 2 3 Paradise TPC only 3 4 Viterbi Sequential DVB S2 SmartLink only 5 3 4 de facto TPC only 4 5 DVB S2 SmartLink only 0 789 Paradise TPC only 5 6 DVB S2 SmartLink only 8 Viterbi Sequential 0 875 7 8 de facto 7 30 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook TPC only 0 875 7 8 Paradise TPC only 6 9 DVB S2 SmartLink only 9 10 DVB S2 SmartLink only 0 929 Paradise TPC only 0 499 FastLink only 0 532 FastLink only 0 639 FastLink only 0 710 FastLink only 0 726 FastLink only 0 778 FastLink only 0 798 FastLink only 0 828 FastLink only 7 31 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook EE 0 851 FastLink only 0 886 FastLink only 0 938 FastLink only 0 960 FastLink only Factory default 1 2 Viterbi Description Sets the FEC code rate i e the number of bits input to the Forward Error Correction encoder relative to the number output thereby determining the level of information redundancy and protection of the data stream against errors In DVB S2 IP multistreaming mode then there will be one FEC rate screen shown for each stream as each can be set independently Not all FEC rates are available for all modulations and FEC schemes please check the Table of Normal Operation with respect to FEC Mode FEC Hate and Modulation Schem
297. not be reordered when being used with the Quad E1 card Timeslots can be entered as individual numbers separated by commas or as an inclusive range denoted by the first and last timeslot numbers in the range with a hyphen between them For example 0 17 18 31 Note that on this screen the Down arrow key is used to enter a comma and the Up arrow key is used to enter a hyphen The O key pressed together at the same time as the Hight arrow key deletes the character at the cursor 7 113 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook If the number of timeslots that are entered differ from the number entered on the previous screen then the new value will not be accepted and the modem will continue to display this screen until a valid value is entered Edit Unit Interface Quad E1 Tx Dropped Timeslot Idle Code Screen Port 1 dropped timeslots Leave on bearer New Leave on bearer Options Leave on bearer The Tx data remains on the bearer and will be accessible to downstream equipment unless Rx data is inserted over it Replace with Idle code The Tx data is replaced with Idle code Factory Leave on bearer default Description Controls whether dropped timeslots are replaced with Idle code in relation to the specific port on the Quad E1 card If the Rx data is to be inserted into the same timeslots as the Tx data has been dropped from then the Rx data will replace the Tx data and therefore this setting is irreleva
298. nsmit path equivalent Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Timeslots Partial Insert Screen Partial insert Normal 1 Normal 2 Partial 7 61 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Options Normal Partial Factory default Normal Description Controls whether part or all of the received data is to be inserted into the terrestrial bearer Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Timeslots Partial Timeslots Screen Sat data to insert in terr bearer 1 New 1 Options Ignore Insert Factory default gnore Description When Partial Insert is active controls whether the timeslot from the satellite is to be inserted into the terrestrial bearer Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Overhead Menu See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Clocks Menu Clocks 1 Source 2 Buffer 3 Advanced This menu contains the following options e Source This selects the receive path clock source e Buffer This option sets the buffer capacity for received data This provides Doppler and plesiochronous buffering see Section 8 1 for a full description of buffering 1 62 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook e Advanced This menu offers advanced satellite buffering options 1 19 3 2 3 Edit Rx Clocks Source Screen Options Factory default Description Rx path clock source Satellite 1 Satellite 2 Tx Clock In 3 Internal 4 Station Satellite
299. nt Edit Unit Interface Quad E1 Interface Loopback Screen Interface loopback Off 1 Off 2 On This menu controls whether loopback is enabled for the specific E1 port of the Quad E1 card When on the modem s front panel Test LED will go amber and a local and remote loopback to terrestrial and satellite ports will be enabled 7 114 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface Quad E1 Rx Mode Screen See the description of the Quad E1 Tx Mode screen Edit Unit Interface Quad E1 Rx Number of Timeslots Screen See the description of the Quad E1 Tx Number of Timeslots screen Edit Unit Interface Quad E1 Rx Inserted Timeslots Screen This is similar to the Quad E1 Tx Dropped Timeslots screen but controls the specific timeslots that are inserted into the E1 bearer on the receive side of the link Edit Unit Interface Quad E1 Rx Generate Bearer Screen Port 1 generate bearer Loop auto originate New Originate In relation to the specific port of the Quad E1 card this controls the origination of a terrestrial bearer from the Insert MUX It allows a choice of auto originating the bearer if the bearer fails or originating the bearer at all times 7 115 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 3 4 Edit Unit M amp C Menu 1 Control 2 Password 3 Timeout 4 Interface 5 Baud 6 RS485 addr 7 Gateway 8 IP addr 9 Subnet mask This menu contains the f
300. nt value The carrier power is frozen at its current value Set to max The AUPC delta power increases to the maximum power limit as set on the AUPC Max positive delta power screen OCIO Set to Nominal default Description This controls the AUPC delta power action in the event of losing the incoming carrier In most cases this should be set to Nominal 7 48 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Carrier Advanced AUPC Eb No Screen Target remote EbNo 0 1 to 14 9dB 3 1 Step 0 1dB New 3 1 Units dB Minimum value 0 1 Maximum value 14 9 Step size 0 1 Factory default 10 0 Description This is the distant Eb No that AUPC tries to maintain by adjusting the Tx power level Edit Tx Carrier Advanced AUPC Power Offset Screen Max power offset 0 to 25dBm 1 0 Step 0 1dBm New 1 0 Units dBm Minimum value 0 Maximum value 25 Step size 0 1 Factory default 1 Description This is the maximum increase in Tx power level that AUPC is allowed to make to maintain distant Eb No 7 49 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Carrier Advanced AUPC Power Negative Offset Screen Units Max neg power off 0 to 25dBm 1 0 Step 0 1dBm New 1 0 dBm Minimum value 0 Maximum value 25 Step size 0 1 Factory default 1 Description This is the maximum decrease in Tx power level that AUPC is allowed to make to maintain distant Eb No
301. nterface Section 7 3 3 2 9 can be used to set up the Tx and Rx paths respectively of each port of the Quad E1 card The P3706 Quad E1 interface card not only provides all the above functionality but if the MultiMux Mux SAF feature has also been purchased and enabled then G 703 serial data and IP traffic may be multiplexed together to form one aggregate satellite carrier Multimux is explained in a separate document Multimux Data Multiplexer Option application note 205348 available in the modem documentation area of http www paradisedata com It allows up to two Eis to be amalgamated with up to 2Mbps of IP and up to 2Mbps of EIA530 onto a single carrier Up to three E1s can be used if amalgamating only one of IP or EIA530 MultiMux can also be used without any E1s 1 13 6 Eurocom D1 Option Card There are two versions of the Eurocom option card The P300 compatible Eurocom D1 option card part number P3709 provides a Eurocom D interface data rates of 16 to 2048kbps AMI coding Eurocom G interface at 16 or 32kbps on a 25 pin D male connector The Eurocom D1 EIA530 option card part number P3713 provides Eurocom D interface data rates of 16 to 2048kbps Eurocom G interface at 16 or 32kbps as well as EIA530 signals on the same connector supporting RS422 X 21 V 35 RS232 and balanced G 703 It uses a 25 pin D female connector 1 13 7 IP Traffic Option Card An Ethernet traffic interface is always available on the base modem
302. ntrol by holding down the O key and pressing the Left arrow key together while the screen containing the M amp C control is displayed This brings up scrollable text that explains the M amp C control s function Pressing the 0 key and Left arrow key together for a second time removes the Help text and reverts the display back to its previous contents Keyboard Lock The keypad can be locked against inadvertent use by holding down the O key and pressing the MAIN key together at the same time Pressing the two keys again at the same time unlocks the keypad LCD Contrast The contrast of the LCD display can be adjusted by holding down the O0 key and pressing the Up or Down arrow key together at the same time The Up arrow key increases the contrast and the Down arrow key decreases the contrast LCD Backlight The LCD backlight can be switched off or on by holding down the 0 key and pressing the ENTER key together at the same time Log Alarm Clear The system log and system alarms can be cleared by pressing the 0 key when on the relevant log or alarm display screen Buffer Overflow Underflow clear The buffer Overflow and Underflow slip counters can be cleared by pressing the O key when on the relevant status demodulator display screen 7 4 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 18 2 LCD Screen Layout The front panel user interface uses a menu system to present choices to the user These in turn allow e
303. nty statement is provided separately to this handbook Paradise Datacom maintains a programma of continuous product imprgvae ment and reserves tha iaht te chanae specfications without prior natica dja 26x11 69in 4 k P4 d 3017 B OB OT LE B H i COE ee terne On line Installation and Operation Handbook 1 20 9 SAF Screen The features available can be seen from the View SAF menu screen This screen also allows a test shot to be started or stopped If a 10 day test shot is active the word Demo is added to the SAF label of each additional feature started by the test shot and the text colour is changed to amber Permanent features are always shown in blue 7 165 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 4 PARADISE DATACOM QUANTUM SERIES STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP SUMMARY Configuration Unit SAF Monitor Alarms Tx path SAF On 0 to 2Mbps data rate SAF On 5 to 8 448Mbps data rate SAF On 16 896 to 25Mbps data rate SAF On 45 to 52Mbps data rate SAF On ID Paradise modem Serial No 10500355 Mode In control Control Shared UNIT STATUS Basic Drop Insert SAF RX TRAFFIC Viterbi FEC mode SAF On TX TRAFFIC Intelsat Reed Solomon SAF TEST MODE 8PSK modulation SAF High rate Turbo FEC SAF On TX CARRIER Aux channel SAF On DVB S mode SAF reserved Off FSK SAF OM 73 support SAF On TCM FEC mode SAF On Quad E1 port 3 IP header compressi
304. o your PC using the link on the web page Please read Note 1 below at this stage 3 From Internet Explorer browse to the modem s Edit Unit Upgrade web page A login is required the default user name is admin and the default password is paradise 4 A Java applet will appear within the page and present the user with an Open button Select the Open button and browse to and double click the software zip file that was downloaded The upgrade will begin automatically Leave the modem to upgrade and restart before attempting any further action This will take around 10 minutes Note 1 Prior to starting an upgrade please ensure that none of the following files appear on either the PC desktop or within the User profile directory as a result of a previous failed upgrade Ulmage CF img gz U boot bin To check the location of the User profile directory please go to the DOS command prompt and type cd USERPROFILE This will display the location of the directory used by the previous upgrade Use Windows Explorer or similar to navigate to both this directory and the desktop and ensure that all three files are deleted if present Also check that you have permission as a remote user to upgrade the modem by ensuring Takeaway mode is selected via the Main Edit Uni M amp C Control menu option 7 169 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook SONGS E s PARADISE DATACOM QUANTUM SERIES i STAT
305. ode Rate 0 93 1 00E 03 w Paradise 16QAM Typ Paradise 16QAM Spec R Paradise 8PSK Typ Paradise 8PSK Spec gt lt Paradise QPSK Typ J3X Paradise QPSK Spec Comtech 8PSK Typ Comtech 8PSK Spec Comtech QPSK Typ Comtech QPSK Spec 1 00E 04 1 00E 05 Lu 2 T 1 00E 06 1 00E 07 1 00E 08 1 00E 09 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 EbNo Modem Error Probability versus Eb No Turbo Rate 0 93 versus Comtech Turbo Rate 0 95 13 21 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Modem Error Probability versus Eb No Sequential Decoding at 64kbps 1 2 3 4 2 6 f EXCILIERELBREERCORBRBEBER CEH Test Conditions pci inue OOS Rate 64 kbps QPSK aeeeN ti lr TX 140 0000 MHz RX 140 0000 MHz V 35 Scrambling Input Level 40 dBm PoE AEN DDHHAUAUNEHE BEERS PCECECECNC NCA Ce EERREEEEE RhR EREE POE ESCCEEHCCEEEPERKEEREENSE FERRER See ee AAA A NA A Rate 7 8 718 H FERRER zi DM Geet eee i es LLL LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLI Eb No in dB 13 22 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Modem Error Probability versus Eb No Sequential Decoding at 2048kbps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1E 1 T est Conditions FEC S equentid Rate 2048kbps QPSK Idea BPSK QPSK lE 2 T X 140 0000 MHz RX 140 0000 MHz V 35 Sarambling Input Level 50 dBm 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 S pec li
306. odulated data However the unable to sync to decoded Reed Solomon de interleaver cannot synchronise with TA TC SB RF data Check RS settings the decoded data Check the RS de interleaving depth and the values of n and K The demodulator cannot find a carrier to lock to at the FEX fault Demodulator specified frequency Check the frequency data rate and unlocked Check modem p SS Vee ase TATC SB RE FEC settings Check the demodulator by enabling IF settings loopback test mode Rx fault Cannot find frame sync on Rx data check The modem cannot find the IBS or IDR frame sync on TA TC SB RF the receive data Check the Rx Service settings Rx Service settings Rx fault Cannot find IBS TS32 multiframe sync on E modem e Re Mul sync on TA TC SB RF Ex data the receive data although it has found frame sync By aul Noster bearer Modem is set to loop bearer but no bearer was detected at Tx input The bearer is currently being generated by generating the insert mux The modem cannot find the IBS CAS multiframe sync on the receive data although it has found frame sync and TS32 multiframe sync CAS Multiframe sync is used to convey either 1 Channel Associated Signalling CAS in G 732 Drop Insert modes using CAS 2 To maintain the identity of a group of timeslots in some cases 3 To maintain Robbed Bit Signalling RBS in T1 D4 or T1 Rx fault CAS multiframe ESC Drop Insert modes Check as follows for each use TA TC SB s
307. oes the modem redundancy configuration affect Paired Carrier operation A No Paired Carrier works equally as well in 1 1 and 1 n modem redundancy systems The standby modem will have to go through the normal acquisition process when it comes on traffic While it is in standby it is not possible for the demodulator to lock it cannot cancel the unwanted carrier since in principle it can only cancel its own transmission Paradise has therefore muted various spurious alarms that would otherwise be reported for the standby modem in this situation 8 60 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Q Can remotely control the Paired Carrier function A Yes Paired Carrier can be controlled remotely in the same way as any other modem function via RS232 RS485 web browser or SNMP Q Can add Paired Carrier into an existing network A Yes bandwidth savings can be made with existing networks but a link budget analysis must be made to assess the suitability and benefits Q Surely there is some disadvantage in using Paired Carrier A Paired Carrier has a minimal impact on Eb No for a desired BER but typically between 0 15dB and 0 5dB extra carrier power is required to be transmitted on satellite to overcome the imperfections in the signal cancellation process Also of course power is needed for the second carrier Q What prerequisites exist for using Paired Carrier A It requires a full duplex link where you m
308. oint mode where UDP and IP packet headers are compressed in order to save satellite bandwidth The bandwidth savings depend on the particular packet sizes being used This feature supports header compression at terrestrial throughput rates of up to 2Mbps via the base modem and throughput rates up to 16896kbps when the IP Traffic card is fitted Mesh The mesh mode supports networks where there is one carrier per site and multiple Rx only modems for receiving from other sites It is implemented as a variation of the point to multipoint bridging mode hub operation Partial mesh networks are also supported 1 92 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Brouting mode Select this mode for all point to multipoint or unidirectional IP systems where there is an indirect return path i e not via satellite Both the Tx and Rx modems should have brouting enabled In this mode the Ethernet bridge in the Tx modem does not expect to receive replies and simply transmits all Ethernet frames over satellite other than those destined for itself TCP acceleration mode This mode provides bridging of non TCP packets combined with acceleration of TCP packets using a Performance Enhancing Proxy PEP that overcomes performance problems associated with using standard TCP over satellite TCP acceleration mode Header Compression Only applicable if an IP traffic Interface card is fitted This mode provides bridging of non TCP p
309. ollowing options Control This controls whether modem control is via the front panel local via a remote interface Giveaway or whether all interfaces are allowed to control the modem Takeaway Password This displays a screen that has options to change the two system passwords Admin and User Timeout This controls the length of time a user is logged in for without any input activity before they are automatically logged out Interface This specifies the remote control serial interface type Baud This specifies the remote control serial interface baud rate RS485 addr This specifies the unit s RS485 address Gateway This allows a default IP gateway to be specified This acts as the next hop when forwarding IP data not destined for the modem or local subnet IP addr This option sets the IP address for the remote control interface Subnet mask This sets the remote control port IP subnet mask Edit Unit M amp C Control Screen Modem control Giveaway New Takeaway Options Local Giveaway Takeaway Factory default Giveaway Description Controls modem ownership In Local mode only the front panel can be used to control the modem In Giveaway mode the first user to issue a command gains control of the modem until a manual or automatic log out occurs Pressing the MAIN key gives away control of the Modem Allowing for example a Web user or M amp C via RS485 RS232 to have 7 116 Quantum and Evolution
310. ollowing time based graphs The modem received signal Eb No The Eb No of the distant modem being controlled via AUPC The modem received power level The modem final user BER after error correction estimated from the FEC The modem actual BER from the internal BER Tester available as a Test function e he transmit power level while under AUPC control 7 157 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook e Modem internal temperature e Receive frequency offset from centre frequency Similarly IP traffic information IP packets dropped packets and errors can also be displayed for both Tx and Rx These graphs are sub divided into IP traffic M amp C and satellite categories If an IP traffic card is fitted then these graphs automatically relate to the IP traffic card information Examples of time based and IP traffic graphs are shown below and overleaf 4PARADISE DATACOM a QUANTUM SERIES STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Local SUMMARY Monitor Graphs IP Traffic Alarms Log Constellation b d Spectrum b d Temperature Eb No AUPC Eb No b d Rx Power BER AUPC Pwr Freq Offset ID Paradise modem Serial No 10500355 Mode In control Control Shared Minute l Hour Day Month UNIT STATUS de 45 RX TRAFFIC 14 TX TRAFFIC 43 TEST MODE 12 411 TX CARRIER 10 3M o 4 8 8 JG T Lu 6 4 a graph is not displayed on x is page then it is b
311. on Controls whether timeslots can be reordered within the G 732 frame prior to transmission In some applications this feature can remove the need for separate Digital Access Cross Connect DACCs equipment that is used to re arrange timeslots Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Framing Drop Mode Screen Drop bearer format G 732 1 G 732 2 11 D4 3 T1 ESF Options G 732 T1 D4 T1 ESF Factory default G 732 Description Bearer type selection for Drop MUX operation 14 3 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Framing CAS in TS16 Screen Process CAS in TS16 No CAS 1 No CAS 2 CAS Options No CAS CAS Factory default No CAS Description Controls whether CAS information is processed and routed through the satellite Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Framing T1 RBS Screen T1 signal contains RBS No RBS 1 No RBS 2 RBS Options No RBS Robbed bit signalling is not in operation or can be ignored RBS Robbed bit signalling is in use with the least significant bit of each timeslot being used for signalling in frames 6 and 12 D4 or 6 12 18 and 24 ESF of the terrestrial multiframe Factory default INO Ee Description Specifies whether Robbed Bit Signalling information is present in the traffic source When selected drop insert data is placed into the bearer by the insert MUX in the same frames from which it came It is still possible to drop fro
312. on SAF On Demo Web Proxy SAF Log Support Rx path SAF On 2 to 5Mbps data rate SAF On 8 448 to 16 896Mbps data rate SAF On 25 to 45Mbps data rate SAF IBS SMS SAF On Extended Drop Insert SAF On Low rate Turbo FEC SAF On Wideband IF frequencies SAF above 88MHz 16QAM modulation SAF On ESC channel SAF On Demo Custom features SAF PRBS BER test mode SAF On DVB S2 SAF reserved OFf Ethernet brouting mode SAF On Audio support SAF On Quad E1 port 2 On Quad E1 port 4 On Demo Multi Mux SAF Demo 55Mbs Higher rate TCP acceleration SAF 25Mbs Higher rate TCP acceleration SAF On SAF test time remaining hours The SAF mix for this modem is YO7FFE6FFFF7 FOFOD4D4 SAF Screen Demo test shots remaining 2 Stop Test Shot 1 20 10 SNMP Configuration It is possible to enable and configure the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v1 v2c agent within the modem through the web interface SNMP is switched off by default An SNMP MIB is provided on the modem and can be downloaded from the SNMP Configuration screen The SNMP facilities of the modem are documented in the Remote M amp C Specification for Quantum and Evolution Series Satellite Modems The SNMP configuration screen found under the Edit Unit M amp C Advanced menu tab is shown overleaf The community names represent passwords that must be present in each SNMP read or write requests in order for the commands to be e
313. option for equipment to support CAS and defines a mechanism whereby the CAS the 2kbps signalling channel per timeslot can be carried within the 6 7 IBS satellite overhead This option is fully implemented within the modem equipped with the Extended D I feature and is further explained in the following section on CAS Multiframe Robbed Bit Signalling RBS Historically PCM bearers using Robbed Bit Signalling could not be used with Drop Insert as over standard IBS links the location of the signalling information ie which timeslots have a bit overwritten with signalling was lost Even with Timeslot ID Maintenance which preserved timeslot sequence and timeslot start end boundaries RBS was still lost To preserve RBS not only is TS ID maintenance required but also the timeslots required placing back into the correct frames within the terrestrial multiframe so in T1 D4 for example the timeslots containing the RBS are placed in frames 6 and 12 of the terrestrial multiframe Intelsat s IBS definition does not specify a mechanism to achieve this therefore the modem equipped with the Extended D I feature uses an extension of the Timeslot ID Maintenance scheme to provide RBS support with Drop Insert over thin route satellite links It does this by treating not just the timeslots from one frame as a group of N timeslots but the group from the whole terrestrial multiframe as a block within which timeslot identity has to be 8 14 Quantum and
314. or receive but not both at the same time If another device transmits at the same time then in half duplex mode the modem will detect this and handle the situation correctly Full duplex Selects full duplex mode for the base modem terrestrial IP traffic interface This should only be used when the modem is connected directly to an Ethernet switch or a PC i e when there are only two devices on the segment of the network that can potentially transmit at the same time In full duplex mode the base modem will transmit and receive at the same time However it cannot detect corruption of transmissions therefore it is essential that no more than two devices are on the network segment the so called collision domain Half duplex Sets the duplex mode for the base modem terrestrial IP traffic interface Edit Unit Interface IP Misc Traffic Card Speed Duplex Screen Options Traffic card speed duplex Auto New 1000M full duplex Auto 7 107 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook In this mode the IP Traffic card will auto negotiate both the speed and duplex setting for the interface 10M half duplex In this mode the IP Traffic card will auto negotiate both the speed and duplex setting for the interface but as part of the negotiation will advertise 10Mbps half duplex as the only option available 10M full duplex In this mode the IP Traffic card will auto negotiate both the speed and dupl
315. or set to be a balance between both This flexibility allows FastLink to be used in place of both TPC and conventional LDPC Edit Tx FEC Outer Menu Outer 1 RS mode 2 Advanced This menu contains the following options e RS mode This controls whether the Reed Solomon outer FEC encoder is active e Advanced This submenu allows custom values of n k and interleaver depth to be set Reed Solomon FEC is a powerful scheme wrapped around the inner FEC that can be used to correct the remaining errors from the Viterbi and TCM inner FEC The code rate is specified by three values namely n k and t These have a fixed relationship of n k 2t making t half the difference between n and k A typical code rate is specified as n k t 126 112 7 Reed Solomon error correction works on codewords blocks of bytes where n is the length of the block of which there are k bytes of original data and 2t bytes of error correction information The Reed Solomon codec can correct any bytes in error up to a value of t bytes In the above example with 1 7 up to seven bytes within 126 may be corrected no matter 7 35 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook how many individual bits per byte are in error However when the error rate exceeds the correctable level unlike other FEC schemes that degrade gracefully Reed Solomon fails catastrophically Once the error correction threshold is passed then the codec considers it
316. orts Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem i e changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise cause untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to 7x Clock In the Data In signal is checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to nternal or Rx the Data In signal is checked against the Int Tx Clk Out signal By selecting Advanced it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line RS or Device DTE Ready In line TR switch to the inactive state It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line RS by selecting Change Tx Modulator Carrier RTS Controlled 10 5 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook EIA530 in V 35 Mode If the EIA 530 connector is fitted and V 35 signals are selected under Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial then the following interface description applies Circuit Electrical Old Style Number Levels Winchester Y Clock In Sig Valid In Sig Accpt d Out 5 DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX wem e Tw pe I LU In A EL COMMON LINES Shield Protective ground Device DTE Ready In 2 1 0 Device DCE Ready Out GNE 18 Remote Loop In 21 The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as
317. ot selection and reordering has been simplified by the use of edit boxes for each timeslot as shown overleaf The boxes allow the association of specific terrestrial timeslots with satellite timeslots 7 162 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook PARADISE DATACOM QUANTUM SERIES STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT SUMMARY Baseband Clocks Demodulation C Descrambler ID Paradise modem Framing Timeslots Overhead Control Shared UNIT STATUS Incorrect settings in continuous mode RX TRAFFIC Number of timeslots from jo Maintain timeslot ID over 55 not maintain TS identity satellite satellite TA TRAFFIG Partial insert Normal TEST MODE TX CARRIER 9 lr dededededgggddd gd Dress enter to change values Help Move the cursor over an item s label for help Transmit Timeslot Selection Screen 1 20 6 System Log The system log can be viewed using the View Log menu tab An example log is shown overleaf PARADISE DATACOM QUANTUM SERIES STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Configuration Monitor Alarms SUMMARY e D Clear Date Alarm Control Shared Jul 21 16 41 34 Alarm RxDeframerTS32SyncLossAlarm Raised Jul 21 16 41 34 Alarm R DeframerSyncLossAlarm Raised UT VENTUS Jul 21 16 41 34 Alarm RxDemodUnilockedAlarm Raised RX TRAFFIC Jul 21 16 41 28 Alarm RxDeframerTS32SyncLossAlarm Clear
318. p paradise co uk Subject Paradise Paradise Email report interval Set how often an automatic Bounce address another amp aolcom Email report interval Disabled iv email report is generated Email Configuration Screen As an example of how to use email data within a spreadsheet consider the case of graphing constellation data This can be done through the following steps e Having set up the modem to a working state configure the SMTP mail server and recipient email details e Select the Constellation data check box and click the Send email now button e Wait for the email to be received at the recipient s account and open it e To import the constellation data into a spreadsheet program Microsoft Excel is used in this example do the following Double click on the email attachment constellation csv and open it this should automatically start Excel if not save the attachment and then open it directly from within Excel e Within Excel highlight the A and B columns Select the Chart Wizard from the toolbar or alternatively select the nsert menu followed by Chart Select XY Scatter as the chart type Select the Scatter topmost sub chart type Select Next and then accept the defaults for Data Hange and Series Add a chart title and X and Y titles as desired Select Finish and then resize the resulting graph as desired An example of the output is shown over the page 7 173 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation
319. particular modulation or FEC configuration A No Paired Carrier imposes no special parameter limitations on the carriers involved However sometimes it is advantageous to use the bandwidth savings to switch to a more robust modulation and coding scheme but this is application dependent Q Can Paired Carrier handle multiple transmit and receive carriers A No the separate Paradise PCMA 70 Satellite Bandwidth Extender should be used if you require to cancel multiple carriers appearing within the cancellation bandwidth Q Can Paired Carrier handle asymmetric carriers that is carriers with different data rates and or different symbol rates on transmit and receive A Yes the Paired Carrier can handle asymmetric carriers The transmit and receive parameters are totally independent Q My transmit and receive carrier levels off satellite are different can still use the Paired Carrier satellite signal canceller A Yes the wanted and unwanted signals off satellite can be of different levels however the wanted and unwanted signal levels power spectral density should normally be within 10dB of each other Symbol rate asymmetry of up to 12 1 is supported It is sometimes possible to relax these conditions subject to the constraints of an overall detailed link budget analysis Power asymmetry must be kept between 10 to 10dB using the equation Power ratio dB Near PSD Far PSD 10log Near symbol rate Far symbol rate Q D
320. pending on whether it is in bridging or routing mode Edit Unit Interface IP Misc Encapsulation PID Screen Units Minimum value Encapsulation PID 768 to 1023mins 970 Step 1 New 970 None 768 Maximum value 1023 Step size Factory default Description 1 970 When encapsulating Ethernet frames or IP packets into MPEG2 packets this specifies the PID value to be entered into the MPEG2 packets that are being created Note that the value is in decimal The PID can then be used for filtering MPEG2 packets on the receive side 7 105 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface IP Misc QOS Scheme Options Factory default Weighted QoS Off 1 Off 2 On Off In this mode no prioritization is made between different IP packets entering or leaving the modem On In this mode the modem implements IEEE 802 1p packet prioritization This allows for 8 classes of data to be specified as part of a 3 bit field within the layer 2 IEEE 802 1q VLAN header The packets must already be tagged at the point of entry to the modem Priority 7 is typically used for network critical traffic such as dynamic routing protocol packets priorities 5 and 6 for video and voice etc The modem uses the priority tag to decide how to process each packet The options are e Strict priority queuing packets are queued for transmission based solely on their priority highest w
321. ping the Main key pressed down while the modem is powering up the recovery mode is entered It is possible to perform the equivalent operation remotely through the serial port on the 1 for n connector please contact Customer Technical Support for more details In this mode you can still make a connection from a web browser to the modem using the default IP address and subnet displayed on the screen Note that this may require the PC IP address and subnet to be changed to be compatible with the subnet being used by the modem A very basic web page will be displayed that requests the location of the file that the modem is to be upgraded with The upgrade will then proceed as normal and the modem will restart when the operation is complete f the basic web page does not display properly then it may be necessary to flush the browser cache in Internet Explorer this is achieved by going to the menu option tab Tools Internet Options General and selecting Delete Files from the Temporary Internet Files options A software upgrade cannot be performed whilst the modem is on traffic Once the modem upgrade process starts normal modem functions are suspended The modem configuration prior to upgrade is maintained and the modem will use this configuration after the upgrade 1 20 11 2 Procedure This procedure allows a Quantum or Evolution series modem to be upgraded with the latest version of software N Failure to follow this procedure coul
322. pler buffer slips in relation to overflows and underflows shown on the display as O and U respectively The counts can be cleared by pressing the 0 key while on this screen The counts are also cleared when the demodulator goes out of lock Note that the Doppler buffer is not used when Satellite clock is selected as the Rx clock source 7 9 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Status PCMA Screen PCMA Locked Offset 0 02kHz Delay 262 1ms This screen shows the status of Paired Carrier e PCMA status is shown as Locked when Paired Carrier has locked to one of the overlapping carriers Note that when Paired Carrier is enabled the demodulator cannot lock until Paired Carrier has locked PCMA status is shown as Unlocked when Paired Carrier has not managed to lock to a carrier Please consult the separate Paired Carrier Quick Start Guide for a list of potential causes If Paired Carrier is disabled then PCMA status will be shown as PCMA disabled e The frequency offset between the two interfering overlapped carriers is shown on the second line e The measured delay to the satellite is shown on the third line Once this value is established then the carrier acquisition time can be reduced by setting the Paired Carrier minimum and maximum satellite delays accordingly it is recommended that these are set to the measured delay 0 5ms respectively via the Edit Rx Carrier Advanced PCMA menu Status ACM Scre
323. provides the High Rate Async ESC facility 2400 Baud at 64kbps and the Aux channel either the Intelsat low rate ESC facility 50 Baud at 64kbps or a variable rate synchronous Aux circuit However to use the Aux channel in a synchronous mode the IDR option must be fitted Without the IDR option that has separate ports for ESC amp Aux channels both ESC and Aux channels ie high rate async ESC amp Intelsat low rate ESC cannot be used simultaneously e n IDR Mode this port is not used as when the IDR option is fitted separate ESC and Aux ports on the IDR card replace this shared ESC Aux port Refer to the definitions of the ESC amp Aux ports on the 50 way IDR ESC Aux Backward Alarm connector on the following few pages Standard Lead A constellation monitor serial lead part number M1479 is available from Paradise Datacom This lead provides the required connections to a 25 pin D type for a PC connection note that this is currently unused by the modem and three BNCs for connecting to an oscilloscope for the constellation monitor 11 5 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook ESC Aux and Backward Alarms Connector This connector is fitted as part of the IDR option Note that when this option is fitted the ESC and Aux ports on this connector replace the shared ESC Aux port on the Async ESC connector Connector type 50 pin D female ESC Port Sync Async RS485 RS422 RS232 Usage Usage 3 xs Goa onr
324. ps ADPCM audio ports on the IDR card or a composite128kbps data stream can be generated from the two 32kbps ADPCM audio ports plus 64kbps from the main data port e Advanced When the user level is set to Advanced this allows configuration of framing timeslots and overhead Edit Tx Baseband Mode Screen Baseband mode Continuous 1 Continuous 2 Drop MUX 3 Audio data Options Continuous This selects normal continuous data interface operation Drop MUX This requires the Drop and Insert SAF features to be enabled It processes a T1 or E1 PCM bearer with Tx data being dropped from specific timeslots of the bearer on the Rx side data can be inserted back into the same timeslots or into different timeslots Audio data This requires an IDR card to be fitted plus IBS SMS satellite framing which provides a P1348 emulation mode It uses the audio ports normally used for the IDR audio ESC circuit as the main traffic data A 64kbps carrier can be generated comprising two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels 7 20 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook or a 128kbps carrier can be generated comprising 64kbps data from the modem main data interface plus two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels These modes emulate the popular P1348 P1448 voice data MUX card Factory default Continuous Description Mode selection for baseband processing Edit Tx Baseband Data Rate Screen Tx data rate 4800 to 600000
325. r MUX is active or 2048k IBS G 732 mode is enabled type and AIS Check the bearer type is specified correctly This fault normally occurs only when there are significant errors on the terrestrial link or when the signal is supplied with AIS and the modem is set to ignore AIS Check that the AIS detector is not disabled There is an option to make the modem re seek frame synchronisation when CRC synchronisation is lost check the modem is not set to expect a CRC and is forcing frame re acquisition when CRC is lost but there is no CRC on the PCM signal Tx fault Dropped data is The specific timeslots dropped by the Drop MUX contain all ones AIS indicating all ones AIS This is different to the Tx Fault Data input upstream equipment fault is all ones AIS message described above which refers to the whole PCM bearer being AIS In this case it is only the specific dropped timeslots that contain AIS This is normally used to indicate an upstream equipment fault it is not a modem fault Tx fault CRC sync loss The modem only seeks Cyclic Redundancy Code CRC on Tx input sync when the Tx baseband is set to use the Drop mux in G 732 mode or 2048k IBS G 732 0 overhead mode and when set by the user to process CRC s If CRC sync is permanently lost check if a CRC is present on the PCM signal Tx fault Input BER gt 1E The Bit Error Rate at the Tx input measured on the PCM 3 Frame Alignment Words is worse than 1x
326. r HPA etc The backward alarm is normally a deferred alarm meaning it should be checked but it is not necessarily a failure of the traffic path at this end Low Rate ESC Channel The low rate ESC channel is a very low rate One bit of TS32 is allocated to carry the ESC information and so the rate is one bit per frame ie 1 64x8 one 512th the framed data rate or 1 480th the unframed rate For example at 64kbps the ESC channel is a synchronous rate of 133bps However Intelsat did not define a synchronous interface to the channel only an oversampled asynchronous interface ie a data line without a clock line This means that the Baud rate of the async channel must be one third to one quarter of the synchronous rate to ensure each Baud period of the async word is sampled 3 or 4 times necessary otherwise the reconstructed async character cannot be read at the far end This is a very poor use of the bandwidth but the definition was made to allow the facility to be added to then current equipment with minimal hardware implications The Intelsat defined limit is 1 2000th of the data rate but in practice this can be pushed to about 1 1500th of the data rate Timeslot ID Maintenance Timeslot identity maintenance is the facility to maintain the identity of individual data streams when multiplexed together into one aggregate rate carrier eg in its simplest form two independent 64kbps circuits in one 128kbps carrier Typically such individual d
327. r Ethernet EIA530 in X 21 Mode The EIA530 interface can provide both X 21 DCE and X 21 DTE operation For X 21 operation the interface must be set to RS422 mode and the Tx amp Rx Clocking modes must be set correctly With the use of the appropriate adaptor lead to convert to the X 21 standard 15 pin D connector a full X 21 DCE or DTE interface is available 10 10 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook X 21 DCE Operation This has only a clock from the modem to the terrestrial equipment Configure a cable with a 15 pin D female at one end X 21 DCE and a 25 pin D male at the other end as follows X 21 DCE Signal RS422 Circuit Electrical 15 pin D female Description Name Number Levels Name A B DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX NUN ONT 14 Rsaz2 DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX Clock Out e e p p pe BEN ON CR COMMON LINES Y Prot Shield Prot ground Clocking Data Out Sig Valid Out ui For the interface to function as X 21 the clocking must be set as follows The Hx Clock Menu is used to set the source of the single clock from the modem as Satellite Internal or Station Clock Tx Clk In does not exist in X 21 and cannot be used The Tx clock should be set to Rx as the Tx data is clocked by the same clock as the Rx data The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10
328. r point to multipoint operation the Paradise PCMA 70 Satellite Bandwidth Extender can be used to overlay several smaller carriers on top of a larger carrier It then cancels the larger unwanted carrier before feeding the output to the individual demodulators responsible for processing each of the smaller carriers The PCMA 70 works with any network topology and any type of modem technology so long as the outbound is an SCPC carrier including star topology hub spoke one to many FDMA mesh single satellite hop many to many hybrid star 8 59 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook mesh Single Channel Per Carrier SCPC and Demand Assigned Multiple Access DAMA voice and data networks Paired Carrier helps in the case of bandwidth limited links However if a link is instead power limited then its design can be changed to turn it into a bandwidth limited link and then Paired Carrier can be used to improve the bandwidth utilisation It should be noted that Paired Carrier operation is waveform agnostic and will work with all modulation and FEC schemes It is used in addition to not instead of other bandwidth saving techniques Paired Carrier and DVB S2 represent the two most bandwidth efficient technologies available today and can uniquely be used together in the Quantum modem Some frequently asked questions about Paired Carrier operation along with answers are provided below Q Does Paired Carrier require a
329. ramer Outer FEC Inner FEC Modulator Demodulator shows the path used in DVB S2 and SmartLink processing Note that pure DVB S2 bypasses the SCPC framer and uses the DVB S2 framer only SmartLink takes the output of the SCPC framer which includes the output from Drop and Insert the ESC channel etc and overlays this with DVB S2 framing Even although this can involve two lots of framing depending on whether SCPC Closed Network mode is selected the increased overhead is more than offset by the savings of switching to DVB S2 space segment The diagram shows which features can be mixed in SmartLink mode and which cannot for example 16QAM appears on the SCPC processing path only and is therefore not available when SmartLink is operational 8 55 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Tx Modulator Interface EE E EET RA ElA530 IBS SMS RS Intelsat Viterbi BPSK X21M 35RS232 IDR BC TPC QPSK R5422 Closed Net ESC OM 73 Scrambler TCM OOPSK LYDS Closed Het 135 Scrambler LDPC BPSK G703 75 120 ohm IBS Scrambler Sequential 160AM HS SI Turbo Scrambler Quad E1 RJ 15 IP RJ 15 Eurocom Modulator PURE DVB s2 BYPASSES SCPC FRAMER DYB S2 OPTIONAL PROCESSING PATH FOR HYBRID SCPCIDVB S2 OPERATION DVB 52 BCH LDPC OPSK Baseband SPSK Frame 16 OPSH D VB S2 SPACE SEGMENT Processing Paths through Modem Top Path is SCPC Lower Path is DVB S2 SmartLink If DVB S2 is required but no S
330. rd the distant Eb No and or the AUPC delta power this may be useful in ascertaining whether AUPC manages to maintain the Eb No within the parameters you have set and also in being able to specify to the satellite operator the exact power being transmitted at a particular time 1 24 1 for 1 Operation 1 24 1 Basic Theory Any two modems will operate as a 1 for 1 redundant pair with no other equipment except for a single interconnecting lead two power splitter combiners and cable forms to parallel up the interfaces of both units Both modems operate normally with respect to incoming data and IF signals but only one Modem enables its satellite and terrestrial outputs The diagram below illustrates how a 1 for 1 redundant pair is configured TO Data UPCHAIN 3 i FROM Single Evolution Series Modem DOWNCHAIN 1 1 Modem Redundancy Connection Schematic TX IF L BAND MODEM A COMBINER Data EEE ose 2222 o e000 TO P3480 UPCHAIN 1 1 CONTROL CABLE FROM DOWNCHAIN Data e mmm ej i MODEM B RX IF L BAND SPLITTER Equivalent 1 1 pair 8 19 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook The pair of units connected as shown may be used as a direct replacement for a single unit with all connectors and pin assignments remaining the same A particular advantage of this arrangement is that one unit of the pair may be replaced without in
331. re it is used to move forwards in the log by 100 entries Note that when entering the values of timeslots to be dropped or inserted the 0 key pressed together at the same time as the Right arrow key deletes the character at the cursor The MAIN key returns the user to the MAIN menu from anywhere in the menu hierarchy On a menu the ENTEH key is used to navigate to the submenu highlighted by the cursor When entering or selecting a new value the ENTER key is used to accept the new value and a further press of the ENTER key is required to move to the next screen with the exception of the configure all function where one press of the ENTER key provides both steps Note that when a new value is accepted it is applied to the modem hardware immediately 7 3 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook On a menu the BACK key is used to navigate to the previous screen When entering or selecting a new value the BACK key is used to cancel any change to the current value and move backward to the previous screen 1 18 1 3 Alphanumeric Keys The alphanumeric keys provide numeric entry In special cases where it is valid to enter alphabetic characters repeated pressing of a numeric key will cause the key to cycle through its associated lower case and then upper case alphabetic characters in a similar way to a mobile phone 1 18 1 4 Special Function Keys Help Help information can be displayed for any M amp C co
332. re forwarded out of the serial RS485 M amp C interface i e converted from IP to serial commands o Packets sent to port 6704 are forwarded over the ESC to port 6701 on the remote modem At the remote modem packets received over the ESC on port 6701 are treated as local M amp C commands for the modem and go no further e You can send M amp C packets to port 6701 on the local modem at any time when using the ESC channel in IP mode without having to set the Remote M amp C interface If you just want to bridge IP packets then you can ignore the remote M amp C interface setting To summarise the ESC bridging options e P can be used over the ESC and the main data channel at the same time whether using the base modem IP or the IP Traffic card e With the M amp C port in the bridge and IP selected for both the ESC and main data channel the M amp C port is now bridged to the ESC channel not the IP traffic port The IP traffic port is still bridged but only to the satellite port when the ESC is not being used bridging the M amp C port bridges it to the IP traffic port and the satellite port Note that the ESC channel is used to support the AUPC feature but this does not prevent it being used for other purposes at the same time the AUPC messages are just multiplexed in with the other data 1 32 6 IP Interoperability Over satellite the modem uses HDLC to encapsulate the Ethernet frames or IP packets unless DVB S2 is being used in
333. recognised as the best performing of all header compression schemes including IPHC and CRTP and is the most suitable for satellite It typically compresses the 28 bytes of UDP and IP headers down to between one and three bytes Proprietary Ethernet header compression is supported in addition and typically reduces 14 bytes of Ethernet frame down to 1 byte IP payload compression is provided compliant to RFC 1951 DEFLATE and compresses TCP and UDP packet payloads by typically 50 It must be used with TCP acceleration and or header compression Note that the IP Traffic card is dedicated to processing IP satellite traffic only remote IP based M amp C including SNMP and access to the modem web server continue to be supported via the base modem RJ45 M amp C connector only Note also that all Evolution Quantum satellite modems support a dual IPV4 IPV6 TCP IP stack on both the base modem and the IP Traffic card IPVA IPV6 bridging and routing are supported and the modem s embedded web server is also IPVA IPV6 compliant Modem IP addresses and static routes can be entered and displayed in either IPV4 or IPV6 format 1 13 8 Optional L band BUC Power Supplies The following PSU options are available for powering BUCs 200W 24V output A C in D C out 48V input 180W 48V output D C in D C out 48V input 180W 24V output D C in D C out 48V input 180W 48V output D C in D C out Optional BUC Power Supplies 6 4 Quantum
334. ressed Conceptually a user at the local front panel interface is logged in as admin when in Giveaway mode and there is no remote admin user currently logged in otherwise the local front panel interface is logged in as a view only user In Giveaway mode the user at the local front panel interface can explicitly log out by pressing the Main key 1 17 3 Takeaway Mode In Takeaway mode either the user at the local front panel interface or a remote admin user can control the modem at any time In this mode there is no restriction on the number of admin users that can be logged in at one time When the modem is switched out of Takeaway mode to Local mode then all remote admin users will be automatically logged out When it is switched from Takeaway to Giveaway then all but one instance of admin users will be automatically logged out Although technically only one user is in control at any time control is relinquished as soon as a command is sent and therefore different control requests from different users are simply interleaved with each other Because of this Takeaway mode is best used in circumstances where there are clear operational procedures in place to avoid conflicts arising in relation to modem control 1 2 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 18 Front Panel Interface 1 18 1 Keypad Operation 1 18 1 1 Cursor A cursor shown in inverse video is used to highlight the current position on the LCD d
335. ries Installation and Operating Handbook Async ESC Connector This connector comprises e An RS232 RS422 RS485 async port for use on either the ESC or Aux channels e An RS232 serial port currently unused e An RS422 Station Clock input ASYNC ESC CONNECTOR RS422 Async port for ESC or Aux channel RS485 Differential Station Clock This provides a RS422 compatible station clock in addition to the unbalanced 750 station clock BNC connector Async Port for ESC or Aux Channels The modem has two fully independent data channels that may be carried over the satellite within any overhead that is added These are referred to as the ESC and Aux channels The shared interface on this connector allows the use of only one of these channels at a time and then only in an Async mode there is no clock signal on this port If both ESC and Aux channels are to be used together or either channel used in a synchronous mode then the IDR option must be fitted which provides separate ESC amp Aux ports both with clock data and octet lines When the IDR option is fitted the shared ESC Aux port on the Async ESC connector is DISABLED When configured for different services the ESC and Aux channels provide as follows 11 4 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook e n Closed Net Plus ESC mode the ESC channel provides the variable rate async ESC facility the Aux channel is not used e n IBS SMS modes the ESC channel
336. ription This option is applicable only with G 732 Drop Insert bearers when the Process bearer CRC option is set to Check CRC It controls whether a strict implementation of ITU G 704 is carried out forcing re acquisition of the terrestrial Drop Insert frame synchronization if CRC synchronization cannot be achieved within 8ms Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Timeslots Menu Timeslots 1 Number used 2 Timeslots 3 Maintain ID 4 ldle code This menu contains the following options Number used This controls the number of timeslots dropped off the terrestrial bearer and sent over the satellite Timeslots This option is used to select which timeslots are dropped Maintain ID This controls whether timeslot identity is maintained over satellite i e whether the timeslots represent different data streams or are all part of the same stream Idle code This controls whether dropped timeslots are replaced with Idle code Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Timeslots Number Used Screen 14 6 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook No timeslots used 0 to 31 01 Step 1 New 01 Units Minimum value 0 Maximum value 31 Step size 1 Factory default 0 Description Controls the number of timeslots dropped off the terrestrial bearer and sent over the satellite Edit Tx Baseband Advanced Timeslots Timeslots Screen Terr slots to drop to satellite 1 New 0 18 31 17 16 1 Units Minimum val
337. rly when operating with lower data rates a reduction in the processing delay associated with Reed Solomon FEC is the prime goal In such circumstances use the Custom Features feature and select shorter codewords to reduce the encoder decoder amp interleaver de interleaver delay For example switching from Intelsat standard values of n k t 126 112 7 to 64 56 4 provides approximately the same correction ability 7 in 126 5 5 and 4 in 64 6 25 respectively with similar overheads 126 112 12 5 64 56 14 3 but with interleaving amp decoder delays reduced from 5632 to 3104 bits 156ms to 85ms at 32kbps 1 29 Data and Symbol Rates The normal constraint for a modem is the range of Symbol Rates over which the modem can operate correctly The Symbol Rate range however is not of initial interest to most modem users as they first need to know if the modem can operate at the terrestrial Data Rate they require This section briefly explains the relationship between Data Rates and Symbol Rates 8 25 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook The Data Rate is normally the frequency of the clock used on the terrestrial port however if Drop Insert is active the Data Rate is 64kbps times the number of timeslots dropped Inserted As the modem uses PSK Phase Shift Keying the Symbol Hate is the rate of phase changes on the carrier Each phase change represents a new symbol to the demodulator and dependin
338. rnet Traffic Parameter Throughput depends on traffic format formats such as UDP that do not require Standard acknowledgements run at up to the maximum data unaccelerated rate of the modem unaccelerated TCP which requires acknowledgements will typically run at up to 128kbps per connection 80 Connections Sec 1 61 BUC LNB facilities Parameter Modem Mains input 48V DC 2A output 100W to BUC via Tx IFL Mains input 24V DC 4A output 100W to BUC via Tx IFL BUC Power Supply Mains input 48V DC 3 5A output 200W to BUC via Tx IFL Options Mains input 24V DC 6A output 200W to BUC viaTx IFL 48V DC input 48V DC 3 5A output 180W to BUC via Tx IFL 48V DC input 24V DC 6A output 180W to BUC viaTx IFL LNB Power 15 24V 0 5A DC to LNB via Rx IFL standard Requires a BUC Power Supply to be fitted FSK Control Option Allows monitor amp control of a compatible BUC from the Modem via the IFL Requires the High Stability 7 5x10 yr Reference 10MHz Reference via Oscillator Option IFL Option 10MHz may be provided via the Tx IFL to the BUC and via the Rx IFL to the LNB 13 13 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 62 Performance Graphs For FastLInk low latency LDPC BER curves please see separate datasheet on the Paradise Datacom web site at http www paradisedata com 13 14 1E 2 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 8 Quantum and Evolution
339. ronized to the local modem s GPS signal via the satellite clock making use of the G 703 balanced or unbalanced connectors This signal can then be used for synchronizing the remote site equipment Furthermore even if a GPS receiver is not present in the network the remote modem can stil synthesize a T1 E1 synchronization signal in this case the synchronization signal will be locked to the satellite clock Tx Operation This is a special case of Internal Tx Clock When internal clock is selected and the selected terrestrial interface is not G703 then a further question is asked Forward the G703 clock as a clock reference Options OFF E1 T1 Factory default OFF 8 8 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Description Allows a high stability reference signal to be transferred across satellite If the user selects Off then the internal data rate clock generated by the modem is locked to the modem s internal high stability clock reference This is the same as the original internal clock mode of operation However if the user selects 71 E1 then the internal data rate clock generated by the modem is locked to the T1 E1 timing signal applied to the G703 interface NOTE this mode is only accessible when the user selects internal clock and the selected Terrestrial interface is NOT G703 Rx Operation This is a special case of Satellite clock When the user selects Satellite clock and the selected terrestria
340. rs such as Rx Power Level Eb No etc In fact all of the information presented on the graphs can be retrieved from the modem in order to for example generate monthly Quality of Service reports regarding modem availability and operational performance Graphing requires the Java Runtime Environment JRE to be installed on the PC that is being used for viewing since the graphing is done by a Java applet The JRE can be downloaded from various web sites including http www java com Graphs will not display 7 154 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook properly if an incompatible older version of the JRE is installed see the web page Help box for more information The first time that a graph is displayed the following message will pop up This is because the Java applet requires privileges to run and therefore includes a security certificate The applet does not write any information to storage on the PC and is not harmful in any way you should select Yes in order to be able to view graphs Warning Security EN X AN Do vau want to trust the signed applet distributed by ParadizeD atacom Publisher authenticity can not be vented AN The security certificate was issued by a company that is not trusted T i The security certificate has nat expired and iz still walid Java Applet Security Warning Screen 1 20 2 1 Spectrum Graph An example spectrum graph is shown overleaf This
341. rted into the terrestrial multi frame in the correct positions to maintain the RBS Note that when the Extended Drop and Insert option is used with a Quad E1 option card then only the Timeslot ID Maintenance feature is available 13 7 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 53 Advanced ESC and Advanced Aux Option Specifications Parameter A single port provides the interface for optional high rate async ESC IBS SMS option or Closed Net Plus ESC or the Intelsat low rate async IBS ESC channel RS232 RS422 or RS485 external interfaces or internal link to remote M amp C port software selected Other devices externally wired in parallel with M amp C port can also be accessed remotely Overhead scales to provide any user specified async ESC baud rate whatever the satellite data rate ESC limit is approximately 7096 of main channel rate overhead varies from 0 596 to 7 709 f IBS High rate async data using from 1 32 EDI ED DON option to 22 32 of the IBS overhead providing async baud rates from 0 2 to 5 196 of the terrestrial rate e g up to 22400 baud at 64kbps Includes modes compatible with the P300 and P400 Series P230 amp P1300 P1361 using 20 32 of the overhead With IBS option and Advanced Aux option Intelsat low rate async ESC definition carried in bit 1 of TS32 providing a synchronous channel at 1 480 of the data rate allowing up to one quarter of this rate for over sampl
342. s this affects the occupied bandwidth e Advanced This controls the Paired Carrier PCMA carrier overlap feature On L band modems it also allows control of an LNB Edit Rx Carrier Frequency Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Carrier Inversion Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent 7 70 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Rx Carrier Advanced Menu Advanced 1 LNB 2 PCMA This menu has the following options e LNB This controls the LNB type DC supply and 10MHz reference to the LNB and 1 1 LNB control whether LNB services stay with the failed modem or switch over to the backup modem on a failure Edit Rx Carrier Advanced LNB Menu The following LNB screens are only available on the L band modem LNB 1 LNB type 2 PSU 3 Reference 4 1 1 This menu has the following options e LNB type This allows selection of the LNB type that is fitted It also allows the modem to display and the user to edit the final SHF frequencies instead of the normal L band frequencies e PSU This allows the DC supply to the LNB from the modem to be turned on or off e Reference This controls whether a 10MHz reference signal is supplied to the LNB from the modem e 1 for 1 This controls whether LNB services i e DC supply and 10MHz reference stay with the on line modem or switch to the standby modem when a 1 for 1 switchover occurs in a 1
343. s Installation and Operating Handbook dium e Ja PARADISE DATACOM 3 QUANTUM SERIES STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Local XE Monitor IP Traffic Alarms Constellation Temperature Eb No bd AUPC Eb No h d Rx Power AUPC Pwr Freq Offset ID Paradise modem Serial No 20700392 Mode In control Normal width Super wide High definition Control Shared UNIT STATUS Reference Level 30 dBm Sensitivity 10 db grat _ Persistence RX TRAFFIC TX TRAFFIC TEST MODE TX CARRIER a graph is not displayed on is page then it is because yo eed to install a suitable ersion of the Java Runtime Environment Please click on e following link for further information How to install Java Amplitude dB 5 000 000 2 500 000 0 2 500 000 5 000 000 140 0000MHz Signal Spectrum Graph 1 20 2 2 Constellation Graph An example signal constellation graph is shown below This can be used to check for correct modem operation including issues such as distortion and phase noise A persistence mode is also available and allows the user to see the long term effects of phase noise and interference Excessive phase noise can cause cycle skips otherwise seen as unwanted rotations within the constellation 7 156 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook PARADISE DATACOM AES QUANTUM SERIES STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Moni
344. s not addressable e With an IP card fitted and the two base modem ports bridged then base modem access can be used for M amp C only no base modem data will be passed over satellite e fno IP traffic card is fitted and the M amp C port is out of the bridge i e the traffic port has its own IP address then the IP traffic port and M amp C port must be on different subnets because otherwise the modem does not know which of the two ports to respond out of 1 32 2 1 Gateways The key to understanding the default gateways on the modems is being aware that there is one TCP IP stack running on a processor on the base modem and if fitted one TCP IP running on a processor on the IP Traffic card and that there can only ever be one gateway associated with each TCP IP stack in operation even although the modem menus support three gateways e M amp C gateway e Traffic port gateway e Satellite port gateway The traffic port gateway is never used unless an IP traffic card is fitted The satellite port gateway is never used unless routing mode is selected You can never set both a traffic port gateway and a satellite port gateway at the same time because the software controlling the associated IP features is running on a single TCP IP stack In routing mode you can set either the satellite gateway or the IP traffic gateway It is undefined which will be used if you attempt to set both There are no hard and fast rules for setting gateways but if ther
345. s worse than the user threshold set for the deferred alarm Rx warning Rx symbol The modems current configuration exceeds the rate outside range permissible symbol rate check the configuration The clock selected as the Receive data output clock has failed The modem has switched to using a backup clock generated by the Rx PLL to preserve the receive traffic This fault can only occur if the source is the same frequency as the Rx data rate otherwise the clock is not used directly but is instead rate converted by the Rx PLL and would result in a different failure Check which signal the PLL uses as a backup clock Rx warning Selected Rx output clock has failed Rx warning Demodulator FIFO overflowed Rx warning Maximum multiframe period too small Consult factory Deframer failed to find a frame length to support TS ID maintenance Try reducing ESC baud rate or increasing maximum multiframe period 12 7 This should not occur in normal operating circumstances Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook FautText Notes Relays To Ter To Sat Other Rx warning Backward alarm from satellite detected at Rx input indicating Tx or downstream of Tx equipment fault Rx warning CAS multiframe backward alarm from satellite indicating equipment downstream of Tx has failed to find CAS MF sync Rx warning Backward alarm 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 from satellite indicati
346. satellite delays Edit Rx Carrier Advanced PCMA Location Screens When the Round trip delay method for Paired Carrier is set to Location then the following screens are displayed in sequence 7 79 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Earth station lon 180 to 180Degs 000 00 Step 0 01Degs New 000 00 E Units Minimum value Maximum value Step size Factory default Description Degs 180 00 180 00 0 01 000 00 The longitudinal position of the modem earth station The modem front panel Up and Down arrow keys are used for setting and respectively Earth station lat 90 to 90Degs 00 00 Step 0 01Degs New 00 00 N Units Minimum value Degs 90 00 Maximum value 90 00 Step size Factory default Description 0 01 00 00 The latitudinal position of the modem earth station The modem front panel Up and Down arrow keys are used for setting and respectively 7 80 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Satellite lon 180 to 180Degs 000 00 Step 0 01Degs New 000 00 E Units Degs Minimum value 180 00 Maximum value 180 00 Step size 0 01 Factory default 000 00 Description The longitudinal position of the satellite The modem front panel Up and Down arrow keys are used for setting and respectively Edit Rx Carrier Advanced PCMA Delay S
347. satellite when routing mode is used The base modem will only ever use the M amp C gateway If the M amp C port is out of the bridge with no IP traffic card fitted then the M amp C gateway is applied to the IP traffic port if required then an M amp C gateway must be set up using a static route in this case 1 32 3 Throughput Performance Actual throughput performance depends on a number of factors including one way two way traffic packet size data rates and the mixture of IP features switched on There are endless combinations and therefore it is strongly recommended that empirical testing is undertaken prior to deployment to ensure that the required level of service can be provided The base modem throughput is restricted to 10000 packets per second It is good practice to put a switch or router between the modem and local network in order to minimize the number of packets the modem has to process as incidental network traffic not intended for satellite has the potential to push the modem over it packet processing limit The base modem packet processing limit equates to roughly 5Mbps of UDP at the smallest Ethernet frame size of 64 bytes TCP acceleration works to 10Mbps on the base modem The IP Traffic card throughput is restricted to 50000 packets per second This equates to roughly 25Mbps of UDP at smallest Ethernet frame size of 64 bytes TCP acceleration works to the maximum data rate of the modem currently 60Mbps on
348. sover cables 5 Connect the two transmit IF ports to the input ports of a suitable power splitter combiner of the correct impedance 50Ohm or 75Ohm and the appropriate frequency range The combined output is fed to the up conversion equipment Note that only one output is active at a time Because of the signal loss associated with splitter combiners the power level at the output of each modem needs to be increased by approximately 3 5dB 6 Connect the two receive IF ports to the two output ports of a suitable powersplitter combiner of the correct impedance 50Ohm or 75Ohm and the appropriate frequency range Both demodulators will receive an identical signal from the down conversion equipment via the splitter combiner Because of the wide dynamic range of the modem AGC circuitry there should be no need to modify signal levels 7 Check correct operation by performing a manual switch between the units via the Unit Advanced Operation menu The pair will not switch over unless the standby unit is operational i e does not indicate any fault Note that the pair can be tested in loopback mode but this requires the IF signals to be split and combined and looped back to the other unit Looping the output of one unit back to its self will not work since the standby unit output is muted and it will therefore not detect any carrier 1 25 Software Activated Features While some modem functions are available as plug in option cards the majority
349. stems use a Common Channel Signalling CCS where a whole timeslot is allocated to carry the signalling function between the ends of the link with protocols such as Signalling system No 7 etc running within that 64kbps channel Common Channel Signalling is used on both 1544kbps T1 and 2048kbps E1 systems although different signalling systems run on the common channel Channel Associated Signalling Some E1 PCM systems use Channel Associated Signalling CAS where a low rate data signalling channel is provided uniquely for each timeslot ITU G 704 defines these signalling channels as comprising of four bits named abcd that are sent every 16th frame resulting in a channel of 2kbps There is an individual 2kbps signalling channel for each of the 30 8 13 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook PCM channels timeslots 1 15 and 16 31 and these are carried sequentially in pairs in TS16 there is no signalling channel for TSO nor TS16 as TSO is reserved for the Frame Alignment Word and TS16 carries the signalling for the other timeslots Robbed Bit Signalling RBS Robbed bit signalling is a technique used on T1 PCM bearers whereby signalling is conveyed by stealing the signalling bandwidth from the 64kbps timeslot to which it relates Once every 6 frames one bit the least significant bit of the 8 bits per timeslot is stolen and used to convey signalling In T1 D4 which has a 12 frame terrestr
350. ster off On Switches the BER tester on Factory default Off Description Controls the BER test mode 7 145 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Test BER Tx Channel Screen Options Factory default Description BER channel Main channel New Main channel Main channel This substitutes the selected PRBS test pattern in place of the Tx main traffic channel ESC channel This selects the ESC channel as the path into which the PRBS test pattern is injected This is valid in IBS SMS IDR and Closed Network plus ESC The ESC channel must be configured before it can be used In IBS SMS and Closed Network plus ESC the Async ESC channel is used and can be configured to provide rates of up to 4 6 of the main data rate for BER testing When the ESC channel is selected in IBS SMS and Closed Network plus ESC the Async ESC is disabled and whatever bandwidth was assigned to it is used synchronously for BER testing In IDR mode the 8kbps synchronous ESC channel is used which can also be used in an asynchronous mode Aux channel This selects the Aux channel as the path into which the PRBS test pattern is injected This is valid in IBS SMS and IDR modes The Aux channel must be configured before it can be used In IBS SMS the overhead assigned to the mandatory Intelsat low rate oversampled Aux channel is used by the BER tester to provide a synchronous test channel of 0 296 of the main
351. submenu that contains options for selecting the inner and outer forward error correction FEC schemes e Descrambler This leads to a submenu that allows descrambling to be controlled e Carrier This leads to a submenu that allows the frequency and spectrum inversion to be controlled Rx Tx This option allows the receive path to be automatically configured to be the same as the transmit path thereby simplifying set up There are a number of exceptions including carrier frequency spectral inversion timeslots and clocks 1 19 3 2 1 Edit Rx Service Screen oee the description of the transmit path equivalent including follow on screens for FastLink optimization mode and DVB S2 frame size pilots setting 1 19 3 2 2 Edit Rx Baseband Menu See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Baseband Mode Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Baseband Data Rate Screen See the description of the transmit path equivalent Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Menu See the description of the transmit path equivalent Chapter 14 Edit Rx Baseband Advanced Framing Menu 7 58 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 2048k mode 2 CAS 3 TS order 4 Insert 5 Bearer 6 G732 sig 7 T1 sig 8 ABCD This menu contains the following options 2048k mode This option is used to indicate whether a 2048kbps traffic stream is formatted as G 732 or not CAS This option specifies
352. t data must fit into the 60 available data timeslots of the satellite frame exactly so that the next data is from the first TS again This brings in the following complication Each IBS frame has 60 timeslots available for data and so in order to provide timeslot ID maintenance the number of timeslots N must fit into 60 This limits the values of N to 1 Frame ie 60 available data timeslots N 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 Some further values are accommodated by mapping them into two frames 2 Frames ie 120 available data timeslots N 8 24 Finally to support one further rate four frame are used 4 Frames ie 240 available data timeslots N 16 The remaining values of N cannot have Timeslot ID Maintained by groups of 1 2 or 4 frames these are collectively know as the Odd values of N Odd values of N N 7 9 11 13 14 17 18 19 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 31 Most previous equipment could not provide timeslot ID maintenance for these odd values of N however the modem when equipped with the Extended D I feature uses a derivative of the IBS CAS Multiframe see later section CAS Multiframe to provide timeslot ID maintenance for even these remaining values of N Signalling Systems Introduction CCS CAS amp RBS Signalling systems are used to convey call status on PCM systems call status is information such as Busy Idle Ring tone Dialling etc Common Channel Signalling CCS Some PCM sy
353. t is screened to prevent spurious changeovers by noise induced in these high impedance signal leads Refer to the earlier section on 1 FOR 1 switching for details of 1 FOR 1 operation A standard 1 for 1 lead part number P1391 is available from Paradise Datacom The lead is 10cm long and is designed for use when two modems are mounted vertically adjacent to each other in the rack 11 2 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Alarms and AGC Connector Connector type 15 pin D male ALARMS CONNECTOR Fault Relay Common 2 4 Prompt Unit fault N O 1 12 1 Prompt Unit fault N C 3 Prompt Rx Traffic fault prompt N O Prompt Rx Traffic fault prompt N C Prompt Tx Traffic fault prompt N O Buffered direct AGC voltage This may be used as an antenna pointing signal when the demod is unlocked It responds to composite power in approximately a 2MHz bandwidth around the nominal Rx carrier frequency 14 Not connected To externally inhibit the Transmit carrier either apply a TTL CMOS low signal to pin 7 or short pin 7 to ground for example with an external relay closure All relay contacts rated 30V DC 2A or 125VAC 0 4A The functions are as defined in Section 6 5 Note N O means normally open in the non fail state of the modem relays energised when power is removed the relays fall back to the non normal ie non energised alarm state 11 3 Quantum and Evolution Se
354. t of the modem should be in the range 60dBm to 30dBm A level of 45dBm is recommended The maximum composite power level that should be applied to this port is 30dB above the desired carrier up to a maximum of OdBm Rx L band Input Option This is an N type female connector of 50Q impedance The carrier signal level presented at the input of the modem should be in the range 20dBm to 70dBm A level of 45dBm is recommended The maximum composite to wanted power level that can be applied to this port with no implementation loss is 35dBc with a maximum composite power level of 10dBm Fan There is a fan that runs at all times while the unit is powered This draws air in from the sides and expels to the rear The side vents must not be blocked 1 1 Redundancy Connector The Modem has a built in 1 for 1 redundancy controller that connects to the corresponding port of another modem via a 9 pin male D type connector A 1 1 redundancy system requires two modems a 1 1 control cable between the two redundancy connectors a data 6 17 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook split Y cable and passive splitters combiners for the IF ports An overview of 1 for 1 operation is provided in Section 8 4 Remote M amp C Connector This is a 9 pin female D type connector The modem supports the Paradise Universal Protocol PUP as specified in the document Remote M amp C Specification for Quantum and Evolution Series
355. ted onto the insert mux bearer avoiding overwriting a the data on the bearer This technique can be applied to lower rate carriers also For example suppose four destinations require mesh connectivity at 384kbps 6 x 64kbps although asymmetric operation up to any rate is possible Each site has a modulator transmitting 1152kbps 3 x 384kbps and three demodulators receiving the 384kbps from the other sites The satellite bandwidth requirement is for four 1152kbps carriers not twelve 384kbps carriers ie the same aggregate rate but possibly lower overall bandwidth when carrier spacing is taken into consideration gt A single T1 or E1 bearer is looped through three modems one operating as Tx Rx and two others in Rx only In this example we will assume it is a T1 PCM bearer gt The Tx data for all destinations arrives at the single Tx modem in each site on the T1 bearer in 18 timeslots Note that the ability to re order the Tx and Rx timeslots means the data can be in any timeslots and in any order gt Each of the four sites transmits a 1152kbps 3 x 384kbps carrier and all four destination sites receive the three carriers from the other destinations gt At each site all three modems are configured for Rx Partial Insert and the data for all but this site is discarded leaving a 384kbps to be inserted onto the looped T1 bearer by each Rx modem In this way the data from each site for this destination can be re inserted into the origin
356. tended for systems with long delays such as satellite With no acceleration TCP traffic over satellite would limit itself to a few hundred kbit s depending on the PC TCP window size regardless of the actual traffic bandwidth available over satellite Because the satellite delay is taken as evidence of link congestion TCP throttles back the amount of data it sends Acceleration allows approx 90 utilisation of whatever the available traffic bandwidth is over satellite Acceleration can be used in point to point and point to multipoint bridging modes as well as in routing mode When acceleration is used in bridging mode all UDP packets are bridged VPN packets although they use TCP cannot be accelerated because acceleration relies on making changes to the addresses in the original IP packet which is encrypted by the VPN as the payload of a new IP packet tunnel mode Even in transport mode where only the IP packet payload is encrypted authentication will detect when the modem alters any IP address and reject the packet at the end point Acceleration works by the modem spoofing TCP acknowledgements back to the local originating device as if they come from the remote end point eliminating the satellite delay Since there is no significant delay the originating PC assumes there is no congestion in the link and will therefore ramp up the level of TCP output to fill the available bandwidth 8 42 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and
357. tep 1 0 New 10 0 Units None Minimum value 0 0 Maximum value 9999 0 Step size 1 0 Factory default 9999 0 Description Sets the error rate threshold for dropped TRAU frames above which a dropped TRAU alarm will be generated when using the Sat ABIS interface card Edit Unit Advanced Alarms Thresholds LinkGuard Threshold Screen LinkGuard int threshold 0 0 to 9 9dB 0 1 Step 0 1dB New 0 1 7 129 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Units dB Minimum value 0 0 Maximum value 9 9 Step size 0 1 Factory default 1 5 Description Sets a power spectral density threshold used to monitor for any signal under the received carrier If the detected level of interference exceeds the threshold then an Rx traffic warning alarm is raised See Section 8 17 for more information on LinkGuard Edit Unit Advanced Alarms Actions Screens A number of screens are available that control the following Note that these are not described further with the exception of the LinkGuard screen Tx Rx AIS These control the action taken with respect to Alarm Indication Signal detection AIS can be ignored or set to raise an alarm regenerate AIS and send a backward alarm where possible LinkGuard This is used to switch LinkGuard threshold monitoring on and off When on LinkGuard will automatically check whether the level of interference is above the user set threshold and initiate an alarm w
358. terrupting traffic To enable the parallel operation of all the interfaces the off line unit provides no terminating load enabling the correct impedance to be maintained even when the two modems are connected in parallel All interfaces have the facility to disable their outputs either by making the outputs high impedance or by relay switching thereby enabling one of a redundant pair to drive the outputs without line contention In the event of a catastrophic failure of one modem the switching circuitry which is distributed between the two units will switch over to the operational unit 1 24 2 Switching Philosophy Both modems operate continuously with each internally monitoring its operational status on a regular basis There is no pre assigned master and slave unit Switchovers between units are minimised and a unit that is taken off line due to a failure will remain off line even if it returns to its normal working state If it does return to a normal state then it will act as the standby unit The modem software performs internal monitoring of operational status at a rate that prevents unnecessary switching However in the case of catastrophic failures the modem hardware performs the switch immediately without waiting for the software The logic has no memory i e a unit taken off line because of a failure will operate normally once it becomes operational again with the proviso that no unnecessary switchovers are made between units
359. tes the elapsed time since the test was started or restarted The Loss field is a count of the number of times that pattern synchronisation has been lost since the test started The Errors field indicates the total number of bits received in error since the test started The BER field indicates Bit Error Rate computed from the number of bit errors divided by the number of bits received 7 147 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Note that pressing 1 on the key pad while on this screen will inject an error and that pressing 2 will restart the test Pressing the Down arrow key at any point displays the following screen Results 1 Inject error 2 Restart test The nject error option can be used to inject a single error into the bit pattern which has the effect of incrementing the number of bit errors by one Note that pressing 1 on the key pad while on the results screen has the same effect The Hestart test option is used to restart the BER test including clearing all of the error counts Note that pressing 2 on the key pad while on the results screen has the same effect Pressing the Back key returns the display to the previous results screen Test RF CW Screen Modulator CW Off 1 Off 2 On Factory default Off Description Selecting Tx CW causes a pure carrier to be transmitted rather than the normal modulated carrier This is useful for evaluating phase noise and spurious
360. the Quad E1 card is being used between a TRAU Transcoding and Rate Adaption Unit and BTS Base Transceiver Station Other The specified port on the Quad E1 card is not being used in any of the above situations This option allows timeslots for the particular port on the Quad E1 card to be configured manually Off This selects the operating mode for the particular terrestrial port on the Quad E1 card The options represent interfaces between different components within a GSM system The selection is used to default timeslot settings for the particular port in accordance with the type of interface Selecting Other always the timeslots for the particular port on the Quad E1 card to be set up manually 7 112 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface Quad E1 Tx Number of Timeslots Screen Units Minimum value Maximum value Step size Factory default Port 1 no timeslots 0 to 32 0 Step 1 New O Description This sets the number of timeslots dropped off the terrestrial bearer and sent over the satellite in relation to the specific terrestrial port of the Quad E1 card Edit Unit Interface Quad E1 Tx Dropped Timeslots Screen Units Minimum value Maximum value Step size Factory default Description Port 1 dropped timeslots 0 2 New 0 2 Controls which terrestrial timeslots are dropped i e multiplexed into the satellite frame Timeslots can
361. the document Remote M amp C Specification for Quantum and Evolution Series Satellite Modems Both point to point and point to multipoint IP over the ESC channel are supported With point to point mode the modem will allocate internal IP addresses to each end of the ESC channel and these will only be visible internally within the modem In point to multipoint mode the modem needs to be told which remote to connect to as it can only connect to one remote modem at a time Point to multipoint IP over the ESC will be active when the Edit Unit Interface Terrestrial IP Ethernet Traffic Mode is set to a point to multipoint mode When using the web user interface Local Distant button in point to multipoint mode the user is prompted for an IP address for the remote modem to connect to over the ESC channel If you want to make an ESC connection to a specific remote modem without using the web user interface then you can enter the PUP command esc remote x x x x through a telnet session where x x x x is the IP address of the modem to connect to The RS485 Local and RS485 Remote modes are referred to as Link Local and Link Remote respectively These modes create internal links between the ESC port of the modem and the Remote M amp C port in order to facilitate passing M amp C messages over satellite to control a remote modem without the need for external loopback cables between the Async ESC and Remote M amp C ports Both point to point an
362. the following sections 1 19 1 Main Menu Main 1 Status 2 Edit 3 View 4 Test 5 Common London New York The Main menu can be accessed from any display by pressing the MAIN key It is from this menu that all functions are selected It contains the following sub menus Status Displays modem operational status summary information Edit Allows modification of all modem configurable properties View Displays detailed operational status and read only configurable property values Test Controls the selection of test modes Common This provides quick access with fewer key presses to the most commonly used user settings once a modem has been set up for the first time and the link has been established carrier mute power levels frequencies data rates modulation and FEC rates Since all of these options are described elsewhere in this document the Common menu is not described further A user settable Modem Identifier is shown on the bottom line of the screen and is typically used to specify the physical location of the modem or identify the modem satellite link This can be set as described in Section 7 3 3 3 1 1 6 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 2 Status Menu STATUS Setup Traffic Demodulator FCMA SCH BUC Mise SETUP Tx carrier frequency Rx carrier frequency Tx data rate Ex data rate Tx symboal rate Ex symbol rate TRAFFIC Tx path okay since OR last Tx fau
363. ther one or both of the ESC channels to be replaced with either revenue bearing data or possibly a PRBS for on line BER measurement with either the internal or an external BERT A far more useful asynchronous interface to the synchronous 8kbps digital ESC circuit allowing for example M amp C information to be conveyed providing the possibility to provide distant end control via the satellite channel The use of 16kbps ADPCM instead of 32kbps allowing both audio ESC s to be compressed into 32kbps not 64kbps This allows either t All normal IDR facilities in a 64kbps overhead t All normal IDR facilities plus a 32kbps Aux channel in the normal 96kbps overhead which allows an internal or external PRBS test to run in parallel with the traffic to monitor the service quality Reduced IDR facilities with 64kbps or 32kbps overhead 8 17 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 23 Automatic Uplink Power Control AUPC is activated N Authorisation from the satellite operator should be sought before 1 23 1 Introduction Automatic Uplink Power Control AUPC provides a mechanism to counteract changes in atmospheric conditions such as rain that degrade the performance of satellite links It does this by monitoring the distant end signal to noise ratio Eb No and automatically adjusting the local power output of the satellite link to maintain the specified distant end Eb No Distant Eb No monitoring is performe
364. tilizing the same space segment When on a copy of the modem s transmitted signal will be stored in memory and the Paired Carrier signal processing algorithm will attempt to match this with the composite return signal in order to subtract the unwanted near signal leaving just the far carrier Prior to enabling Paired Carrier it is necessary to set up the delay to satellite as in the following menu options Note that there are no other control settings that are specific to Paired Carrier operation other settings used by the Paired Carrier algorithm such as centre frequency and sweep width form part of the normal setup of the modem even for non overlapped carriers and 1 19 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook work in the same way The cancellation bandwidth itself is automatically deduced by the modem from the larger of the transmit and receive symbol rates and roll off factors i e occupied bandwidth The table below indicates the circumstances under which modem signal inversions are required in relation to Paired Carrier operation Paired Carrier BUC LNB Tx Modem HxModem Inversion Inversion Working Non Inverting PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FOR FIRST TIME SETUP OF A PAIRED CARRIER LINK In relation to Paired Carrier generally there are no restrictions on how the overlapped carriers are brought up and the satellite link is established However the following guidelines may be
365. tion address of a packet fails to match any entries in the routing table and the packet has a destination address outside of the local network the packet will be sent to the default gateway if specified otherwise the packet will be discarded Static routes can also be entered and the whole routing table displayed via the telnet interface to Zebra within the Quagga Router when in Routing Mode The Zebra interface is not dissimilar to Cisco s command line interface and is described in the Quagga user manual available from http www quagga net docs quagga pdf Dynamic routing in the modem offers support for RIP V1 and V2 OSPF V2 and V3 and BGP V4 Note that the 64 static routes have precedence over dynamic routes When dynamic routing is on traffic will be automatically routed across satellite correctly by automatic exchange of routing information with other routers The routing information exchange uses satellite bandwidth and is therefore an overhead The amount of bandwidth required depends on the size of the routing tables that are exchanged and the frequency with which they are exchanged Dynamic routing is supported via the Quagga software package Itan only be used on point to point links It is possible to enable routing TCP acceleration and traffic shaping together at the same time but routing is incompatible with the header compression feature Configuration of dynamic routing protocols can be complex and for this reason the mo
366. titute an internal clock TxData TxClock TT Internal Tx Clock ST J Modem Tx yoy yf FIFO DDS y t VCXO ti vi VCXO A Rx Clk Receive Reference Tx Clock Mode 8 3 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 21 2 Receive Clocking There are four receive clocking modes that are used in the modem 1 21 2 1 Satellite When Satellite is selected the modem disables the Rx Doppler buffer and derives a clock from the incoming satellite signal This means that the signal will be subject to Doppler plesiochronous offsets Rx Data RxClock RT ba Modem Rx Data Interface Rx Buffer DDS Data from decoder deframer bius un E Satellite Rx Clock Mode 1 21 2 2 Tx Clock In When Tx Clock In is selected the Rx clock and data are phase locked to the Tx data rate frequency but at the Rx data rate The clock and data appear on RT Receive Timing and RD Receive Data respectively The Rx Doppler buffer is enabled and the output clock for the buffer is derived from either ST or TT 8 4 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook RxData RxClock RT ioi Modem Rx Data Interface Rx Buffer DDS Data from decoder deframer Y TxClock TT P
367. to the EIA RS 422A balanced generators e Type 3 New terminated voltage generator for gt 10Mbps Strictly the modem is compliant with the Type 2 interface defined for use from 100kbps to 10Mbps However this interface will also operate down to 4800bps The low offset voltage Type 1 generator is not supported but as specified for use with older equipment in 1985 should not be an issue today The Type 3 is for data rates above 10Mbit s this physical interface is not currently supported Connectors pin assignments and communication protocols are not standardised in this MIL STD document FED STD 1030A may be considered equivalent to EIA RS423A and CCITT V 10 while FED STD 1020A may be considered equivalent to EIA RS422A and CCITT V 11 P3709 P3713 Eurocom D1 Interface Two versions of Eurocom D1 card are offered P3709 is fully pin for pin compatible with Eurocom 25 way D type plug on the P1451 card for P300 P3713 provides combined Eurocom D1 EIA530 and G703 balanced interfaces on the standard EIA530 25 way D type socket Although P3709 hardware supports the interface mode select pins both cards are configurable from the front panel or web interfaces 10 13 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook P3709 D type connector plu D I F high rate enable Ground 8B UE Glock B input 18 BIE TE Glock A put O TI OE EDU c I F low rate enable Leve Ie modem Em und
368. tomatically populate the routing table based on information forwarded by other routers in the network The modem operates as a two port router in this mode See the TCP IP white paper at http www paradisedata com whitepapers php for more details Bridge mode The routing option is only applicable if an IP Traffic card is fitted See the TCP IP white paper at http www paradisedata com whitepapers php for further details on routing mode operation 7 91 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface IP Mode Ethernet Mode Screen Options Ethernet mode Brouting mode New Bridge mode Bridge mode Select this mode for ordinary Ethernet over satellite bridging i e point to point systems In this mode the Ethernet bridge builds up bridging information based on the replies it receives back allowing it to ascertain which network segments devices are located on Hub Sets up a modem to work as a point to multipoint bridge hub All modems at the hub site should be configured to this mode Bridging rather than brouting should be used in point to multipoint systems that have a direct return path via satellite Hemote Sets up a modem to work as a point to multipoint remote site All modems connected to a point to multipoint bridge network that are situated at remote sites i e not on the hub should be configured to this mode Header Compression This is a bridging point to p
369. topology to separate traffic flows as long as there is a return path In point to multipoint operation each remote modem receives all of the data and use of VLAN tags over just the satellite portion of he link is a useful way of being able to filter out unwanted traffic at the remotes A VLAN id is assigned by the user to each remote modem The hub Tx modem automatically learns what VLAN tags are associated with each remote It also learns the location of every device connected to each remote As data is received at the hub the Tx modem adds a VLAN tag with the id of the remote for which it is destined At the remote unwanted data is filtered out and discarded The VLAN tag is also removed from wanted packets that have been received at the remote before they are forwarded 7 161 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook onto the local terrestrial IP network Note that the use of point to multipoint VLAN filtering relies on the modem generating and removing VLAN tags and it cannot therefore be used in situations where VLAN tags are already present in the data at the point at which it is passed to the modem for transmission On the menus the VLAN ID option is used to set the identifier to be used with VLAN filtering 4094 VLAN ids are available The Bridge M amp C mode ensures the M amp C IP interface is part of the Ethernet bridge If deselected then the IP traffic and M amp C are kept separate Web Acceleration mode a
370. tor IP Traffic Alarms Log Eb No V AUPC Eb No V Rx Power SUMMARY Graphs Constellation eects Y Temperature AUPC Pwr ID Paradise modem Serial No 20700392 Mode In control Control Shared _ Persistence UNIT STATUS RX TRAFFIC TX TRAFFIC TEST MODE TX CARRIER Q channel a graph is not displayed on his page then it is because yo eed to install a suitable r ersion of the Java Runtime Environment Please click on he following link for further information How to install Java channel Signal Constellation Graph 1 20 2 3 Time based Graphs A number of time based graphs can be displayed These update approximately once per second but actual refresh rate will depend upon the Ethernet connection speed and channel loading Graphical values are stored for 31 calendar days or until the modem is powered down The recording of all values occurs automatically at all times once the modem is powered on and is not dependent on whether the graphs are being viewed or not All of the results can be retrieved from the modem perhaps for use in quality reports using one of the remote interfaces see the Hemote M amp C Specification for Quantum and Evolution Series Satellite Modems for more details In fact remote control commands can be used to start the automatic recording of any parameter within the modem whether or not these are supported as graphs on the web interface The web interface supports display of the f
371. tor unlocked Check modem Fault TX CARRIER settings M System Alarms Screen 1 20 8 On line Installation and Operation Handbook This handbook is available on line via the Help button The handbook appears in a pop up window allowing it to be kept open in the background as shown overleaf 7 164 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook fy http 10 0 70 147 user manual pdf Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help qm Back mp fx A SQ search Favorites SiMedia x ER A ji Google Research Web Gy Search Site s Eb Ez block Address amp http 10 0 70 14 7 user manual pdf i Fi Save a Copy Print a n E a EIF 66 nnn Wind xu de 21 Conventions levels that constitute a dangerous risk of electric shock and serious injury f This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of voltage importam operating instructions critical to correct system function This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of 22 Trademarks All trademarks used in this handbook are acknowledged to be the property of thair respectiva owners 2 3 Disclaimer Although every effort amp made to ensure the accuracy and completeness of tha information in this handbook this cannot ba guaranteed and tha information contained harain does not constitute a product warranty A product warra
372. ts drop and insert and maintains timeslot identity This 7 17 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Factory default mode is provided as part of the base modem IBS SMS This is an open network mode where 1 15 framing overhead is added to the data This mode is compatible with other open network equipment IBS SMS mode is described in Section 8 2 1 This mode requires the IBS SAF feature IDR This mode adds 96kbps of framing overhead to the data This mode is compatible with other open network equipment IDR mode is described in Section 8 2 2 This mode requires an IDR option card to be fitted OM 73 This mode provides OM 73 scrambling symbol mapping and OM 73 Viterbi compatibility and requires the OM 73 SAF feature DVBS2 Quantum only This selects the DVB S2 service When selected a pure DVB S2 service is provided with all SCPC features such as Drop and Insert IBS ESC channel etc disabled Note that there are two ways of enabling DVB S2 and this particular option should be used only for IP which through the use of standard IP over DVB encapsulation methods is interoperable at a basic level with other manufacturers DVB S2 equipment DVB S2 interoperability with other vendors is not supported when using other terrestrial interfaces and therefore the DVB S2 service should not be used Instead the SmartLink mode should be selected from the FEC type menu If DVB S2 is required b
373. tum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook high rate asynchronous ESC interface for IBS SMS and Closed Network plus ESC overhead channel data or it provides the Aux function When an IDR option card is fitted then the back panel shared Async ESC port is disabled and the IDR card provides separate ESC and Aux ports In the case of RS232 RS422 and RS485 the relevant physical interface on the Async ESC port is directly connected through to the ESC channel and the data is therefore passed transparently i e whatever is passed through is what comes out on the equivalent interface on the remote modem without being interpreted in any way by either modem For example messages could be passed to control any manufacturer s piece of equipment that is listening on an RS485 multidrop bus hanging off the remote modem The IP mode allows IP packets to be sent over the satellite ESC channel The ESC channel forms part of an Ethernet bridge and it therefore learns which IP packets should be sent over the ESC channel The IP packets need not be destined for the remote modem they will be passed onto the remote Ethernet network if they are addressed to a device on that network The IP packets will be interleaved with AUPC messages when AUPC is switched on It is even possible to send RS485 M amp C messages over the satellite ESC channel at the same time as IP packets provided that the M amp C messages are prefixed with ESC as described in
374. type of scrambler to apply when manual control of the scrambler type is active i e when automatic selection is switched off The following table defines normal operation with respect to scrambler selection 7 39 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Scrambler Availability IBS SMS IBS SMS default Intelsat RS available only if RS mode is On V 35 OM 73 Turbo available only if FEC mode is TPC IDR Closed Intelsat RS default if RS mode is On and FEC mode is not TPC available only if RS mode is On V 35 default if FEC mode is not TPC and RS mode is Off OM 73 Turbo default if FEC mode is TPC available only if FEC mode is TPC Closed Network IBS SMS default if terrestrial data Plus ESC rate is gt 32000 and RS mode is Off Intelsat RS default if RS mode is On V 35 OM 73 Turbo available only if FEC mode is TPC Table of Valid Scrambler Options in Normal Operation Edit Tx Scrambler Enable Screen Scrambler mode Other 1 Off 2 Normal 3 Other Options Off Normal Other Factory default Normal Description Master control for all scramblers In Normal mode scrambler settings are set automatically 7 40 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Scrambler Type Screen Options Factory default Description Scrambler type V 35 New V 35 IBS SMS Only available in Closed Network plus ESC above 32k
375. ue 0 Maximum value 31 Step size 1 Factory default 0 Description Controls which timeslots are dropped and in which order Terrestrial timeslots are mapped into the satellite frame in the order listed on this screen which allows timeslots to be reordered For G 732 operation timeslot numbers 1 32 are used and for T1 D4 and T1 ESF timeslot numbers 1 24 are used Timeslots can be entered as individual numbers separated by commas or as an inclusive range denoted by the first and last timeslot numbers in the range with a hyphen between them For example 0 18 31 17 16 1 swops timeslots groups 18 to 31 with 1 to 16 and additionally reverses timeslots 1 to 16 Note that on this screen the Down arrow key is used to enter a comma and the Up arrow key is used to enter a hyphen The O key pressed together at the same time as the Hight arrow key deletes the character at the cursor If the number of timeslots that are entered differ from the number entered on the Edit Ix Baseband Advanced Timeslots Number Used Screen then the new value will not be accepted and the modem will 14 7 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook remain on this screen Note that when a valid sequence of timeslot numbers is accepted it may take several seconds for the display to update due to the level of internal processing involved 14 8 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx Baseband Advanced T
376. uired or some other problem being experienced with the terrestrial interface o Mute 1 1 the carrier is muted due to being the Standby modem in a 1 for 1 Standby system o Mute Brk the carrier is muted due to a power outage o Mute FIt the carrier is muted due to an alarm detected by the modem software o Mute Cfg the carrier is muted due to the modem being in the process of reconfiguring o Mute Off the carrier has been muted by the user Status Demodulator Screen Eb No 6 3dB BER lt 1 0E 12 Rx power 33dBm Buffer 57 Freq offset 0 0Hz O 1 U 0 This screen is constantly updated with the following information The receive path Eb No figure energy per bit to spectral noise density ratio This is replaced by Es No energy per symbol to spectral noise density ratio when the Down arrow is selected The receive path final bit error rate BER Please note that this figure gives only a crude indication of BER linked directly to the Eb No measurement In most instances the actual BER is significantly better when measured using either the internal PRBS BERT or external equipment The receive path power level The receive path buffer fill status The receive signal frequency offset from the carrier centre frequency This is the measured error of the received carrier relative to the expected frequency It can be used to determine any frequency shift due to the satellite and frequency conversion equipment Number of Dop
377. uld be set to this mode and VLAN filtering should also be enabled on this modem Note that hub Rx only modems in a point to multipoint header compression system should be set to Hub Ethernet Header Compression mode not Hub Header Compression and that the Rx only modems should have VLAN filtering disabled Remote TCP acceleration Header Compression This mode supports point to multipoint TCP acceleration and header compression The remote modems should be set to this mode and VLAN filtering should also be enabled Hub Ethernet Header Compression This implements point to multipoint header compression The hub Rx only modems in a point to multipoint header compression system should be set to this mode and should have VLAN filtering disabled Bridged TCP acceleration This mode supports point to point TCP acceleration but unlike TCP acceleration mode the original Ethernet frames are preserved over satellite This allows TCP acceleration of any number of VLANs Uniquely It also supports acceleration of MPLS streams Note that in this mode for ease of use there is no need to enter an IP address for the IP Traffic card unlike the standard TCP acceleration mode Consequently it is not possible to ping the IP Traffic card in this mode or to telnet into it even if an IP address has been assigned prior to entry to the mode Since the TCP data is effectively bridged over satellite there is also no need to set up static routes or gateways
378. um overhead usage mode custom selection of IDR framing high low rate format customisation of the standard 96kbps IDR overhead to allow one or both audio channels to be omitted or allocated in a custom manner allowing 1x32k in V1 or 2x16k in V1 with V2 spare or omitted depending on Aux settings both V1 and V2 spare or omitted depending on Aux settings Enables AUPC operation additionally requires ESC feature Note that P300 emulated AUPC requires PAUPC SAF to be present LEN Enables the internal Pseudo Random Bit Sequence PRBS Bit Error Rate BER tester wes cp a modulated signal multiplexed onto the IF cable Software Activated Features continued 6 7 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook TCP acceleration at throughput rates up to 10Mbps OM 73 Feature SAFCode Description Enables a Performance Enhancing Proxy that provides acceleration of TCP data over satellite OM73 Enables the OM 73 service including the OM 73 scrambler symbol mapping and Viterbi compatibility Ethernet brouting Enables Ethernet brouting function which supports IP traffic point to jeje operation and the use of an indirect return path Audio AUD Enables P1348 emulation via the IDR card that allows IBS 64kbps carrier 2 audio channels or 128kbps 2 audio and 64kbps data provided with 8PSK CP acceleration at throughput rates up to 16Mbps CP acceleration at throughp
379. uncorrectable and passes the entire block uncorrected i e the error rate goes from 0 to no error correction in one step There is a small transitional area where due to the distribution of the errors the errors in some blocks may be just below the threshold and therefore fully correctable and some blocks may be just above and therefore uncorrectable In practice this effect gives a Reed Solomon satellite circuit a transition from error free to unserviceable in approximately 1dB of change in Eb No In addition to the n k t specification of the code rate there is a parameter called interleaving depth which controls the number of Reed Solomon codewords that are interleaved Interleaving is used to mix up the blocks such that a burst of channel errors is distributed over a number of codewords rather than affecting a lot of bytes from a single block thus improving the resilience to error bursts Interleaving is usually of depth 4 or 8 Reed Solomon outer FEC must never be used in the absence of an inner FEC scheme Section 8 8 describes how to choose optimum custom values for n and k Edit Tx FEC Outer RS Mode Screen RS FEC Normal 1 Off 2 Normal 3 Other Options Off Normal Requires Reed Solomon SAF feature standard in base modem In this mode the Reed Solomon FEC is active and the modem automatically chooses appropriate values for n k and interleaver depth Other Requires both the Reed Solomon and Custom SAF features I
380. urn Rx data in time with the single Tx Clock by also selecting 7x Clock In No other combinations will work The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors Check the phase of the Data n with respect to the Clock In line It is possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line by selecting Edit Tx Carrier RTS enabled 10 12 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook MIL STD 188 114A Interface The modem terrestrial interface is compliant with the interfaces defined in MIL STD 188 114A when set in EIA530 RS422 mode This MIL STD document specifies three types of balanced generators e Type 1 Low offset voltage for 100kbps Defined in the 1985 document for compatibility with older equipment e Type 2 3V offset maximum for 100kbps to 10Mbps MIL STD 188 114A specifies this corresponds
381. useful in proving correct Paired Carrier operation as part of the overall initial link deployment process Once correct operation is established then Paired Carrier can be switched on and off or reconfigured just like any other modem feature You must get each link working correctly as a normal link prior to switching Paired Carrier on You must ensure that there is no spectral inversion in the RF chain if there is then this must be corrected by re inverting it for Paired Carrier operation to work see the above table 1 Ensure Paired Carrier is switched off Main 2 Edit 3 Rx 7 Carrier 4 Advanced 2 PCMA 1 Enable and set to OFF 2 Before starting it is strongly recommended to prepare for a BER data transparency test using data test sets connected to each modem or using the modem internal PRBS BER test feature which can be temporarily enabled if necessary 3 Configure both modems for identical services including the same Tx and Rx frequencies Different PRBS test patterns must be used in each direction e g for Modem 1 Tx to Modem 2 Rx use 2 15 1 and for Modem 2 Tx to Modem 1 Rx use 2 23 1 This ensures that the two signals are sufficiently different from each other to allow Paired Carrier to work 4 Check the Tx power level setting is correct and bring up the first carrier using the selected common transmission frequency and e Check the receive signal level Eb No spectrum and constellation are as expected e Check t
382. ust be able to receive your own uplink signal off satellite It works only with bent pipe transponders where there is no demodulation remodulation or cross strapping between transponders The transponder must do no more than filter frequency convert and amplify the signal Q Is it difficult and time consuming to install and set up Paired Carrier A No The operator sets the satellite delay or alternatively the modem and satellite positions to allow the satellite signal to be acquired A few other parameters specific to Paired Carrier need to be set up Set up takes less than 5 minutes in total Q Is Paired Carrier available as a field upgrade A Yes All Quantum modems can be field upgraded to support Paired Carrier operation to the desired cancellation bandwidth 8 61 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 35 Sat ABIS Sat ABIS is an embedded optimiser in the modem for GSM Abis traffic It is used in symmetric point to point links for cellular backhaul saving up to 50 bandwidth It combines and optimises Abis traffic on four T1 E1 interfaces using either CRCA FAS ESF or D4 framing into a single carrier and supports up to 256 Abis voice channels Compressed data is converted to HDLC framed packets for transmission over satellite Sat ABIS interoperates with GSM equipment from major manufacturers including Alcatel Nokia Ericsson Siemens and Motorola The modems with Sat ABIS sit between th
383. ut no SCPC features are required then as well as selecting SmartLink the Tx service should be set to Closed network as this does not add any extra framing to that provided by DVB S2 Once DVB S2 has been selected various other DVB S2 configuration menu options become available including choice of modulation and FEC rate as well as DVB S2 FEC frame size choice and DVB S2 pilots Off 7 18 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Description Framing mode for the Tx path In general on the Quantum all combinations of SCPC and DVB S2 services are provided including DVB S2 outbound with SCPC return SCPC both outbound and inbound DVB S2 both outbound and inbound etc SmartLink mode see the Edit Tx FEC Inner FEC screen allows SCPC features such as Drop and Insert and the ESC channel to be overlaid on top of DVB S2 thereby allowing legacy applications to benefit from the bandwidth saving efficiencies and extra robustness of DVB S2 7 19 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 19 3 1 2 Edit Tx Baseband Menu Baseband 1 Mode 2 Data rate 3 Audio mode 4 Advanced This menu contains the following options e Mode This controls the transmit baseband mode e Data rate This sets the terrestrial transmit data rate e Audio mode This controls the audio data baseband mode format in IBS SMS emulation mode It is possible to generate a 64kbps data stream from the two 32kb
384. ut rates up to 25Mbps TCP acceleration to 55Mbps Evolution PD55 or 60Mbps Quantum PD60 TCP16 Enables a Performance Enhancing Proxy that provides acceleration of TCP data over satellite This level of acceleration is available only with the IP Traffic option card TCP25 Enables a Performance Enhancing Proxy that provides acceleration of TCP data over satellite This level of acceleration is available only with the IP Traffic option card TCP55 Enables a Performance Enhancing Proxy that provides acceleration of TCP data over satellite This level of acceleration is available only with the IP Traffic option card Petal Ec aM second E1 port option card Saar M eaa third E1 port card fourth E1 port card the base modem Header compression HCP2 Enables Ethernet UDP IP and RTP packet header compression at one way throughput rates up to 29000 packets per second This is available only with the IP Traffic option card MultiMux MUX Enables the multiplexer associated with the Quad E1 card allowing G 703 data serial data and IP to be multiplexed together into one aggregate satellite carrier Serial and IP data nominally replace Quad E1 ports 3 and 4 it is not necessary to purchase the 3E1 and 4E1 SAFs in order to use MultiMux Software Activated Features continued 6 8 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Feature SAFCode Description Web acceleration En
385. vailable if both the Intelsat Reed Solomon and Custom Features features are both available Note that there is nothing special about the Intelsat values other than that they were approved by Intelsat They were chosen because one modem manufacturer could not generate clocks which were not a multiple of 8kHz and these non optimum values make the satellite clock an 8kHz step Where maximum error correction capability is required chose t as high as possible eg 10 and choose n as low as possible eg 60 to maximise the number of bytes than can be corrected per codeword without adding too much overhead In this extreme example it can correct one byte in six t n but the overhead is 50 overhead n k and k n 2t so k 40 gives overhead 60 40 Optimum values may in certain applications mean minimum delay particularly at low data rates and the final paragraph of this section deals with this aspect Due to the synchronisation method used for the interleaver and de interleaver Intelsat specified on 2 codewords blocks of n data bytes out of 16 the error correction capability is slightly reduced by the equivalent of t 1 It is therefore best to avoid choosing a very low value of t so this intermittent reduction in error correcting capability is minimised Note that in theory error correction codes 100 90 5 and 200 180 10 are equivalent they can correct 5 bytes in 100 and 10 in 200 respectively but the effect of the int
386. vanced RSN Codeword Length Screen RS n value 60 to 255symbols 126 Step 1 symbols New 126 Units symbols Minimum value 60 Maximum value 255 Step size 1 Factory default 126 Description Reed Solomon codeword length i e k data symbols n k parity symbols where n k 2 symbol errors per codeword can be corrected Edit Tx FEC Outer Advanced RSK Data Length Screen RS k value 40 to 253symbols 112 Step 2 symbols New 112 Units symbols Minimum value 40 Maximum value 253 Step size 2 Factory default 112 Description Number of data symbols per Reed Solomon codeword range n 2 to n 20 in steps of 2 7 38 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Tx FEC Outer Advanced interleaver Depth Screen RS interleaver depth 4 codewords 1 4 codewords 2 8 codewords 3 12 codewords Options 4 code words 8 code words 12 code words Factory default 4 code words Description Controls resilience to burst errors larger depth gives best BER through data dispersal at the expense of introducing processing delay 1 19 3 1 6 Edit Tx Scrambler Menu Scrambler 1 Enable 2 Type This menu contains the following options e Enable This is the master control for all scramblers t can be used to switch scrambling off or on When on the choice of scrambler can be made automatically by the modem or selected manually e Type This option selects the
387. w latency but BER performance can be 1dB or more worse than conventional LDPC For example TPC 8QAM 74 at 5e 8 BER has an Eb No of 6 4dB compared to LDPC at 5 5dB Conventional LDPC latency can be many times that of TPC For example LDPC 16QAM 74 at 64kbps has a latency of 395ms compared to TPC latency of 47 ms which is a factor of over eight different With satellite delay in addition LDPC can exhibit over 7 second one way delay for very low data rates Low latency LDPC FECs are becoming available that provide comparable BER performance to LDPC with latency nearer to TPC FastLink low latency LDPC from Paradise does precisely this FastLink also offers an extensive range of modulations ranging from BPSK to 64QAM including both 8PSK and 8QAM 16APSK and 16QAM and 32APSK One of the key advantages of FastLink is its flexibility As mentioned FECs offer a trade off between BER performance and latency While the default settings for FastLink achieve this balance two other modes are also available The first mode optimises performance for particularly low latency at the cost of a slight increase in Eb No required to achieve a specific BER The second mode optimises BER performance and is suitable when latency is not an issue e g when higher data rates are being used This flexibility means that FastLink LDPC has now superseded Paradise s conventional LDPC offering This flexibility also means that FastLink can be used in a wide range of de
388. well as a latency figure displayed in terms of both bits and microseconds The facility exists to inject errors into the generated PRBS stream and see these reflected within the error count 7 170 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook petens DATAcoM gt 2 STATUS EDIT 2 VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT Local AME Eyam BERT lt a Generator Analyser ID Paradise modem Serial No 10500355 Channel Main Direction Towards Satellite v Channel Direction From Satellite Mode In control Control Shared Pattern PRBS 20 0151 v Pattern PRBS 20 0151 v album Data Invert J Data Invert RX TRAFFIC smcok TX TRAFFIC TEST MODE Cyclic Error Sync Not Lost TX CARRIER Sync Lost Threshold Auto vi me Counter Action on Sync Loss Elapsed Time 000025 Ems o Help Move the cursor over an item s abel for help EZ BERT Generator Analyser Screen Data Invert allows an inverted data bit stream to be transmitted or received if selected on the analyser The nject Error button can be used to inject a single error into the bit pattern which should increment the number of bit errors by one The Cyclic Error forces a single error to be injected periodically The frequency can be selected from a drop down box in bits which appears once the cyclic error is selected The Elapsed Tim
389. which case the overhead will vary up or down from the standard 1 15th to accommodate whatever Baud rate is set on the ESC Rate screen In all IDR modes the ESC channel is an 8kbps synchronous channel and if the ESC port is set to provide an async interface the exact maximum continuous async rate is Baud Rate 8000 x Bauds per Character 9 Where Bauds per Character is the number of Baud periods per character eg for async character format 8 N there are 10 Baud periods per character start 8 data bits stop 9 as 9 synchronous bits are always used for each character This results in a maximum of 9777Baud with 11 Baud periods per character eg start 8 parity stop and 8888Baud with 10 Baud periods per character eg start 8 stop as used with Paradise M amp C protocols So when set for 8 bits No Parity or 7 bits with Parity the maximum standard Baud rate is 4800 Baud When set for 8 bits with Parity the maximum standard Baud rate is 9600 Baud 1 30 2 Closed Network Plus ESC 1 30 2 1 Overhead Rates The following table shows example overhead rates for different async ESC Baud rates at a variety of main channel data rates The table was generated using a modem with the async character format set for 8 bits no parity the overhead percentages will vary slightly for async character formats different from this 8 27 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Figures Overhead rate with backward
390. wide range of satellite links ranging from traditional low rate SCPC links to high rate broadcast video and IP Initial DVB S2 satellite modem products in the industry reflected the high pioneering costs of the technology and were aimed at high end broadcast video and IP markets Paradise Datacom is proud to bring this technology to a much wider market in the form of the cost competitive Quantum modem which provides backwards compatibility for legacy SCPC links and a painless migration path to newer bandwidth saving technology The Quantum allows e DVB S2 outbound with an SCPC return or an SCPC outbound with a DVB S2 return e DVB S2 outbound and return e SCPC outbound and return e SmartLink mode where SCPC features are combined with DVB S2 space segment savings All traditional SCPC features such as IBS IDR Drop and Insert ESC AUPC etc are supported DVB S2 does not directly support any of these SCPC features and therefore SmartLink was developed to allow existing SCPC services to benefit immediately by switching to the newer highly efficient DVB S2 technology without compromising the services being provided SCPC DVB S2 and SmartLink processing paths through the modem are shown in the diagram overleaf The top path Interface Framer Outer FEC Inner FEC Modulator Demodulator shows the path used in SCPC processing and the functionality that is associated with each of these blocks The lower path Interface SCPC Framer DVB S2 F
391. wser session is closed They are also unaffected by whether the modem is under local or remote control In Giveaway mode control is passed to the first admin user that logs in If an attempt is made to log in as admin when there is already an admin user logged in then the login will succeed but the user will have view only permissions thereby ensuring there can never be two users in control of the modem at the same time In order to allow a switch back to local control from Giveaway mode when there is no remote admin user logged in the local front panel interface can gain control at any time simply by issuing a command from the front panel user interface While a remote admin user is logged in then the local front panel interface is restricted to viewing modem settings only Once a local user has gained control in Giveaway mode they can then change the modem back to local control thereby locking out remote admin users Note that unless the switch back is done local front panel interface control will time out in a similar way to remote admin users and thereby control may be taken away again by a remote admin user During the period between an admin user logging out and either another admin login or a command being issued via the local front panel interface to gain control no user is in control of the modem Although there is no explicit login associated with the local front panel interface there is an implicit login when a key is first p
392. xecuted The source identifier fields can be used to define which source IP addresses read write requests will be accepted from The trap receiver fields are used to define the IP address of a trap server to which trap notifications will be sent when modem alarms are triggered 7 166 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook COND S 9 PARADISE DATACOM 9 QUANTUM SERIES STATUS EDIT HELP LOGOUT Memory M amp C SUMMARY Clocks Identity Interface f Time ID Paradise modem Serial No 999 Mode In control Advanced User f Advanced Upgrade Control Shared System location Modem location Read only access community name public Read write access community hama private V1 trap receiver V2ctrap receiver UNIT STATUS RX TRAFFIC TX TRAFFIC TEST MODE TX CARRIER Administrator contact information Read only source identifier default Read write source identifier defaut Yi trap community public sts S V2 trap community public t S Default trap sink community public Reconfigure Help Move the cursor over an item s label for help SNMP Configuration Screen 1 20 11 Remote Software Upgrade 1 20 11 1 It is possible to update the software and firmware within the modem via the Remote M amp C Ethernet web user interface upgrades via the serial M amp C port are not supported Please read the notes overleaf before proceedi
393. y a 00000000 pack byte in TS16 of every eighth frame after the original CAS MF unique word This keeps the same ratio of 30 signalling nibbles every 8 frames no matter how long the CAS multiframe actually is The CAS Multiframe structure is of variable length in multiples of 8 frames and this feature lends itself to providing timeslot ID Maintenance for Odd value of N ie values which the fixed length TS32 multiframe cannot accommodate This is an efficient use of the overhead as when not sending signalling information 15 out of every 16 TS16 TS48 locations are still available for high rate ESC even when the CAS multiframe is required to support Odd values of N or Robbed Bit Signalling 8 15 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook CAS MULTIFRAME SUMMARY TS Identity Maintenance Method amp Length of CAS Multiframe in frames Any Drop Insert G 732 Drop Insert T1 D4 T1 ESF mode with CAS RBS mode RBS Mode without signalling L e f w a 99 e we a 99 9 CAS 40 CAS 40 T1 only provides a maximum of 24 timeslots to Drop Insert a a These are the Odd values of N for which the Timeslot ID cannot be maintained by the TS 32 Multiframe N 32 is a special case normally handled as unframed 2048kbps ie no Drop Insert or 1920 1984kbps D I with N 30 31 17 18 19 DS Oo O 8 16 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 22 2
394. y high level of composite to wanted power mEENMENMIM A source of interference has been detected underneath the receive carrier that exceeds the alarm threshold set by the user This may be degrading the received signal and should be investigated and reported to the satellite operator The receiver was unable to decode the demodulated LDPC carrier successfully This indicates either that the satellite data has become corrupted or that there is a configuration incompatibility between the encoder and decoder 12 8 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 1 42 Unit Faults To To A PSU line has failed The unit has a linear supply and Unit fault One or more will fail if the mains input is below the specified minimum U TA TC RF TF PSU rails are out of range level Check the mains voltage and the internal PCB CM mounted low voltage fuses Unit fault Station clock has A valid signal cannot be detected on the external Station UD failed Check clock source clock input Check the cable and the clock source i An internal fault has This indicates that the software has been unable to TF RF occurred Please consult initialise the hardware Power the modem down and back U TA TC RES CM factory up to see whether this clears the problem Unit fault Rx backup clock The clock used when the selected Rx clock fails has also U TA TC RF has failed failed Contact technical support for advice Unit fault
395. y in relation to the IP Traffic card The Remote Control Port IP Gateway on the Edit Unit M amp C IP menu will be used in relation to the M amp C network and the Remote M amp C Ethernet port See Section 8 12 for more details of IP addressing Edit Unit Interface IP Address Satellite Port IP Address Satellite port IP address 000 000 000 000 New 000 000 000 000 Factory default 0 0 0 0 Description Sets the IP traffic address for the satellite interface when the modem is in routing mode 7 101 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Edit Unit Interface IP Address Satellite Port IP Netmask Satellite port IP netmask 255 255 255 255 New 255 255 255 255 Factory default 255 255 255 255 Description Sets the IP traffic subnet mask for the satellite interface when the modem is in routing mode Edit Unit Interface IP Address Satellite Port IP Gateway Satellite port IP gateway 000 000 000 000 New 000 000 000 000 Factory default 0 0 0 0 Description Sets the IP traffic gateway for the satellite interface when the modem is in routing mode Edit Unit Interface IP Misc Screens When this option is selected the following sequence of screens is displayed in turn Edit Unit Interface IP Misc VLAN Filtering Screen Enable VLAN filtering Off 1 Off 2 On Options Off 7 102 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook Factory de
396. yed at once allowing the user to see where they currently are in relation to the overall menu system The main part of the screen will change with the tab menu that is selected The summary section on the left of the display is always present and provides basic modem information The Help area is used to provide help on context sensitive features it is triggered by moving the cursor over an item such as a display label which is then described within the Help box The LED mimic on the left of the screen depicts the modem front panel LED indicators A typical Edit screen that demonstrates the most common types of user entry is shown overleaf It shows a mixture of drop down boxes where a selection is made from the options that are presented and edit boxes where a numeric or text value is entered Tool tip help is available by moving the cursor over any display label Help information includes details of minimum and maximum valid values When a value is changed in an edit or dropdown box the background for the box will change to red while the modem is actioning the change when the box changes back to its standard background color then this indicates that the modem has implemented the change 7 153 Quantum and Evolution Series Installation and Operating Handbook 4PARADISE DATACOM NH QUANTUM SERIES E STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP LOGOUT SUMMARY VA f Memory Identity Interface Clocks Advanced Upgrade
397. ync lost 1 The Tx modem is set to operate in CAS mode if CAS signalling is to be conveyed within the IBS SMS overhead 2 If the Tx modem cannot use a CAS Multiframe to maintain the TS identity for the Odd values of N then to prevent this modem seeking a CAS multiframe for one of these values set timeslot identity to Do not maintain 3 If the Tx modem cannot use a CAS Multiframe to maintain RBS over satellite switch RBS off Final BER has exceed 1x10 3 Srevonsoton as toen nine FES Tp frre se w a has been lost in the FEC decoder o c ge M ce TA TATE ra yn an EE lost Check inner FEC configuration The final customer data after demodulation error Rx fault Insert data is all correction deframing and descrambling is all ones ones AIS indicating This is normally used to indicate an upstream equipment upstream equipment fault fault such as a lack of input clock at the Tx end it is not a modem fault Rx fault Data Input is all The modem is set to loop bearer but that bearer is ones AIS indicating indicating AIS upstream equipment fault P aUt RX channel DREL Consult technical support if this alarm cannot be cleared unlocked Rx fault Rx terrestrial DPLL unlocked Consult technical support if this alarm cannot be cleared i Rx fault o mux fault Rx fault SM syncloss Quad E1 sync loss fault Rx fault Physical layer DVB S2 demodulator cannot detect valid DVB S2 sync lost satell

Evolution Series Handbook

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents